Pan Manager Command Reference
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Pan Manager Command Reference as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 45,235
- Pages: 235
PAN Manager Command Reference For BladeFrame® BF400 S2 and BladeFrame® BF200
Document Number 430-SB0085 November 2008 PM5.2_BF
Copyright Copyright © 2008 Egenera, Inc. All rights reserved. This document, and the product described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used in accordance with the terms of such license. The content of this document is furnished for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice. Egenera, Egenera stylized logos, BladeFrame, BladeLatch, BladeMate, BladePlane, cBlade, Control Blade, PAN Manager, pBlade, Processing Blade, sBlade, and Switch Blade are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. PRIMERGY is a registered trademark of Fujitsu Siemens Computers. AMD, AMD Opteron, and AMD Athlon are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.. EMC, CLARiiON, and Symmetrix are registered trademarks of EMC Corporation. The IBM Developer Kit for Linux, Java 2 Technology Edition contains software which is copyright IBM Corporation, Sun Microsystems Inc., Hewlett-Packard Co., and X Consortium. Intel and Itanium are registered trademarks and Xeon is a trademark of the Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun Logo, Solaris, and the Java logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The virtual VGA console uses Microsoft Terminal Services Advanced Client (TSAC), which is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation. MindTerm is copyright AppGate AB. Nero is a trademark of Nero AG. NetApp is a registered trademark and Network Appliance is a trademark of Network Appliance, Inc. Oracle9i is a trademark of Oracle Corporation. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX Products GmbH, a Novell business. VMware, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. Xen, XenSource, XenServer, and XenEnterprise are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Printed in the United States of America. Egenera, Inc., 165 Forest Street, Marlboro, Massachusetts 01752.
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1: PAN Manager Commands Overview Using PAN Manager Commands ............................................................................ 1-2 Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands .............................................. 1-3 The Man Page Format ............................................................................................. 1-8
Chapter 2: PAN Manager Commands ACCOUNT ............................................................................................................. 2-2 APP ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 BFRAME ............................................................................................................ 2-15 BLADE ................................................................................................................. 2-21 CONSOLE ......................................................................................................... 2-33 DISK ................................................................................................................... 2-35 ETH ................................................................................................................. 2-44 EVENT ................................................................................................................. 2-49 EVENTTYPE ....................................................................................................... 2-56 EXERES ............................................................................................................ 2-62 EXTNET .............................................................................................................. 2-66 FOP ................................................................................................................... 2-70 FS ....................................................................................................................... 2-75 HMON ................................................................................................................ 2-79 INTNET .............................................................................................................. 2-85 IP .................................................................................................................... 2-87 LB ................................................................................................................... 2-92 LPAN ................................................................................................................. 2-102 iii
PAN Manager Command Reference
MON .................................................................................................................. 2-113 MONDEF ........................................................................................................... 2-119 NFS ................................................................................................................... 2-122 PAN .................................................................................................................... 2-125 PANMGR ........................................................................................................... 2-144 PIM .................................................................................................................... 2-145 POOL .................................................................................................................. 2-150 PSERVER .......................................................................................................... 2-156 RETH .................................................................................................................. 2-175 ROLE .................................................................................................................. 2-182 SAN .................................................................................................................. 2-184 SMTPSVR ......................................................................................................... 2-192 SNMP ............................................................................................................... 2-194 SNMPMGR ....................................................................................................... 2-198 SW ..................................................................................................................... 2-202 TAPE ................................................................................................................ 2-206 UMON ............................................................................................................... 2-209 USER ................................................................................................................. 2-213 VERSION .......................................................................................................... 2-217
iv
Preface
Welcome to PAN Manager PM5.2_BF. The PAN Manager Command Reference is part of the PAN Manager documentation set. Its purpose is to describe how PAN Manager commands are grouped, and provides the command man pages in a print format. Audience — PAN Manager Command Reference is for PAN Administrators and LPAN Administrators. Topics — Read this book to learn about the following: •
Using PAN Manager Commands
•
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
•
The Man Page Format
PAN Manager Documentation Set — To learn about the other documents available in the PAN Manager documentation set, see Chapter 2, “Document List,” of PAN Manager Feature Summary. PAN Manager Features — To learn about the PAN Manager features available in the current release, see Chapter 3, “Feature List,” of PAN Manager Feature Summary.
v
PAN Manager Command Reference
Customer Support
If you require customer support regarding this product, use the following contact information. Fujitsu Siemens Computers customer support Internet
http://www.fujitsu-siemens.com/support
Telephone
See the Help Desk information at http:// manuals.fujitsu-siemens.com/ primergyservers.html under General Information, Warranty and Support.
Document Conventions
Convention
Description
>
Directory-level delimiter used to navigate the left pane of the PAN Manager GUI. Example: Resources > Ethernet Connections
Sans serif italics
Variable text, such as a path, a filename, or an LPAN name. Example: lpan -c lpanname
Sans serif
Text that must be typed as shown. Example: Type root at the login prompt.
vi
PM5.2_BF
Preface
Convention
Description
Bold
The name of a field or window element appearing in a GUI. It also highlights default values in PAN Manager man pages. Example: In the Users page...
Italics
Text that is emphasized. Example: Do not connect the power.
[text]
Text that is optional to a command.
{text}
A set of choices, one of which is required.
|
Separation of mutually exclusive choices in syntax lines. Example: lpan [-aD | -rD]{switch | SCSI_ID} lpanname
Note
Information of importance or that may not fit in main text.
Caution
Failure to heed a caution could result in loss of data.
!
PM5.2_BF
Warning — Failure to heed a warning could result in physical harm to the user or the hardware.
vii
PAN Manager Command Reference
viii
PM5.2_BF
Chapter 1 PAN Manager Commands Overview
This overview of the PAN Manager Command Reference includes the following topics: •
Using PAN Manager Commands
•
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
•
The Man Page Format
1-1
PAN Manager Command Reference
Using PAN Manager Commands
PAN Manager provides a set of commands that you can use from the Linux command line or from scripts like any other Linux command. These commands are described in detail in the next chapter, and their documentation can also be accessed on-line as described below.
Using the PAN Manager commands in scripts
If you are running shell scripts with PAN Manager commands, you must add the following line at the beginning of the script: #!/bin/bash --login
For more information about how to run scripts using PAN Manager commands, see the PAN Manager Scripting Guide.
Argument placement
For PAN Manager commands that have add, create, edit, or modify options, the argument of those options must be placed at the end of the command string. For example, to add a user and specify the user’s e-mail address, enter the following: user -a -E [email protected] username
Even though the option flag (-a) is at the beginning of the command, the argument (username) must be at the end of the command string. If the argument of one of these options is not the last string, a parsing error may occur, losing the user’s original intent.
Accessing PAN Manager man pages
1-2
PAN Manager man pages are reference pages available for each PAN Manager command. PAN Manager man pages conform to the standard Red Hat Linux man page format.
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
You access PAN Manager man pages from the Linux prompt like any other man page, except that you must preface the command with an “egenera_” prefix. For example, to view the lpan man page, enter the following command at the Linux prompt: # man egenera_lpan
Accessing PAN Manager Help
To display the options and appropriate syntax for each command, enter the following command, substituting the actual command name: # help commandname
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
The following tables group PAN Manager commands according to commonly performed functions. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for a detailed understanding of how and when these functions are used while managing a PAN.
Getting Started
PAN administrators use the following commands to configure the basic settings for a PAN: Task
Commands used
Rename the platform.
BFRAME
Configure the PAN security domain, including an SNMP agent, a mail server, and boot and root images.
SNMP SNMPMGR PAN
Configure power management.
BFRAME PIM
PM5.2_BF
1-3
PAN Manager Command Reference
Configuring Connectivity
PAN administrators use the following commands to set up their PAN’s network communication: Task
Commands used
Configure the cBlade Ethernet configurations.
ETH
Configure the cBlade Redundant Ethernet (rEth) connections.
RETH
Configure external management network properties.
EXTNET
Configure internal management network properties.
INTNET
Create a new resource that mounts a shared disk or a directory on the network so that services can access storage outside the LPAN.
NFS
Configure the cBlade Virtual Switches (vSwitches).
SW
Configure external disk or tape devices.
DISK SAN TAPE
Establishing Access Control
1-4
PAN administrators use the following commands to set up user accounts for everyone who will work directly in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create Linux accounts.
ACCOUNT -a
Create Linux account passwords.
ACCOUNT -m-p
Assign administrative roles to PAN Manager users.
USER -aR
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
Creating LPANS
Creating pServers
PAN or LPAN administrators use the following commands to create LPANs and add resources to them in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create a new LPAN.
LPAN -c
Allocate pBlades to an LPAN.
LPAN -aB
Allocate disks to an LPAN.
LPAN -aD
Allocate vSwitches to an LPAN.
LPAN -aD
Assign administrative roles to users of the LPAN.
USER -aR
Create a pServer pool.
POOL
Once LPAN administrators have created LPANs, they use the following commands to create pServers within LPANs in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create a new pServer.
PSERVER -c
Assign a primary pBlade to a pServer.
PSERVER -P bladename
PM5.2_BF
Assign a pBlade processing pool to a pServer.
PSERVER -B “none” bladepoolname
Assign a failover pBlade or pBlade pool to a pServer.
PSERVER -F
Assign a disk to a pServer. (To partition a disk and add a root file system, use the DISK command.)
PSERVER -a
Assign the vSwitch(es) to a pServer.
PSERVER -a
Boot a pServer.
PSERVER -b
1-5
PAN Manager Command Reference
Configuring Application Control
LPAN administrators use the following commands to create the configurations necessary to run applications under the control of PAN Manager: Task
Commands used
Create an IP resource for an application.
IP
Define a file system resource.
FS
Create a health monitor for application(s).
HMON
Create a failover policy for application(s).
FOP
Configure an application to run under PAN Manager control.
APP
Configure a load-balancing service.
LB
Create or modify an executable resource that let users start, stop, or run a program or script (Linux init scripts, for example) on a pServer.
EXERES
Create a new resource that mounts a shared disk or a directory on the network so that services can access storage outside the LPAN
NFS
For specific information on using the hmon command, see PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Monitoring the PAN
1-6
PAN or LPAN administrators use the following commands to display the status of or alter the various hardware and software monitors in their PAN or LPAN: Task
Commands used
List events that have been registered by the PAN Manager software.
EVENT
List the event types that the PAN Manager software monitors or modify a specific event type actions.
EVENTTYPE
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
PM5.2_BF
Task
Commands used
List and modify the default trigger values for each monitor the PAN Manager software monitors.
MONDEF
List and modify the default trigger values for each system monitor of the PAN.
MON
List, modify, or create user-defined monitor resources for an LPAN. User-defined monitor resources let a user create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors, and use the monitor’s events to control PAN Manager behavior.
UMON
1-7
PAN Manager Command Reference
The Man Page Format
PAN Manager man pages follow a format commonly seen in Linux man pages. The format for PAN Manager man pages can include the following items: Format
Content
NAME
The command name followed by a brief, functional description.
SYNOPSIS
A listing of syntax showing how to use each command argument.
DESCRIPTION
The details of command functionality and important technical details.
OPTIONS
The descriptions of each command option function.
EXAMPLESa
Specific uses of some or all of a command's arguments.
RETURN VALUES
A description of the command's return value, a useful feature for scripting purposes.
SEE ALSO
A list of related man pages in alphabetical order to aid the reader in seeing other commands related to the task they are performing.
a. Not provided for certain commands or platform
1-8
PM5.2_BF
Chapter 2 PAN Manager Commands
This chapter provides an alphabetical list of the PAN Manager commands, and is formatted to provide users with printed and html versions of the command manpages. PAN Manager Command Syntax For PAN Manager commands that have add, create, edit, or modify options, the argument of the option must be placed at the end of the command string. For example, to add a user and specify the user’s email address, enter: user -a -E [email protected] username
•
Even though the option flag (-a) is at the beginning of the command, the argument (username) comes at the end of the command string. If the argument of one of these options is not the last string, a parsing error may occur, losing the user’s original intent
2-1
PAN Manager Command Reference
ACCOUNT
NAME
account
- creates, lists, or modifies a user’s Linux account on a
cBlade.
SYNOPSIS
account [-l] [username] account -a [-L "descriptive_label" -N groupname]
username account -r [-R] username account -m [-U UID] [-P password] [-N groupname] [-L "descriptive_label"] [-H homedirectory] [-I groupID] [-S defaultshell] username account [-lG] account [-aG |-rG] groupname
DESCRIPTION
The account command provides a Linux account tool for the PAN Manager software. Only PAN administrators use the account command to add, remove, modify, or list user accounts on both Control Blades (cBlades). The software facilitates a PAN administrator’s tasks of creating Linux user accounts by duplicating the Linux account information on both cBlades. By default, PAN Manager software is enabled to allow PAN administrators to create and remove users. PAN administrators can choose to enable a third-party Linux user account management tool using the pan -u command; however, by enabling a third party management of Linux accounts, they cannot use the account command to set up Linux user accounts. For additional information, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. You must create a Linux account for any administrator who will need to access the Control Blade directly, such as for installation or debugging purposes. Be sure to issue these accounts with discretion, as they have security implications.
2-2
PM5.2_BF
ACCOUNT
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: username
Reference to the username PAN Manager uses to identify a PAN Manager user. groupname
Reference to a Linux-recognized group that exists on the cBlades.
OPTIONS
-aG, --addgroup groupname
Specifies a Linux-recognized group to create. If you want to create a Linux user account and add that user to a group at the same time with the -N (groupname) option, you must first create the group using this option with the -aG (addgroup) option. -a, --add username
Specifies a new Linux user account. Use this option with the -L the -N (groupname) option, and requires a unique username. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you add a user to group at the same time you create a Linux user account so you do not create a new GID in the /etc/group file with the same number as the UID created. See the Linux usermod man page for more information.
(description) or
-H, --homedir homedirectory
Specifies the login directory associated with the specified Linux user account. When an account is initially created, a default /home/ username directory is created and assigned as the login directory
PM5.2_BF
2-3
PAN Manager Command Reference
for the user. If you use this option to change the login directory, make sure that the directory already exists before the user can log in. This option is only valid with the -e (edit) option. -I, --groupid groupID
Specifies a group ID number for a Linux user account. -l, --long
Lists the Linux user accounts and displays the description, UID, groupname, GID, home directory, and default shell for each username. This option is only valid with the -l option. Using the command without an argument lists all the Linux user accounts by username only. -L, --description "text"
Adds a description to the information associated with the specified Linux user account. This option is valid with the -a (add) or -m (modify) options. Enter this option’s text within quotes as in the example: account -aN development -L "Development manager" cgable -lG, --listgroup
Lists the current groupnames with their group ID. -m, --modify
Allows you to edit the information associated with the user account. With this option, you must specify any or all of the -U (UID), -N (group/GID), -L (description), or -H (home directory) options. -N, --groupname groupname
Specifies a Linux recognized group to which to add a user. Groups are created with the -G (group) option. This option is used with the -a (add) and -m (modify) options and requires a groupname as an argument. When you create a new Linux account, the default group is that user. For this reason, Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you specify an existing group.
2-4
PM5.2_BF
ACCOUNT -P, --password "text"
Sets a Linux user password for a user account. You can create or modify a user password using this option with the -m (modify) option. -r, --remove username
Removes a Linux user account. For complete removal of a user, add the -R (recursive) option to remove the home directory of the user as well. -R, --recursive
Removes all traces of the Linux account, including the user default directory and the /etc/group and /etc/passwd listings for the specified user. This option is only valid with the -r (remove) option. -rG, --removegroup groupname
Specifies a Linux-recognized group to delete. -S, --shell defaultshell
Specifies the Linux shell associated with the specified Linux user account. When an account is initially created, the default assignment is the bash shell. If you use this option to change a user’s shell, make sure that the shell file already exists before the user logs in. This option is only valid with the -m (modify) option. -U, --uid UID
Specifies a user ID to use with the specified Linux user account. By default, when you add a user account, a UID is automatically generated. Use this option to change the default UID of the Linux user account. This option is only valid with the -m (modify) option.
EXAMPLES
List user accounts by name, description, UID, group name, GID, home directory, and default shell: account -l
PM5.2_BF
2-5
PAN Manager Command Reference
Create Linux user cgable and add him to the development group; also pick up GID, if it exists: account -N development cgable
Edit a user’s home directory for login: account -m -H /home/panmgr cgable
Delete user account cgable and remove the /home/cgable directory: account -r -R cgable
Add the group production: account -aG production
Add user cgable to the production group account -m -N production cgable
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
UMON ROLE PAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-6
PM5.2_BF
APP
APP
NAME
- creates, lists, or modifies an application configured to run under PAN Manager control.
SYNOPSIS
app [-c] [-L description] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [[-a filesystem] [-G nfs] [-I IPresource] [-N executable {-B {"yes"|"no"} |-S {"yes"|"no"}|-E {"yes"|"no"}}] [-o order]] [-V "name=value"] [-F failoverpolicy] [-H healthmon -j IPresource] [-P primary_pservername]
app
lpanname/application app [-k newname] [-F failoverpolicy |-e] [[-I |-i] IPresource] [-H monitorname -j IPresource |-h monitorname] [[-G |-g] nfs] [[-a |-r] filesystem] [[-N |-n] executable] [-o order] [-V "name=value" |-v name] [-p] lpanname/application app [-b | -d | -m [pservername] |-s [-f]] lpanname/
application app [-l] lpanname[/application] app -R executable lpanname/application app --add-monitor monitorname lpanname/application app --remove-monitor monitorname lpanname/application app -M monitorname -U eventname -Q {"failover"| "restart"|"none"} lpanname/application
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The app command configures a stand-alone application to run under PAN Manager control, for high availability. After you create a filesystem, a network resource, a health monitor, a failover policy, a health monitor, an executable resource, an NFS mount point, a failover policy, or a load-balancing service in an LPAN, use the app command to choose the dependencies and policies for an application with the appropriate option.
2-7
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/app_name
This is a reference to a high-availability application running on the primary pServer you create using the app command. To maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN you would like the application to run in. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a '/' between the LPAN name and the application name. For example, the application, Webserver1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as 'production/ Webserver1'. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs. monitorname
Specifies a PAN Manager user-defined monitor. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors.
OPTIONS
--add-monitor monitor_name
Associate a user-defined monitor with the specified application. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors. -a, --add-filesystem lpanname/application
Designates a filesystem resource disk to mount for a high-availability application’s physical resources to access using PAN Manager software.
2-8
PM5.2_BF
APP -A, --autostart {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an application starts when the pServer boots and the PAN agent is available. By default, this is set to “no.” -b, --start lpanname/application
Manually starts all stand-alone application resources. This option is required to start an application after the stand-alone configuration has been created and the LPAN is booted. -B, --exeres-start {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether to start the specified executable resource on the pServer when the application starts. The LPAN administrator can start all resources (for example network resources or SCSI file disk resources) without starting the executable resources to help install or debug an application. -c, --create lpanname/application
Creates the application specified. -d, --delete lpanname/application
Deletes the specified stand-alone application configuration from an LPAN. -e, --reset-failover
Removes the current failover policy from an application. -E, --exeres-execute {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether or not users can run the specified executable resource on the pServer after the application starts and before the application stops. -f, --force
Forces an application to stop. This option can only be used with the -s (stop) option.
PM5.2_BF
2-9
PAN Manager Command Reference -F, --set-failover failoverpolicy
Assigns a failover policy to an application. When specifying a failover policy, use only a failover policy set to use a pServer configured to run this application. -g -- remove-nfs nfs_resource
Removes a network disk resource. -G --add-nfs nfs_resource
Adds a network disk resource and configures it to run under PAN Manager control for high availability. -h, --remove-healthmonitor monitorname
Removes the specified health monitor from an application. -H, --add-healthmonitor monitorname
Assigns a health monitor to an application. -i, --remove-ipresource IPresource
Removes the specified network resource assignment from an application. -I, --add-ipresource IPresource
Assigns a network resource to an application. -j, --assign-hmon-ipresource hmon-associated IPresource
Assigns a network resource to a health monitor. Before assigning a health monitor to an application you must specify the network resource that the health monitor uses. The network resource must already be assigned to the application. -k,--rename new_name
Renames the specified application.
2-10
PM5.2_BF
APP -l, --long
Lists information about each stand-alone application within an LPAN such as status, configuration, and the IP, failover policy, and all resources used by each application. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified application. -m, --move pservername
Moves an application to the specified pServer. If the option is used without the pservername argument it moves the application to the pServer set in the current failover policy. To use this option without an argument, create a failover policy with the fop command using a pServer configured to run this application. -M, --monitor monitor_name
Specifies an existing user-defined monitor that has already been added to the application configuration. LPAN administrators add user-defined monitors to the application configuration with the --add-monitor option. Use this option with the -U (event), and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure a user-defined monitor event and specify actions for a specific user-defined monitor for this application. -n --remove-exeres executable_resource
Removes the specified executable resource. -N --add-exeres executable_resource
Assigns a specified executable resource to the application. -o, --order resource_order
Specifies an order in which you want this application to use specified resources, if you need to specify the order in which resources start. Use this option with the -S, -N, -G, and -I options.
PM5.2_BF
2-11
PAN Manager Command Reference -p, --remove-primaryserver primarypservername
Disassociates the specified pServer from an application. -P, --primaryserver primarypservername
Assigns a pServer within a specified LPAN to run the specified application. -Q, --set-event-action {"failover"|"restart"|"none"}
Specifies an action to take if a a user-defined monitor triggers an event. -r, --remove-filesystem filesystem
Removes a filesystem resource for a specified stand-alone application. -R, --run-exeres executable_resource
Run an executable resource that can be invoked by an administrator at any time after an application has started and before it has stopped. --remove-monitor monitor_name
Remove the specified user-defined monitor association from an application. -s, --stop lpanname/application
Manually stops the specified stand-alone application. Use this option to shut down a stand-alone application or to stop resources, instead of halting the application from within its pServer. -S, --exeres-stop {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether or not to stop the specified executable resource on the pServer when the application stops. -U, --event event_name
Configures a user-defined monitor event. LPAN administrators use this option in conjunction with the -M (monitor) and -Q
2-12
PM5.2_BF
APP (set-event-action)
options to configure an action for the
specified event. -v, --remove-variable variablename
Removes the environment variable. -V, --add-variable {"name=value"}
Creates an environment variable name and value (such as VMWARE_CONFIG and /vmware_mnt/linux/linux.cfg). This makes the application associated with this environment variable available for all executable resources and user-defined monitors executed on the pServer.
EXAMPLES
The following example configures an instance of Apache to run under PAN Manager control with the following settings: LPAN name:
development
Application name: Apache1 Primary pServer: Web1 Use the following resources already configured: Filesystem:
Apache_fs
Failover policy: IP resource:
Apache_failover
Apache_IP
Health monitor:
Apache_health
Executable resource:
Apache_exe
app -c -a Apache_fs -P Web1 -F Apache_failover -j -H Apache_health -I Apache_IP -N Apache_exe development/ Apache1
PM5.2_BF
2-13
PAN Manager Command Reference
Start the Apache1 application: app -b development/Apache1
Move this application from its current pServer to one listed in the Apache_failover policy: app -m development/Apache1
Stop this application: app -s development/Apache1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EXERES FOP FS HMON INTNET IP LPAN NFS PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-14
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME
BFRAME
NAME
- lists hardware and configuration information about a specified platform and modifies its power settings.
SYNOPSIS
bframe [platformname]
bframe
bframe [-g | -I BFID] bframe [-l] [platformname] bframe -n newname [oldname] bframe [-s |-x] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [platformname] bframe [-W {16|20|24|30}] [platformname] bframe [-U {200|208|210|216|220|230|240}][-P {"separate"|"AC-BD"}] [platformname]
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to directly specify voltage drop targets to guide PAN Manager in failing over a PIM-R power line using the PAN Manager bframe command is deprecated in Release 5.1. This command will be removed from future releases. The following command option should be removed from any scripts: bframe [-p "high"|"medium"|"low"]
For Release 5.1 and higher, PIM-R power line failover is automatically calculated to be 85% of the configured voltage. For systems with PIM-Rs, the default value is 200 volts; for this configuration, PAN Manager initiates a failover to the second power line if the primary line voltage drops to 170 volts or lower (85% of 200).
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The bframe command lists the status of a specified platform within the PAN security domain. Administrators use the bframe command to do the following:
2-15
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Configure PAN Manager support for power management.
•
Shut down or reboot a specified platform. Note: Shutting down a platform shuts down all the servers running on it, and then the two cBlades. Rebooting a platform brings back the last configuration before it was shut down.
•
Display the status, power configuration, processor configurations, blade, and current usage details of a platform.
All users can use the bframe command without arguments to display the overall status, power configuration, processor configurations, blade, and current usage details of the platform you are using. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname
Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you rename a new platform to something specific to your application. This name is used in arguments when you issue the eth, pserver, pool, reth, role, and blade commands. platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
2-16
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME
OPTIONS
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
-f, --force
Forces a bframe operation without a prompt. You can use -f with the -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) options -g, --suggest-frame-id
Requests PAN Manager to suggest a unique platform ID (BFID) for the current platform by discovering all platforms on the local network and then picking an ID that is not in use. -I, --set-frame-id BFID
Sets a new platform ID (BFID). -l, --long
PAN administrators use this option to list the status, serial numbers, processor configuration, and current usage in LPANs for each of their platform’s physical blades and vBlades. Also displays FRU data such as BMC, BIOS, and CMOS revs. The output displays only populated chassis slots to which the user has access. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional warning message to be displayed before a platform is shut down. PAN administrators can use this option to provide details to PAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. PAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -n, --rename newname oldname
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified platform.
PM5.2_BF
2-17
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --power-domain {"separate"|"AC-BD"}
Specifies whether a platform is configured with four power domains or combined into two power domains (requires Y-cables). Use separate to configure four separate power domains; use AC-BD to combine power domains. (This option does not apply to BladeFrame BF200 systems.) -s, --shutdown platformname
Gracefully shuts down all pServers, LPANs, and hardware in this order (Slave, then Master cBlade). PAN administrators use this option with the -T (time) and -M (message) options to create a conditional shutdown. Note: When you power down a platform with the bframe -s option, the entire platform, including switches, is gracefully powered off. To power back on, you must flip the breaker switches on domains A and B. If you insert a cBlade and attempt to boot it without first cycling these switches, it will fail to boot with a “switches broken or missing” kernel panic message. -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before the blades of a platform begin to shut down. PAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -U, --power-input {200|208|210|216|220|230|240}
Specifies the power input voltage to the platform. By default the power input is configured for 200 Volts. PIM-R power line failover is automatically calculated to be 85% of the configured voltage. For systems with PIM-Rs, the default value is 200 volts; for this configuration, PAN Manager initiates a failover to the second power line if the primary line voltage drops to 170 volts or lower (85% of 200). -W, --bladeplane {16| 20 24|30}
Specifies whether the BladePlane is configured as 16, 20, 24, or 30 Amperes. By default the BladeFrame BF400 S2 BladePlane is configured for 20 Amperes.
2-18
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME -x, --reboot platformname
Specifies that a platform reboots. Note: The last configuration of a pServer is rebooted. This means that previously booted LPANs reboot, and if a pServer was running on a failover pBlade, the pServer reboots using either the specified failover pBlade or the first available pBlade in the failover pool when the reboot occurs.
EXAMPLES
View the current state of the pBlades and cBlades on the platform PlatformOne: bframe PlatformOne
View the current state of both cBlades: bframe | grep ^c
For the PlatformOne platform, set the power input voltage to 220 and the BladePlane amperage to 30 from the default settings of 200 and 24, respectively (this also sets the failover voltage target to 187 volts if the system utilizes PIM-Rs): bframe -W 30 -U 220 PlatformOne
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BLADE EVENTTYPE LPAN PAN PIM POOL
PM5.2_BF
2-19
PAN Manager Command Reference PSERVER ROLE SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-20
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
BLADE
NAME
- Lists or controls manual diagnostic tools on a specified cBlade, pBlade, or sBlade (the BladeFrame BF200 does not have an sBlade).
SYNOPSIS
blade {-b |-s |-x}[-w][-l]{platformname/pn[-n]| platformname/sn}
blade
blade {-b |-s |-x}[-w][-f] platformname/cn blade {-b |-s |-x} -S [-w][-f] platformnameES/cn blade --boot-hypervisor [-I image_name] {platformname/ pn} blade [-c][-M RAMvalue{"Gb"|"Mb"}][-P cpu_number][-p {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"}] platformname/pn-n blade -p {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"} platformname/pn[-n] blade --config-hypervisor [-I image_name] {platformname/pn} blade --unconfig-hypervisor {platformname/pn} blade [--notify-slave-hypervisor| --promote-to-master-hypervisor]{platformname/pn} blade -d platformname/pn-n blade [-D | -R] platformname/pn blade -h hostname platformname/cn blade --list-vblades [-l] [platformname/pn[-n]] blade -n {platformname/pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn} blade [--select|--unselect |-i |-o][-l] {platformname/ pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn} blade [-W | -C] platformname/pn
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The blade command lists information about a specified blade and allows you to perform diagnostic operations. Administrators use the blade command to do the following: 2-21
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Power on or off any blade in a platform.
•
Diagnose problems associated with hardware or a system hang traced to a specific blade.
•
Create or delete a vBlade configuration on a pBlade.
•
Recover a hypervisor group from recovery mode.
•
Configure, unconfigure, boot, and shutdown a hypervisor instance running on a pBlade.
•
Modify the cBlade hostname.
Caution: Place a pBlade into or remove it from the maintenance LPAN (.maint). Use of the blade command can make a blade unavailable to its LPAN. If the LPAN has failover actions defined for this blade, those actions could be triggered, affecting applications and other blades running in that LPAN. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends notifying LPAN administrators that a blade in their LPAN is being diagnosed, so they are prepared in the event that a specified blade is shut down, rebooted, or marked unused by PAN Manager software. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
2-22
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
platformname/pn-n
Specifies a vBlade (of a particular pBlade), preceded by the platform on which it is located. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use the format pn-n to specify the vBlade name, where: •
pn is the name of the pBlade (such as p5) that hosts this vBlade.
•
-
•
n is a number (from 1 to 32) that uniquely identifies this vBlade
(hyphen) is a required separator.
on its pBlade.
OPTIONS
-b, --boot
Indicates that you want to power on the specified blade. You do not need to use this option initially. Use this command option to power on and boot a specified blade that you manually shut down or powered off. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the PAN Manager command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete. --boot-hypervisor [-I image_name] platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies that you want to power on the target pBlade and boot a hypervisor (in preparation for running vBlades on that pBlade). PAN Manager follows these rules to determine which hypervisor to boot on the pBlade: •
PM5.2_BF
If you specify a hypervisor ISO image name in this command, PAN Manager boots the hypervisor from that image.
2-23
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
If you omit the image name in this command, PAN Manager tries to obtain the hypervisor ISO image to use from the following: a. The pBlade’s current hypervisor configuration (if any) b. The PAN’s default hypervisor ISO image (if any)
If PAN Manager can’t obtain a hypervisor ISO image, it displays an error message. -c, --create-vblade {platformname/pn-n}
Specifies that you want to create a vBlade on a specified pBlade. The target pBlade slot must be filled in order for this command to be valid. LPAN administrators can use this option with the -M (memory) and -P (CPUs) options to set configurations on this vBlade. -C, --cool platformname/pn
Turns off the power for a failover pBlade that you have designated as warm using the -W (warm) option. --config-hypervisor {platformname/pn}
Specifies that you want the target pBlade to be configured with a hypervisor (in preparation for running vBlades on that pBlade). Including this option without a hypervisor ISO image name tells PAN Manager to use the default hypervisor ISO image PAN administrators set with the PAN Manager command pan --setdefault-hypervisor-image image_name. If no default hypervisor ISO image is currently set, PAN Manager displays an error message. To specify a hypervisor ISO image name instead of using the default, LPAN administrator must combine this blade command option with the -I (image_name) option. -d, --delete-vblade {platformname/pn-n}
Deletes the vBlade on a specified pBlade. Specifies that you want to remove the target vBlade from its pBlade. LPAN administrators can delete a vBlade only when the specified pBlade slot is filled,
2-24
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
the vBlade is not currently assigned to a pServer configuration or used by a running pServer, and the vBlade is not currently assigned to a blade pool. -D, --set-maintenance platformname/pn
Marks the pBlade for a maintenance task. This places the pBlade in the maintenance LPAN (.maint), but does not remove the pBlade from the LPAN and pServer, if any, in which it is already configured. This option assumes the pBlade is currently in an Out of Service state (blade -o). -f, --force
Forces a cBlade operation without a prompt. This option requires a -b (boot), -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) option. Used with the -s or -x option, forces a cBlade shutdown with no attempt to do it gracefully. You cannot combine this option with sBlade, pBlade, or vBlade operations. -h, --hostname platformname/cn
Allows a PAN administrator to change the default cBlade hostname (control-blade-A and control-blade-B) to something more meaningful. -i, --in-service platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to assign In Service status to a specified specified blade. In normal start-up mode, PAN Manager automatically marks a blade as In Service, so there is no need to use this option initially. Use this command when you need to toggle a specified blade status from Out of Service to In Service. Placing a blade In Service powers it on. In many cases this results in the blade automatically booting. -I, --media-image image_name
Specifies the display name of a particular hypervisor ISO image (as registered in the PAN under media images) to override the default hypervisor ISO image. To view a list of the registered hypervisor
PM5.2_BF
2-25
PAN Manager Command Reference
ISO images and their display names, use the PAN Manager command pan -i. -l, --long [platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}]
Lists information about a specified blade or all the blades in a platform. Information includes FRU data such as architecture, and BMC, BIOS, and CMOS revs. --list-vblades platformname/pn-n
Specifies that you want to display information about vBlades only (not pBlades). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -l (long) option to request a long version of the listing, with details about the specified vBlade(s). -M, --memory RAMvalue {"Gb"|"Mb"} platformname/pn-n Specifies how many GB or MB of the pBlade’s RAM to allocate to this vBlade. LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -p (priority), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the memory allocation of this vBlade. If you omit this option, the default value of 512MB is used. For details on valid values for this option, see the list of restrictions in the “About vBlades” chapter in the Using vBlades guide. If PAN Manager encounters a problem with your vBlade memory allocation, it displays an error message. --notify-slave-hypervisor platformname/pn
Specifies that you want to notify the target pBlade hypervisor about a new master hypervisor for the group following the recovery of a hypervisor group. LPAN administrators must perform this command individually for each remaining slave in the hypervisor group. For details on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. -n, --nmi {platformname/pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn}
Sends a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) to a specified blade for diagnostic purposes. This NMI causes the blade to behave as if it had a panic. By default, a panic causes a pBlade to dump core
2-26
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
memory and reboot. Use the following entry from a terminal on the specified pBlade to change the behavior to reboot-only: #echo "reboot" > /proc/egenera/panic To return the behavior to dump and reboot, use the following entry: #echo "dump" > /proc/egenera/panic You can also include this command in a start-up script. -o, --out-service platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to assign Out of Service status to a specified blade. This option marks the specified blade not to be used, even though it remains listed in its configuration definitions. Use this option when you want a specified blade to be left idle, but you do not want to edit configuration definitions. For example, if you have assigned a pBlade to an LPAN, but the LPAN administrator does not want to use the pBlade, you can shut down the LPAN, mark the pBlade Out of Service, and then reboot the LPAN. To return the specified blade to service, use the -i (in-service) option to mark the blade In Service. -p, --priority {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"} platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies a CPU priority for a vBlade relative to the other vBlades (using the vBlade argument pn-n) or the management domain on that pBlade (using the pBlade argument pn). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -M (memory), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the CPU priority for a vBlade relative to the other vBlades or the management domain on that pBlade. For details on changing the priority setting, see the Using vBlades guide.
PM5.2_BF
2-27
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --cpus cpu_number platformname/pn-n
Specifies how many CPUs to allocate to this vBlade. These are virtual CPUs (which the underlying hypervisor maps to the pBlade’s physical CPUs). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -p (priority), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the number of CPUs allocated to this vBlade. For details on valid values for this option, see the Using vBlades guide. --promote-to-master-hypervisor platformname/pn
Specifies that you want to promote the target pBlade hypervisor from slave to master status in its hypervisor group. LPAN administrators must perform this command to recover a hypervisor group from recovery mode.For details on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. -R, --unset-maintenance platformname/pn
Unmarks the pBlade for a maintenance task. The pBlade must not be configured on any pServers in the maintenance LPAN. This removes the pBlade from the maintenance LPAN. -s, --shutdown platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to power off the specified blade. This option immediately shuts down any pServer(s) or hypervisor currently running on the pBlade or vBlade; however, on a cBlade, it initiates a graceful shutdown of a cBlade and all its processing (the equivalent of the Linux shutdown -h command), due to the severe consequences of powering off a cBlade. A graceful shutdown requires that PAN Manager is running on the other cBlade and is communicating with the master cBlade. If you want to force a cBlade shutdown without attempting to do it gracefully, add the -f (force) option. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the PAN Manager command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete.
2-28
PM5.2_BF
BLADE -S, --switch-comp
Specifies the switch component on the BladeFrame BF200 cBlade. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete. --select platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Causes the indicator lights on a specified blade to blink blue. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends using this feature to help locate a specific blade in the chassis. The blinking blue indication persists until reset with the --unselect option. --unconfig-hypervisor {platformname/pn}
Specifies that you no longer want the target pBlade to be configured with a hypervisor. As a result, this pBlade will not boot up into the hypervisor (unless PAN Manager does that automatically in response to pServer boot or failover demands for vBlades defined on the pBlade). A pBlade without a hypervisor can be used to boot a regular pServer, but it doesn’t support vBlades. You can unconfigure a hypervisor on a pBlade only when that pBlade is shut down. --unselect platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Terminates the blinking blue indication on a “selected” blade. The indicator lights on the blade revert to their normal meaning: steady amber for recognized, steady blue for active. -w, --wait
Causes the blade command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway, and displays a progress indicator. Use this option with the -b (boot/power-on), -s (power-off), or -x (reboot) options when you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed.
PM5.2_BF
2-29
PAN Manager Command Reference -W, --warm platformname/pn
Allows a failover pBlade to boot more rapidly when a failover occurs by designating it in advance as a warm pBlade. A warm pBlade is powered ON, and is bootable only when it becomes a pServer’s current pBlade. -x, --reboot platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to reset and reboot the specified blade. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete
EXAMPLES
List the details for pBlade p7 on platform zeus: blade -l zeus/p7
Power off pBlade p7 on platform zeus (which shuts down the pServer or hypervisor currently running): blade -s zeus/p7
Power off vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus: blade -s zeus/p7-3
Reset and reboot pBlade 3 in the PlatformOne platform: blade -x PlatformOne/p3
Mark pBlade 14 In Service in the PlatformOne platform: blade -i PlatformOne/p14
Set the indicator light to blink blue on cBlade 1 in the production platform: blade --select production/c1
2-30
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
Set the indicator light on cBlade 1 to its normal meaning in the production platform: blade --unselect production/c1
Configure pBlade p7 on platform zeus to use the default hypervisor ISO image: blade --config-hypervisor zeus/p7
Configure pBlade p7 on platform zeus to use the hypervisor ISO image named HV30002005_IA32: blade --config-hypervisor -I HV30002005_IA32 zeus/p7
Unconfigure the hypervisor from pBlade p7 on platform zeus: blade --unconfig-hypervisor zeus/p7
Power on pBlade p7 on platform zeus and boot the hypervisor from the hypervisor ISO image named HV30002005_IA32: blade --boot-hypervisor -I HV30002005_IA32 zeus/p7
Create vBlade 1 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus, allocating the default amount of memory to 512MB and number of CPUs to 1: blade -c zeus/p7-1
Create vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus, and allocate 256 MB of memory and 2 CPUs for it: blade -c -M 256"Mb" -P 2 zeus/p7-2
Modify vBlade 1 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus to allocate 1 GB of memory: blade -M 1"Gb" zeus/p7-1
PM5.2_BF
2-31
PAN Manager Command Reference
Modify vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus to allocate 128 MB of memory and 1 CPU for it: blade -M 128"Mb" -P 1 zeus/p7-2
Delete vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus: blade -d zeus/p7-2
List all of the vBlades in the PAN: blade --list-vblades
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_bframe).
2-32
PM5.2_BF
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
NAME
console
SYNOPSIS
console [lpanname/pServername]
DESCRIPTION
The console command opens a Linux console device on a pServer. Entering the console command without an argument displays a list of initialized or booted pServers to choose from; if you enter the console command with a valid pServer argument, the console opens immediately.
- opens a terminal session on a pServer.
The PAN Manager console initiates a terminal session and sends standard input to the pServer console. The pServer console output is displayed as the standard output. A PAN Manager console normally translates the inputs for sigint (Control-C), sigquit (Control-/), and sigtstp (Control-z). To abort a pServer console, press Enter once and type a tilde character (~) followed by a period (.). There is a one second pause after typing the tilde character in which to type the period. (if "." is not typed within one second, the abort sequence is terminated) If both characters in the sequence (~.) is not typed within one second, the sequence is not sent to the pServer (and thus not echoed) and the pServer connection is aborted. Issues to be aware of when using the console command include:
PM5.2_BF
•
Once opened, a pServer console remains opened until it is aborted, even after the pServer is shut down.
•
In the case of certain network communication errors, you may need to re-establish a pServer console. An administrator can open a console on a pServer to watch the pServer's output as it boots if it has been previously booted.
2-33
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Opening a console on an uninitialized or unbooted pServer opens the console late which means you may miss the first few seconds of booting.
OPTIONS
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pServer).
2-34
PM5.2_BF
DISK
DISK
NAME
disk - controls or lists operations on a disk physically connected to
a PAN and recognized by PAN Manager software by means of the sfdisk utility.
SYNOPSIS
disk [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"] disk -z {"yes"|"no"} "(SCSI_ID)" disk -v {"yes"|"no"} [-n][-f] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -c [-n] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -b "(SCSI_ID)" disk -L "text" "(SCSI_ID)" disk -p [part_table_filename] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -R [-P partition] [-r root_image_name [-F fs_type]][-g] "(SCSI_ID)" disk --clear-suspend-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to import devices automatically or manually and the ability to manually add and delete specific devices using the PAN Manager disk command is deprecated in Release 5.1. Use the PAN Manager san command for such operations. The following disk command options should be removed from any scripts. disk [-i |-m] disk [-a |-d] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -s
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.2
The WinPE 2.1 method automatically partitions the disk, therefore the following PAN Manager disk command for partitioning a disk is deprecated in Release 5.2. For information on using WinPE, see the Windows pServer Guide. The following disk command options should be removed from any scripts. disk -W [-S partition-size] [-I ip-address -G gateway -M
PM5.2_BF
2-35
PAN Manager Command Reference
subnet-mask] "(SCSI_ID)"
DESCRIPTION
The disk command allows you to list, modify and control certain operations on a specified disk that is physically connected to the PAN. Administrators use the disk command to do the following: •
Configure disk resources.
•
Partition disks on remote storage devices.
•
Choose root images and filesystem types for disks, and create a root filesystem on disks allocated to an LPAN.
•
Specify a default filesystem type for each pServer disk in an LPAN.
•
Control persistent reservations.
•
Configure Linux GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) functionality when assigning a Linux-based root filesystem.
PAN administrators should use the san and tape commands to scan a Storage Area Network (SAN) for recently added disks and tape devices after the Control Blades of a platform are initially booted. PAN administrators use the disk command to list information about any disk available to a PAN, while LPAN administrators can only list information about disks allocated to their LPAN. Administrators use the disk command without arguments to see all the disks available to their security domain, or the disk -l command to see details about these disks. See the -l (long) option for details. After PAN administrators allocate disk(s) to an LPAN using the command, LPAN administrators configure their disk resources using the disk command. lpan
LPAN administrators use the disk command to partition disks. The disk command uses the Linux sfdisk command to create partitions on remote storage devices. PAN Manager software requires a specific format for the information it uses to create disk 2-36
PM5.2_BF
DISK
partitions. The default partition in /opt/panmgr/etc illustrates the information required. Other examples of partition files are located in the directory /opt/panmgr/examples. For more information about disk partitioning see the OPTIONS or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a PAN Manager SCSI ID of a device for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-A, --all-disks
Displays all PAN and non-PAN discovered disks.
PM5.2_BF
2-37
PAN Manager Command Reference -b, --list-persistent-reservations "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists pServer registrations and persistent reservation information for a specified disk --clear-suspend-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Indicates that you want to clear the specified SAN disk from suspend usage. -c, --clear-disk-reservations "(SCSI_ID)"
Clears any stale SCSI-2 reservations and SCSI-3 persistent reservations (whichever is enabled on the disk). If you move a disk from one pServer configuration to another pServer configuration, stale SCSI reservations can persist and cause undesired application behavior. The clear operation removes all stale registrations and reservations (SCSI-3 and SCSI-2), but does not disable or enable persistent reservations. This command fails if the disk is attached to a booted pServer. Use the -n option to force the command to complete even if the disk is mapped to a pServer and the pServer is booted. -C, --configured-disks
Lists all disks configured in the PAN and provides the ID, disk capacity, type (of SAN), serial number, configured I/O paths and the LPAN where each is configured. -f, --force
Causes the specified option to complete without a prompt from PAN Manager for the user to confirm the action. -F, --file-system-type fs_type
Specifies which filesystem type is associated with a Linux-based root image. You can only use this option in combination with the -R (root-partition) and -r (root-image) options. To see the default filesystem for a root image, use the pan -il command. To create a Windows-based pServer, you must use the -W (make-WinPE) option.
2-38
PM5.2_BF
DISK -g, --install-grub
Specifies that you want PAN Manager to configure Linux GRUB (GRand Unified Bootloader) functionality as it assigns a Linux-based root filesystem to specified disk device or partition on that disk device. You must use this option in combination with the -R (root-partition) option. -G, --gateway gateway_ipaddress
Sets the IP address for a networked, WinPE pServer gateway, if it exists, of the external network to which a PAN is connected. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) option accompanied with the -I (ipaddr) and -M (subnet) options. By default there is no gateway setting. -I, --ipaddr {address}
Sets the IP address for a networked, WinPE pServer. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) option accompanied with the -G (gateway) and -M (subnet-mask) options. If no networking options are provided, WinPE is configured to use DHCP. -l, --long
Adds partition and assignment information to the default information listing: SCSI ID, disk capacity (GB), Type (of SAN), serial number, and LPAN of allocation. This option adds disk partition table in a data format you can use as the basis for a new partition table file. You can edit and copy this data in any text editor. -L, --description {"text"}
Sets the description for the specified disk as it is displayed in the long listing. Note: Copy only the data rows, without the column headings. -M, --subnet-mask netmask_ipaddress
Sets the network mask for a networked, WinPE pServer. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) PM5.2_BF
2-39
PAN Manager Command Reference
option accompanied with the -I (ipaddr) and -G (gateway) options. By default, there is no gateway setting. -n, --override-pr-restrictions
Forces the command to complete even if the disk is mapped to a pServer and the pServer is booted. Without adding this option to the -c (clear-disk-reservations) or -v (persistentreservations) options, PAN Manager returns an error indicating that the disk is currently in use. -p, --partition-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a file that PAN Manager software uses to create partitions on the specified disk. Use the default partition table information example at the top of this man page to format a partition table file that meets your exact needs. You can store these files anywhere on a cBlade. Note: Use this option without an argument if you want PAN Manager software to create the default pBlade partition on the specified disk. Currently, there is no method to partition multiple disks using the disk command. -P, --partition-number partition_number
Specifies an optional partition number on a disk device for a root filesystem assignment. By default, partition number one is rooted. You specify a partition number when rooting a disk using this option with the -R (root-partition) option. Caution: A root filesystem of a pServer must be autoenabled on the partition number you specify when rooting a disk. Thus the disk containing the partition with a root filesystem of the pServer must be autoenabled and the partition must be attached using the pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" -A yes lpanname/pservername "(X.0)" command for the pServer to boot. -r, --root-image root_image_display_name
Specifies the root image that an LPAN or PAN administrator used to root a specified disk device. You can see the available list of root images and their default filesystems using the disk -l command. 2-40
PM5.2_BF
DISK
The default filesystem is the first filesystem in the list of filesystems displayed. You must use this option with the -R (root-partition) option. -R, --root-partition "(SCSI_ID)"
Assigns the specified disk with a Linux-based root filesystem. Invoking this option without arguments roots the disk with a default root image and filesystem for a given Linux operating system. To see the default root image and filesystem, use the disk -l command. Other options you can combine with this option include -r (root-image), -P (partition-number), and -g (install-grub). -S, --partition-size size_in_MB
Specifies the size of the WinPE partition, in megabytes. If not specified, the default is 2500MB; sufficient to install W2K3 and various temporary files. -U, --unconfigured-disks
Returns a list of disks that are not configured to an LPAN or to disaster recovery. -v, --persistent-reservations {“yes” | “no”} ["(SCSI_ID)"]
Specifying “yes” with this option means PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on a specified disk. If no “(SCSI_ID)” argument is used, PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on all disks that are not attached to booted pServers in the PAN. PAN and LPAN administrators should only enable SCSI-3 persistent reservations on disks used by applications that support SCSI-3 reservations, and disks used by pServers that have disk subpaths disabled. See PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for specific requirements. When PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on disks, PAN Manager also disables SCSI-2 reservations on those disks.
PM5.2_BF
2-41
PAN Manager Command Reference
Specifying “no” means PAN Manager disables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on a specified disk. If no “(SCSI_ID)” argument is used, PAN Manager disables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on all disks that are not currently attached to booted pServers in the PAN. This enables SCSI-2 reservations on the disk(s). -W, --make-WinPE "(SCSI_ID)"
Assigns the specified disk with a WinPE-based root filesystem. To create a networked pServer, you must use this option in combination with the three options, -I (ipaddr), -G (gateway), and -M (subnet-mask). If you don’t provide networking options it creates a WinPE pServer configured to use DHCP. Note: If there is no WinPE image, the disk command will return an error. See the pServer integration note, Installing pServer Software for Microsoft Windows Server 2003, for complete installation and configuration details for creating pServers using a Microsoft WinPE image. -z, --dr-disk {"yes"|"no"}
Allocates the specified disk for Disaster Recovery.
EXAMPLES
Clear the SAN disk “(9.0.1.54)” from suspend usage. disk --clear-suspend-disk “(9.0.1.54)”
Partition disk “(9.0.0.32)” according to the file example1.part in the directory /opt/panmgr/examples: disk -p /opt/panmgr/examples/example1.part “(9.0.0.32)”
Display the details of partition and assignment information for disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -l "(9.0.0.32)"
2-42
PM5.2_BF
DISK
Create a root filesystem with the default root image for the PAN security domain on disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -R "(9.0.0.32)"
Create a root filesystem with the RHEL42_32bit_rootimage root image associated with the PAN security domain default filesystem on disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -R -r RHEL42_32bit_rootimage "(9.0.0.32)"
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME LPAN PAN PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-43
PAN Manager Command Reference
ETH
NAME
eth - lists or modifies the configuration for a physical Ethernet card
on a cBlade.
SYNOPSIS
eth [-l][ethn@platformname/{cn}] eth -I ip_address -S subnet_mask {-H|-M mac_address}[-G gateway][-V vlan_id] ethn@platformname/{cn} eth -m {"yes"|"no"} [ethn@platformname/cn] eth -R ping_ip_address [-C missed_ping_count_threshold -T missed_ping_time_threshold] ethn@platformname/{cn} eth -c ethn@platformname/{cn}
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to configure uplink and VLAN setting using the PAN Manager eth command was deprecated in Release 5.1 and will be removed in a future release. The following eth command options should be removed from any scripts: eth -U uplink -P portnumber ethn@platformname/cn eth -a {-V VLAN_ID [-N VLAN_name]} ethn@platformname/cn eth -r {-V VLAN_ID|-N VLAN_name} ethn@platformname/cn eth -d ethn@platformname/cn
DESCRIPTION
The eth command allows administrators to do the following: •
Modify configurations of any physical Network Interface Cards (NICs) on a platform’s sBlade or cBlade. After the configuration is created or modified using the eth command, PAN administrators create virtual switches (vSwitches) using the sw command.
•
2-44
Configure the PAN Manager Intelligent Network Failover feature.
PM5.2_BF
ETH
This functionality allows administrators to configure rEths to report Ethernet device failures based on ping results (ping failover detection mode, or just “ping mode”). Default behavior is to detect such failures solely by the link status of the Ethernet device, called “link status mode”). After configuring ping failover detection mode with the eth command, you use the reth command to turn the feature on and off (that is, to select “link status mode” or “ping mode”). PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: ethn@platformname/cn
Specifies a cblade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cblade number. For example eth1 on cblade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name. The PAN Manager NIC naming conventions vary depending upon the type of cblade in your platform: Use the eth -l command to list the details for your particular platform configuration.
OPTIONS
-c, --clear
Clears all ping failure detection mode settings. Allowed only when the Ethernet device’s rEth is set to link failover detection mode.
PM5.2_BF
2-45
PAN Manager Command Reference -C, --count-threshold integer
For ping failover detection mode, determines the number of missed pings that determine a failure. -G, --gateway ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the IP address of the network gateway. -H, --hardware-mac-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies that the Ethernet device will use its hardware MAC address, as opposed to a user-specified MAC address specified with the -M option. -I, --ip-address ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the source (platform) IP address. -l, --long
Lists information for each NIC on your platform’s cblades, including each NIC type and MAC address. Also returns an Ethernet device’s ping detection mode settings when ping detection mode has been configured. -M, --mac-address mac-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies that the Ethernet device will use a user-specified MAC address, rather than its hardware MAC address as specified with the -H option. -R, --remote-ip-address ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the IP address of the remote device (the target of the ping). -S, --subnet-mask mask address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the value with which to perform a bitwise AND operation on the IP address, to determine the subnetwork address.
2-46
PM5.2_BF
ETH -T, --time-threshold milliseconds
For ping failover detection mode, determines the number of milliseconds (ms) to wait for a ping echo before determining that the target device has failed. The default Ping Threshold value is 5000 ms; the minimum Ping Threshold value is 1000 ms (1 second). A threshold value below 1000 ms is not valid. Note that the cBlade kernel rounds down the time-threshold value. For example, if you specify a value of 1098 ms, PAN Manager rounds the value down to 1090 ms.
EXAMPLES
Clear all the uplink assignments on the NIC named eth3 on cBlade 1 of the production platform: eth -d eth3@production/c1
Set the network stack for eth2 for ping failure detection mode. The source IP address is 192.68.5.32; the subnet mask is 255.255.240.0; the gateway is 192.68.5.100; and the hardware MAC address is used: eth -I 192.68.5.32 -S 255.255.240.0 -G 192.68.5.100 -H eth2@PlatformOne/c2
Set a “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2. The ping target is 192.68.5.204; failure is determined by 5 unanswered pings; a ping is determined to have failed if no response is received after 1500 milliseconds: eth -R 192.68.5.204 -C 5 -T 1500 eth2@PlatformOne/c2
Clear the “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2. For this command to return successfully, you must first disable “ping mode” for any rEth using eth2: eth -c eth2@PlatformOne/c2
PM5.2_BF
2-47
PAN Manager Command Reference
List the “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2, along with other information. (“ping mode” settings are included in the output only if they have been configured for this device.) eth -l eth2@PlatformOne/c2
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME IP PSERVER RETH SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_sw).
2-48
PM5.2_BF
EVENT
EVENT
NAME
event - lists the details of an instance of a triggered event in a PAN.
SYNOPSIS
event [-N [print_number]] [[V |-v] severity] [[-E |-I | -i] event_ID_number] [-T |-t timestamp] [-M messagekeyword][-L number][-S {"O"|"I"|"R"}][-p lpanname[/pservername]|-b platformname/{pn |sn |cn |pimn} |-D "(SCSI_ID)"|-n ethn@platformname/{cn] event -U event_ID_number -S {"O"|"I"|"R"}
DESCRIPTION
The event command offers a filter for viewing an event or event listings in a PAN. The event command allows administrators to do the following: •
Display all events for a PAN sequentially by event ID by using the event command without an option or argument. Use the options and arguments to display more specific event information.
•
Filter PAN, blade, LPAN or pServer events listings within their security domain (PAN or LPAN).
•
Modify the status of an event.
See the OPTIONS section or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: PM5.2_BF
2-49
PAN Manager Command Reference
platformname/{pn | sn | cn | pimn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade or redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
lpanname[/pservername]
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as 'production/Web1'. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
2-50
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). PM5.2_BF
EVENT ethn@platformname/{cn}
Specifies a cBlade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example eth1 on cBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name.
OPTIONS
-b, --blade {platformname|platformname/blade_number}
Lists events within a security domain for all blades within the security domain or a specific blade. -D, --disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the events for the specified SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device. -E, --eventid event_ID_number
Specifies a single event listing by its event ID. Use this option if you are interested in the details of a single event and you know the event ID of the event. -i, --id-before event_ID_number
Lists events that occurred before the specified number. You can view all events before the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -I, --id-after event_ID_number
Lists events that occurred after the specified number. You can view all events after the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -L, --last-events number
Filters a list of events, displaying only the last specified number of events, such as the last ten events. You can combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter.
PM5.2_BF
2-51
PAN Manager Command Reference -M, --message-contain keyword(s)
Filters events using only a keyword or keywords that you know are part of the message printed for that type of event. For example, using "PlatformOne/p2" will return all events for this specific pBlade that contain this in the message, while using "core voltage" will return all events of this specific event type. Combining these strings, as in the example, "PlatformOne/p2 core voltage" returns only events on this specific pBlade with this specific event type. -n, --eth ethn@platformname/{cn}
Lists the events for the specified Eth device. -N, --num-events number_of_events_displayed
Pauses the display of events after a set number are printed. This option requires you to press the “Return” or “y” key to display the next set of events. To stop a set number of listings before it is complete, you can press the “q” key. This option displays ten events at a time, by default. This option can take a number argument to set a number of events to display at once; for example the command event –P 7 displays seven events and pauses until you hit the “return” or “y” key. Note: Without this option, every event that matches your criteria is displayed at once. In the case of many events, you may not see the entire list of events you have asked for. -p, --pserver {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Lists events within a LPAN security domain for either all pServers within the security domain or a specific pServer. -S, --status {O|I|R}
Specifies the status of an event or list of events. Use this option to filter a list of events or modify an specific event status by combining this option with the -U (update) option.
2-52
PM5.2_BF
EVENT -t, --time-before mm/dd/yy_hh:mm:ss
Lists events that occurred before a specified date and time. You can view all events before this time or combine this option with other options to create a more specific filter. You must follow the format: "mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss". -T, --time-after mm/dd/yy_hh:mm:ss
Lists events that occurred after a specified date and time. You can view all events after this time or combine this option with other options to create a more specific filter. For example, you must follow the format: "mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss". -U, --update-status event_ID_number
Modifies the status of an event. You must use this option with the -S (status) option. -v, --severity-less-or-equal-to severity_number
Lists events with a severity less than or equal to the specified number (a severity value closer to 6). You can view all events of less severity than the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -V, --severity-more-or-equal-to severity_number
Lists events with a severity greater than or equal to the specified number (a severity value closer to six). You can view all events of less severity than the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter.
EXAMPLES
View all events after event 2200, ten at a time, for the platform named PlatformOne: event -I 2200 -P PlatformOne
View events 2200 to 2500, 5 at a time, for the platform named PlatformOne: event -I 2199 -i 2501 -P 5 PlatformOne
PM5.2_BF
2-53
PAN Manager Command Reference
View the last 8 events of severity 3 or less (3 to 6), 5 at a time: event -L 8 -v 3 -P 5
View the last events of severity 2 or greater (1 and 2), for a pServer named rivers/nile: event -L 8 -V 2 -v4 rivers/nile
View all events of status “I” with severity 3 or greater (1 to 3), 12 at a time: event -S I -V 3 -P 12
Modify the status of a triggered event, 2545, to resolved ("R"): event -U 2545 -S R
List the events for disk 9.0.2.28: event -D "(9.0.2.28)"
Display a long listing of the events for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne. event -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME EVENTTYPE LPAN MON PAN
2-54
PM5.2_BF
EVENT
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-55
PAN Manager Command Reference
EVENTTYPE
NAME
eventtype
SYNOPSIS
eventtype [-l] [eventtypeID] [-p lpanname [/ pservername]| -b platformname[|pn| sn| cn| pimn] | -S "(SCSI_ID)" | -n ethn@platformname/{cn}]
- lists or modifies event types monitored in a PAN.
eventtype [[-a |-r] emailaddress [-e {"default"|"custom"}] [-q {"yes"|"no"}]{-P |-L} eventtypeID]
DESCRIPTION
The eventtype command lists or modifies actions for a specified event type monitored in a PAN. The eventtype command allows administrators to do the following: •
Use the eventtype command without an option to list or modify event actions only within your security domain by name and event type ID. The -l (list) option lists detailed information about each event type monitored within your security domain.
•
The eventtype command allows a security domain administrator to customize two event actions for a specific event type: •
Sending SNMP traps
•
Sending email notification
Using the eventtype command for an event type that is not within your security domain is not permitted and returns an error. Security domain administrators use the appropriate command to set the default event actions for their security domain (using the pan or lpan commands).
2-56
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/{pn | sn | cn | pimn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade or redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
lpanname[/pservername]
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as production/Web1. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where: PM5.2_BF
2-57
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
ethn@platformname/{cn}
Specifies a cBlade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example eth1 on cBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-email email_address
Adds the address of a person the security domain administrator wants PAN Manager to send e-mail notification to when a specified event monitor is triggered. Use this option to modify the list of e-mail addresses to include an e-mail address not included in the security domain default list and only for a specific event type. -b, --blade {platformname|platformname/blade_number}
Lists events within a security domain for all blades within the security domain or a specific blade. (The BladeFrame BF200 does not have an sBlade.) -e, --enable-action {"default"|"custom"}
Specifies whether a default security domain event action is activated for the specified event action or whether it has the customized setting activated. Customized settings are only permitted within a security domain and do not override event actions for other security domains.
2-58
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
After making the customized setting, the security domain administrator must use the eventtype -e “custom” command to activate the customized setting. To return the event actions back to the security domain default values, use the eventtype -e “default” command. This switch allows customized settings to be activated and inactivated repeatedly without having to reset the event actions for the event type. Using the eventtype command for an event type that is not within your security domain is not permitted and returns an error. Security domain administrators use the appropriate command to set the default event actions for their security domain (using the pan or lpan commands). See the EXAMPLES section or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -l, --long
Displays a list of specified event types, either for an entire domain or for one or a group of pServers or blades. Use -l option with the -p (pserver) or -b (blade) option to narrow down the list of event types specific to pServers or blades within your security domain. -L, --lpan-domain
Specifies the name of an LPAN security domain. Use this option with the -a (add-email), -r (remove-email), -e (enable-action) or -Q (send-snmptrap) options to specify the security domain of the event type ID the command action takes effect in. -n, --eth ethn@platformname/{cn}
Lists the event types for the specified Eth. -p, --pserver {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Lists the event type settings within a LPAN security domain for either all pServers within the security domain or a specific pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-59
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --pan-domain
Specifies the name of a PAN security domain. Use this option with the -a (add-email), -r (remove-email), -e (enable-action) or -Q (send-snmptrap) options to specify the security domain of the event type ID the command action takes effect in. -q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to send an SNMP trap if a specific event type is triggered. -r, --remove-email email_address
Removes the address of a person the security domain administrator no longer wants to receive e-mail notification. -S, --disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the event types for the specified SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device.
EXAMPLES
List all the event types by ID# and name for pBlade 2 on the platform named PlatformOne: eventtype -p PlatformOne/p2
List the actions for a specific event type on pBlade 12 on PlatformOne, Blade PlatformOne/p2 Status Change Event (ID#101763): eventtype -l 101763
An LPAN administrator adds [email protected] to the current list of LPAN e-mail recipients only for status changes on pBlade 12 on PlatformOne (Event typeID#101763): eventtype -a [email protected] -e custom -L 101763
List the event types for disk 9.0.2.28: eventtype -S "(9.0.2.28)"
2-60
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
Display a long listing of the event types for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne: eventtype -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME EVENT LPAN MON PAN SNMP SNMPMGR
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-61
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXERES
NAME
exeres
SYNOPSIS
exeres [-c] [-C command] [-B argument] [-S argument] [-E argument] [-L description] [-U username [-u {"yes"|"no"}]] lpanname/executable_resource
- creates or modifies an executable resource.
exeres -N newname lpanname/executable_resource exeres [-l] lpanname [/executable_resource] exeres -d lpanname/executable_resource
DESCRIPTION
An executable resource is a set of attributes and arguments that let users start, stop, or run a program or script (Linux init scripts, for example) on a pServer. The exeres command creates or modifies an executable resource and assigns it a name, a description, and a command (with or without start, stop, or execute arguments), and specifies a user which runs the command on the pServer. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: command
Specifies the command to be run by the executable resource.
2-62
PM5.2_BF
EXERES
username
Specifies a user name with an executable resource. You cannot change the username while the executable resource is running. If you don’t use -U to specify a user name, the executable resource will run as the user root and use the pServer software’s default user environment settings, as provided in the PAN agent. (For each executable resource that you configure on the pServer, be sure to override, in its script, any of these variables, as appropriate, to allow the application to run properly.) argument
Specifies an argument to be used by command while the executable resource is running. executable_resource
Specifies the name of the executable resource PAN Manager can associate with an application.
OPTIONS
-B, --start-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used when PAN Manager starts an executable resource. -c, --create
Creates a new executable resource. -C, --command command
Specifies a command to be run by the executable resource. -d, --delete
Deletes an existing executable resource. -E, --exe-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used while the executable resource is running. PM5.2_BF
2-63
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long
Lists information about the current assigned executable resources within an LPAN, including information on the name, description, user, command, arguments, start, stop, execute, and assignments, if available. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the executable resource. -N, --rename newname
Renames the specified executable resource within an LPAN. -S, --stop-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used when PAN Manager stops an executable resource. -u, --source-user-env {"yes"|"no"}
Sources the user environment when used with the -U (user) option. -U, --user username
Associates a specific username with an executable resource. If you don’t use -U to specify a username, the executable resource will run as the user root and use the pServer software’s default user environment settings, as provided in the PAN agent. (For each executable resource that you configure on the pServer, be sure to override, in its script, any of these variables, as appropriate, to allow the application to run properly.)
EXAMPLES
The following command lists all available information about executable resources configured for the LPAN lpaname. exeres -l lpanname
RETURN VALUE 2-64
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1. PM5.2_BF
EXERES
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP LB
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
PM5.2_BF
2-65
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXTNET
NAME
- lists or modifies the external management network properties.
SYNOPSIS
extnet [-P platformmasteripaddr -1 cblade1ipaddr -2 cblade2ipaddr -M networkmaskipaddr -B broadcastipaddr -G gatewayipaddr [-f]] [platformname]
extnet
extnet [-g multicastipaddr -p multicastport] [platformname] extnet [-r [-f]] [platformname]
DESCRIPTION
The extnet command lists or modifies the properties a platform uses for external network communication. Using the extnet command without an argument lists the current IP address settings. PAN administrators use the extnet command to modify the IP address for the following: •
PAN Manager
•
cBlade 1
•
cBlade 2
•
External gateway
•
Network mask
•
Broadcast settings
Because PAN Manager multicast discovery occurs over the external management network, the extnet command allows the setting of the external multicast group and port.
2-66
PM5.2_BF
EXTNET
The external management floating global IP address is a PAN Manager setting which allows a floating global IP address per PAN Manager. This permits clients (such as Windows VGA desktop consoles) to connect to PAN Manager (GUI or CLI) directly. Any modification of the network portion of the IP address requires the simultaneous modification of the -1 (cblade1), -2 (cblade2), -B (broadcast) and, if applicable, the -G (gateway) options. See the EXAMPLES section for details. Because of the sensitive nature of these IP address settings, PAN Manager displays the proposed new settings with your prompt to continue. If a new setting is invalid, an error appears describing why. Caution: A system administrator initially sets the PAN Manager IP address to a valid IP address for the external network to which the platform is connected. The IP address for the PAN Manager on each cBlade should come from a network administrator and must not conflict with any other host address on the external network.
OPTIONS -1, --cBlade1-ipaddress cblade1ipaddress
Sets the IP address for cBlade 1. The default cBlade 1 IP address is 192.168.200.2. -2, --cBlade2-ipaddress cblade2ipaddress
Sets the IP address for cBlade 2. The default cBlade 2 IP address is 192.168.200.3. -B, --broadcast broadcastipaddress
Sets the network broadcast address for communication with an external network. By default the network broadcast address is 192.168.200.255.
PM5.2_BF
2-67
PAN Manager Command Reference -f, --force
Forces any extnet command execution without prompting. -G, --gateway gatewayipaddress
Sets the IP address for the gateway, if it exists, of the external network to which a platform is connected. By default there is no gateway setting. -M, --network-mask networkmaskipaddress
Sets the network mask for communication with an external network. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.0. -P, --frame-master platformmasteripaddress
Sets the primary IP address for a PAN Manager, which resides on the master cBlade and transfers to the remaining cBlade in the event of failover. Note: This setting requires a valid IP address argument for the network to which the platform is connected. -r, --remove-gateway
Removes the current gateway setting. Removing the external network gateway IP address setting prevents IP traffic from leaving the platform’s external network.
EXAMPLES
List the default extnet settings: extnet
Modify the external network to a simple class A setting and add a gateway setting: extnet -P 10.0.0.1 -1 10.0.0.2 -2 10.0.0.3 -B 10.0.0.255 -G 10.0.0.128
Remove the current gateway setting: extnet -r
2-68
PM5.2_BF
EXTNET
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
INTNET ROLE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_role).
PM5.2_BF
2-69
PAN Manager Command Reference
FOP
NAME
fop
SYNOPSIS
fop [-c] [-a pservername] [-O order] [-F {"yes"|"no"}] [-L description] [-S {"rr"|"ordered"}[-X {"yes"|"no"}]
- creates or modifies a failover policy within an LPAN.
lpanname/failoverpolicy fop -r pservername lpanname/failoverpolicy fop -N newname lpanname/failoverpolicy fop [-l] lpanname[/failoverpolicy] fop -d lpanname/failoverpolicy
DESCRIPTION
The fop command creates or modifies a failover policy within an LPAN to specify where a service moves to in the event of a failure. LPAN administrators use the fop command to set up failover policies for applications to include settings for: •
pServer — The pServer(s) that an application fails over to
•
Selection policy — Specifies whether a failover policy selects an available pServer based on a specified order (ordered) option or selects the first available pServer as the failover pServer (round robin)
•
Failback — Returns an application to its original pServer if it becomes available again
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed.
2-70
PM5.2_BF
FOP
Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/failoverpolicy
Specifies a failover policy you create using the fop command for high-availability applications. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you are required to specify the LPAN in which you run the application and the pServer(s) to which you want the application to fail over. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the failover policy name. For example, the failover policy for the Apache application on the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN could be referred to as either production/Apachefailover or production/ ApacheWeb1_failover. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-pserver lpanname/pservername
Assigns a specified pServer to the list of pServers for a given failover policy. -c, --create lpanname/failoverpolicy
Creates a new failover policy within an LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/failoverpolicy
Removes a specified failover policy from an LPAN. -F, --failback {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the failover policy should automatically return application processing back to the primary pServer if it becomes available again. This is set as “yes” by default.
PM5.2_BF
2-71
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long lpanname
Lists information about the current failover policy within an LPAN, including the selection policy for pServers, the automatic failback setting and the service assignments. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified failover policy. -N, --rename newname
Renames the specified failover policy. -O, --order order
Specifies the order in which pServers are selected in the event that the service needs to move. This is an optional setting used with the -a (add-pserver) option that is specified according to the selection policy set using the -S (selection-policy) option. You can modify the order of a specified pServer by adding the pServer again with the new order number. -r, --remove-pserver lpanname/pservername
Takes the specified pServer off the list of pServers for a given failover policy. -S, --selection-policy {"rr"|"ordered"}
Specifies whether a failover policy is carried out by an "ordered" list (default) or round robin ("rr"). The ordered approach selects an available pServer based on the order specified with the -O (order) option, using the first available pServer it found on the list. A round-robin approach uses the next available pServer as the failover pServer. Ordered selection can have multiple pServers running on a single, preferred pServer, while round-robin selection spreads failed pServers over as wide a range of failover blades as possible. -X, --reboot-pserver {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to reboot the pServer whose application has failed. Configure this option when you create or modify a failover policy.
2-72
PM5.2_BF
FOP
EXAMPLES
Create a failover policy named Apache_failover for the LPAN named development. Configure it to contain the Web2 pServer: fop -c -a Web2 development/Apache_failover
Add a second pServer (Web3) to the failover policy named Apache_failover: fop -a Web3 development/Apache_failover
Modify the selection policy from the default (ordered) to Round Robin (rr): fop -S rr development/Apache_failover
Specify the pServer named Web3 as the first failover pServer: fop -a Web3 -O 1 development/Apache_failover
Note: This makes the original Web2 pServer the second failover pServer. You can also condense the last three commands to one command: fop -a Web3 -S ordered -O 1 development/Apache_failover
Add a third pServer (Web4) to this failover policy and modify the selection policy to round-robin: fop -a Web4 -S rr development/Apache_failover
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP DISK FS
PM5.2_BF
2-73
PAN Manager Command Reference HMON LB LPAN PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-74
PM5.2_BF
FS
FS
NAME
fs
SYNOPSIS
fs [-c] [-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-L description] [-M mount_point -P partition_number [-m {"yes"|"no"} -O "mount option" -A {"rw"|"ro"} -S {"yes"|"no"} [-s "scan_option"] -o order]] lpanname/filesystemname
- creates or modifies a SCSI disk resource within an LPAN.
fs -N newname lpanname/filesystemname fs [-a] -M mount_point -P partition_number [-m {"yes"|"no"} -O "mount option" -A {"rw"|"ro"} -S {"yes"|"no"}[-s "scan_option"] -o order] lpanname/
filesystemname fs -r -M mount_point lpanname/filesystemname fs [-l] lpanname[/filesystemname] fs -d lpanname/filesystemname
DESCRIPTION
The fs command creates or modifies a SCSI disk resource within an LPAN that can be assigned to an application. Use the fs command to assign the filesystem resource to an application to implement high availability and then move the application to failover pServers. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
PM5.2_BF
2-75
PAN Manager Command Reference
lpanname/filesystemname
Specifies the filesystem on a specified storage device that an application running under PAN Manager control uses for its file storage and manipulation. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN the application runs. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the filesystem name. For example, the filesystem name for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/ apach_fs. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-a, --add-mountpoint
Adds the specified mount point to the disk. -A, --access-mode {"rw"|"ro"}
Designates whether an LPAN’s access to the specified mount point is read-write or read-only.
2-76
PM5.2_BF
FS -c, --create lpanname/filesystemname
Creates the resource. -d, --delete lpanname/filesystemname
Deletes the resource. -D, --device "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a SCSI ID within single-quotes and parentheses (for example, -D “(3.0.2.0)”) to be attached to the pServer. -l, --long
Lists current filesystem resources, partitions, access modes, and mount points within an LPAN. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the disk resource. -m, --create-mountpoint {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to create a new mountpoint on the pServer if it does not exist. -M, --mountpoint directory_name
Specifies a directory on a pServer’s filesystem to use as an application’s filesystem mount point. -N, --rename {new_name}
Renames the specified filesystem resource. -o, --order {integer}
Specifies an order in which you want the partitions mounted. -O, --mount-option "option"
Specifies a mount command argument for the filesystem.
PM5.2_BF
2-77
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --partition partition_number
Specifies the partition number to mount. This option requires an integer greater than zero and less than sixteen as an argument. -r, --remove-mountpoint
Specifies the mount point to remove. -s, --scan-option "scan_option"
Specifies a scan command argument for the filesystem. -S, --scan-partition {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether or not to scan the partition before mounting.
EXAMPLES
Create a filesystem logical resource named ftpfs from the mount point called /usr/local/ncftp in the LPAN named lpan_01: fs -c -D "(9.0.1.32)" -M /usr/local/ncftp -P 2 -m yes -O "-o async" -A rw lpan_01/ftpfs
RETURN VALUE
Success returns a zero. An error returns a 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP LB
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
2-78
PM5.2_BF
HMON
HMON
NAME
hmon
SYNOPSIS
hmon [-c] [-L description] [-M monitor_script] [[-S pservername |-s][-I |-D time {"S"|"M"|"H"}][-F |-G |-R number_of_times]] lpanname/monitorname
- creates, lists, or modifies a health monitor within an LPAN.
hmon [-d| -N newname] lpanname/monitorname hmon [-l] lpanname [/monitorname] hmon [-a] -S pservername | -s [-I |-D time {"S"|"M"|"H"}] [-F | -G | -R number_of_times] lpanname/monitorname hmon -r -S pservername | -s lpanname/monitorname hmon -E {"all"|"any"} {-f |-g |-x} lpanname/monitorname
DESCRIPTION
The hmon command creates, lists, or modifies an application health monitor within an LPAN. A health monitor detects a high-availability software failure by running a specific MON monitor script configured with the hmon command and assigned to any application using the app command. For more information about MON configuration, go to http://www.kernel.org/ software/mon. LPAN administrators must set up MON servers and failover policy resources before they can run load-balanced services or stand-alone applications configured for failover. Use the hmon command to configure the following settings for an application health monitor:
PM5.2_BF
•
MON monitor script — The script that the MON server runs to test the health of an application.
•
Interval — The time period (in seconds, minutes or hours) the MON Server script is invoked. Use only integers.
•
pServer — The pServer on which the MON server runs.
•
Escalation policy — The escalation of the PAN Manager's response when an application's health monitor detects failure. 2-79
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Thresholds — Specifies an action to take once a user-defined set of circumstances is reached.
•
Startup delay — Specifies the amount of time to wait before starting an application or service.
Configuring a Health Monitor's Policy LPAN administrators can vary PAN Manager’s response to an application failure by setting the following thresholds: •
Restart — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to restart the application.
•
Failover — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to restart the application on a failover pBlade (if configured), as determined by its failover policy.
•
Give up — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to shut down the application.
Each time the health monitor escalates to the next level and the failure counter is reset:
2-80
•
After three consecutive failure notifications, the system attempts to restart the application on its present pServer. If the application is successfully restarted, the failure counter is reset.
•
If the application restarts but is still unresponsive, the system allows four consecutive failure notifications before attempting to failover the application to a designated failover pServer. If the failover is successful, the failure counter is reset.
•
If the application fails over but is still unresponsive, the system allows five consecutive failure notifications before giving up.
PM5.2_BF
HMON
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/monitorname
Specifies the health monitor configuration for an application running under PAN Manager control. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN in which the application runs. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the health monitor name. For example, the health monitor for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/apache_hmon. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-server
Used with the -S option, adds the specified pServer to the LPAN health monitor. -c, --create lpanname/health_monitor
Creates a new health monitor service within an LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/health_monitor
Removes a health monitor service from an LPAN. -D, --startup-delay integer {"S"|"M"|"H"}
Sets the time period (in seconds, minutes or hours) to delay the start of the health monitor. Use this option for applications that take a relatively long time to boot, in order to avoid false failure notifications from the health monitor. You must specify the time period as an integer. PM5.2_BF
2-81
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --escalate {"all"|"any"}
Specifies the escalation policy to be used if the health monitor detects an application failure. Use the -x, -f, or -g option after specifying the escalation option. -f, --failover-policy
Specifies the failover policy to use with any or all events if the health monitor detects an application failure. -F, --failover-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before the application’s failover policy, if configured, is applied. If no failover policy is defined, no action is taken. Set this option to zero if no failover policy is configured. The default value is 5. -g, --giveup-policy
Specifies the action to take (in conjunction with the -E option) with any or all events if the local or remote monitor fails. -G, --giveup-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before the application gives up and no longer responds to the health monitor. Values must be a whole number. Specifying zero as the giveup_after value configures the monitor to ignore the giveup escalation. The default value is five. -I, --interval integer {"S"|"M"|"H"}
Sets the frequency (in seconds, minutes or hours) in which the specified health monitor script runs. You must specify time periods in integers. -l, --long
Lists the current settings for each health monitor within an LPAN, including the service assignments. -L, --description {"text"}
Adds descriptive information about the specified health monitor.
2-82
PM5.2_BF
HMON -M, --mon-script monitor_script_filename
Specifies the name of the monitor script for a specified health monitor. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring each script. -N, --rename {name}
Renames the specified health monitor. -r, --remove-server
Stops running the health monitor on the specified pServer. This option is only valid with the -S (server) option. -R, --restart-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before it attempts to restart the application. -s, --local-server
Specifies that the monitor script be run locally on the pServer where the application is running. -S, --server pservername
Specifies the pServer that runs the MON monitor script. -x, --restart-policy
Determines the any or all actions to take to restart the application based on the specified escalation policy.
EXAMPLES
PM5.2_BF
Create a health monitor named Apache_health with the following settings: •
LPAN name: development
•
Monitor name: Apache_health
•
Monitor script: http.monitor
•
interval: 5 (seconds)
2-83
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
pServer: apache_1
hmon -c -S apache_1 -M http.monitor -I 5 S development/ Apache_health
Allow the health monitor named Apache_health 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager attempts to restart Apache on its pServer, 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager attempts to restart Apache according to its failover policy, and 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager shuts down Apache: hmon -R 3 -F 3 -G 3 development/Apache_health
Reset the health monitor named Apache_health interval trigger to 45 minutes: hmon -I 45 M development/Apache_health
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP INTNET IP LB MON MONDEF
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_mon).
2-84
PM5.2_BF
INTNET
INTNET
NAME
- lists or modifies the internal management network properties.
SYNOPSIS
intnet [-N networkipaddr -M networkmaskipaddr -B broadcastipaddr [-f]] [platformname]
DESCRIPTION
The intnet command lists or modifies the properties for the internal management network of a platform. Use the intnet command to modify the following IP addresses for your platform’s internal management network configuration:
intnet
•
Network mask IP address
•
Broadcast IP address
By changing the IP address of the internal management network, the host address for each cBlade and pBlade is calculated according to slot number. Any modification of the internal management network causes a PAN Manager restart which can create temporary outages of the targeted platform. Caution: Before running the intnet command, you must shut down all pServers and hypervisors on a platform to ensure that PAN Agents restart properly. The intnet command does not update the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service daemon (ntpd). If you change the internal IP address of a cBlade you must edit the ntp.conf file to replace the old IP address with the new one.
PM5.2_BF
2-85
PAN Manager Command Reference
Note: If you modify the network mask to limit the number of host addresses on the internal management network, you must leave enough capacity for each cBlade and pBlade to have its own IP address. Using the intnet command without an argument lists the current network, network mask, and broadcast address settings.
OPTIONS
-B, --broadcast broadcastipaddr
Sets the network broadcast address for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network broadcast address is 192.168.255.255. -f, --force
Forces any modification without a prompt. -M, --network-mask networkmaskipaddr
Sets the network mask for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.0. -N, --network networkipaddr
Sets the network IP address for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network IP address is set to 192.168.255.0.
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EXERES EXTNET
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_exeres). 2-86
PM5.2_BF
IP
IP
NAME
- Creates, lists, or modifies the network resources for an application or load-balancing service.
SYNOPSIS
ip -c [-I ipaddr] [-B broadcastipaddr] [-N netmaskipaddr]] [-E switchname [-M address |-m][R{"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"1Gb"|"2Gb"|"no"}]|-V vethname] [-N netmaskipaddr][-L description] lpanname/IPresource
ip
ip [-K newname][-r ipaddr] [-i] lpanname/IPresource ip [-l] lpanname [/IPresource] ip -d lpanname/IPresource
DESCRIPTION
The ip command creates, lists, or modifies the network resource(s) running under PAN Manager control within an LPAN. LPAN administrators use the ip command to specify related configuration variables for a network resource, including: •
IP address — The IP address for an application configured to use the IP resource.
•
Interface — The pServer’s interface, a vEth or virtual switch (vSwitch), the pServer uses to handle the IP traffic directed to the application.
•
Network mask — The network mask address of the IP resource.
•
Broadcast address — The broadcast address of the IP resource. Multiple broadcast IP addresses are supported.
By default if only an IP address is given when creating the IP resource, the network mask and broadcast address are created. If an IP address and network mask are given, the broadcast address is created. If all three are provided, PAN Manager verifies that the
PM5.2_BF
2-87
PAN Manager Command Reference
combination is valid. If the IP address is modified for the IP resource, PAN Manager notifies you if the network mask or broadcast address need to be modified in order to be valid. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/IPresource
Specifies the block of information an application running under PAN Manager control uses for its IP address resources. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN the application runs in. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the IP Resource name. For example, the IP resource for an Apache application running on pServer (Web1) in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/Web1IP. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-B, --broadcast broadcastipaddr
Assigns a broadcast address to the specified IP resource. If the address is not specified, the server will assign a default broadcast and netmask address. -c, --create lpanname/IPresource
Creates an IP resource within a specified LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/IPresource
Removes the specified IP resource from a specified LPAN.
2-88
PM5.2_BF
IP -E, --interface switchname
Assigns a vSwitch as an interface to an IP resource. -I, --ip-address ipaddress
Assigns IP addresses to an IP resource within a specified LPAN. -i, --clear-interface ipaddress
Clears the interface configured for the network resource. Acts on either a vSwitch configured with the -E option, or a vEth configured with the -V option. -K, --rename new_name
Renames the specified network resource. -l, --long
List information about the settings for each IP resource of a specified LPAN such as IP address, netmask, broadcast, and interface. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified network resource. -m, --auto-assign
If no MAC address is specified when configuring a vSwitch for an IP resource the server will automatically assign one. -M, --mac-address mac_address
Assigns the specified MAC address if a vSwitch is configured for an IP resource. -N, --netmask netmaskipaddr
Assigns a netmask address to the specified IP resource. Note: If you configure more than one IP resource with the same netmask and any applications using these IP resources go down, other applications with the same netmask may see a short, temporary loss of network connection. PM5.2_BF
2-89
PAN Manager Command Reference -r, --remove-ip ipaddress
Deletes the specified network resource. -R, --rate-limiting {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"1Gb"|"2Gb"|"no"}
Assigns a rate limit of 10Mb, 100Mb,or 1Gb,or 2Gb to the vSwitch, or use “no” to leave it unregulated. Rate limiting is not supported by the Windows operating system or any operating system running as a vBlade guest. -V, --veth vethname
Assigns a vEth as an interface to an IP resource. Use this option to assign an IP resource to a specific pServer vEth. If you use the -E (switchname) option to specify a switch, PAN Manager assigns the lowest numbered vEth available.
EXAMPLES
Create an IP resource named Apache_IP with the following settings: LPAN name: development vSwitch used: apache_switch IP address: 192.168.0.45 ip -c -I 192.168.0.45 -E apache_switch development/ Apache_IP
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP ETH HMON LB
2-90
PM5.2_BF
IP RETH SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_sw).
PM5.2_BF
2-91
PAN Manager Command Reference
LB
NAME
SYNOPSIS
- creates, lists, or modifies a load-balancing service within an LPAN. lb
lb [-d [x]|-b |-s [-z] [-f] |-m [pservername]] lpanname/
servicename lb [-l] [lpanname/servicename] lb [-c] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-L description] [-p primary_pservername] [-F failoverpolicy] [[-I IPresource [-o order]] [-H healthmonitor -j IPresource]] [-T -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port [-X {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}]] [-a membername -u IPresource [-W weight] [-w {"yes"|"no"}]] lpanname/servicename lb [-K newname] [[-I |-i IPResource [-o order]] [-H healthmon -j IPresource |-h healthmon]] [-F failoverpolicy |-e] [-q] lpanname/servicename lb [-T -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port [-X {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}]] [-t -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port] lpanname/
servicename lb [-a membername -u IPresource [-W weight] [-w {"yes"|"no"}] [-r membername] lpanname/servicename lb --add-monitor monitorname lpanname/servicename lb --remove-monitor monitorname lpanname/servicename lb -M monitorname -U eventname -Q {"failover"|"restart"|"none"} lpanname/servicename
DESCRIPTION
2-92
The lb command creates, lists, or modifies the member(s) of a load-balancing service within an LPAN. You create load-balancing services to ensure that multiple application instances can maintain a dynamic response to requests. By running more than one application instance as members, load-balancing services spread client requests across its members to avoid flooding an application with requests. In addition, LPAN administrators can add
PM5.2_BF
LB
application instances (previously configured but not running) to a service in times of heavy utilization before the application reaches an overloaded state. After creating a load-balancing service with the lb command, LPAN administrators add one or more members to it. A load-balancing service and its members are required to run within a single LPAN. Load-balancing services and their members are configured using LPAN resources, such as failover policies, filesystem resources, network resources, executable resources, and health monitors. Use the fop, fs, ip, and hmon commands to create these resources. See the appropriate man page or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. See the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information about configuring autostart for load-balancing services. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/servicename
Specifies a load-balancing service by name. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the service name. For example, the load-balancing service for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/lbsapache, while a member of the service could be referred to as production/ apache_one.
PM5.2_BF
2-93
PAN Manager Command Reference
monitorname
Specifies a PAN Manager user-defined monitor. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors.
OPTIONS
--add-monitor monitorname
Associate a user-defined monitor with the specified application. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors. -A, --autostart {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether a load-balancing service starts when its pServer boots. Configure load-balancing services and their members to autostart using the lb –A "yes" command for the service and the lb –A "yes" command for the service members. By default, this is set to "no". -a, --add-member membername
Adds a new member to a load-balancing service and assigns the member a name. -b, --start lpanname/servicename
Starts a specified load-balancing service, if configured. PAN administrators use the lb –b (start) and lb –s (stop) commands to start or stop a load-balancing service. Manually starting a load-balancing service starts all the members currently in the service that are configured to be started. To add a member to a service that is running, you must manually start the member with the lb –b command. Manually stopping a service stops all its members, any member can be manually stopped while a service is running. -c, --create lpanname/servicename
Creates a load-balancing service.
2-94
PM5.2_BF
LB -d, --delete lpanname/servicename
Deletes the specified load-balancing service from the specified LPAN. -e, --resetfailover
Removes the failover policy setting from the specified load-balancing service. -f, --force
Forces a load-balancing service to stop. Use this option with the -s (stop) option. -F, --setfailover failoverpolicy
Sets or modifies a failover policy for the specified service. -h, --remove-healthmonitor
Removes a health monitor from the specified service. -H, --add-healthmonitor health_monitor
Sets or modifies a health monitor for the specified service. -i, --removeipresource IPresource
Removes a service IP resource for the specified service. -I, --add-ipresource IPresource
Sets or modifies an IP resource running under PAN Manager control for a load-balancing service. PAN Manager software relays the service IP resource network traffic to application instances running on members of the load-balancing service according to the scheduling policy set using the -X (scheduling-policy) option. -j, --assign-hmon-ipresource hmon-associated IPresource
Starts the specified load-balancing member and associates it with an IP resource. -K,--rename new_name
Renames the specified load-balancing service. PM5.2_BF
2-95
PAN Manager Command Reference -l,--long
Lists configuration settings for the specified load-balancing service(s). -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified load-balancing service. -m, --move pservername
Forces a load-balancing service to move its computing resources to the specified pServer. If the option is used without the pservername argument, the load-balancing service moves to the pServer defined in its failover policy. -M, --monitor monitorname
Specifies an existing user-defined monitor that has already been added to the load-balancing service configuration. LPAN administrators add user-defined monitors to the load-balancing service with the --add-monitor option. Use this option with the -U (event), and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure a user-defined monitor event and specify actions for a specific user-defined monitor. -o, --order resource_start_order
Specifies an order in which you want the load-balancing service to start IP resources. -p, --primaryserver primarypservername
Specifies the primary pServer for a load-balancing service. -P, --port port_number
Specifies a port number that a load-balancing service listens on. -q, --remove-primaryserver
Removes the specified primary pServer from the load-balancing service.
2-96
PM5.2_BF
LB -Q, --set-event-action {"failover"|"restart"|"none"}
Specifies the action to take in the event that the load balancing event threshold is triggered. --remove-monitor monitorname
Removes a specified user-defined monitor from the load-balancing service. -r, --remove-member membername
Removes the specified member from a load-balancing service. -s, --stop lpanname/servicename
Stops a specified load-balancing service. PAN administrators use the lb –b (start) and lb –s (stop) commands to start or stop a load-balancing service. Manually starting a load-balancing service starts all the members currently in the service that are configured to be started. To add a member to a service that is running, you must manually start the member with the lb –b command. Manually stopping a service stops all its members, any member can be manually stopped while a service is running. -S, --service-type {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"}
Specifies the type of service protocol, either tcp (default), tcp in persist mode (tcp-persist), or udp. -t, --remove-connection
Removes a connection configured for a load-balancing service. -T, --add-connection
Specifies the connection to be configured for the load balancer. The user can specify 0 or more connections. -u, --assign-mem-ipresource member-associated
IPresource
Specifies a load balancing member’s network resource to run under PAN Manager control. The network resource specified with the -j option should only have one IP address configured.
PM5.2_BF
2-97
PAN Manager Command Reference -U, --event {event_name}
Configures a user-defined monitor event. LPAN administrators use this option in conjunction with the -M (monitor) and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure an action for the specified event. -w, --start-with-service {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether or not a member is started when the load balancing service stops or starts. -W, --weight number
Specifies the processing capacity of this application relative to the entire load managed by the load balancer. See the Linux ipvsadm man page for more information on the schedulers. -x, --delete-member
Removes all members from the load balancing service. -X, --scheduling-policy {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}
Specifies an algorithm for distributing requests to the load-balancing service member pServers as specified by the Linux ipvsadm command. You must specify one of the following choices: •
rr — round-robin (default) — Distribute jobs equally among available members.
•
wrr — weighted-round robin — Assign relatively more jobs to members with higher weight.
•
lc — least-connection — Assign relatively more jobs to pServers with fewer scheduled jobs.
•
wlc — weighted-least-connected — Assign relatively more jobs to pServers with less scheduled jobs relative to their capacity.
See the Linux ipvsadm man page or the LVS website for more information on the schedulers.
2-98
PM5.2_BF
LB -z, --stop-member
Used with the -s option to stop all members when the load-balancer stops.
EXAMPLES
The following example outlines the steps to configure a load-balancing service for several Apache servers running in the LPAN called market1. The pServers running the service and the members and the failover policy named Apache_failover must already exist. Configure IP resources using two vSwitches, already configured: •
first member: apache1ip
•
second member: apache2ip
•
load-balancing service load: extload1
ip -c -E int_sw1 -I 172.29.15.3 market1/apache1ip ip -c -E int_sw1 -I 172.29.15.4 market1/apache2ip ip -c -E ext_sw -I 172.29.15.5 market1/extload1
Note: Create each IP resource with an alias. Each resource IP address must be valid for the network to which the platform connects. Create a load-balancing service with the following settings:
PM5.2_BF
•
Load-balancing service name: lbsapache
•
pServer: load1
•
port: 80
•
service type: tcp
•
scheduling policy: wrr
•
failover policy: Apache_failover
2-99
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
IP resource: extload1
lb -c -p load1 -P 80 -F Apache_failover -S tcp -X wrr -I extload1 market1/lbsapache
Add two members to this load-balancing service with the following settings: •
application name: app_apache
•
LPAN name: mylpan
•
health monitor: apache_hmon
•
first member name: apache_one
•
second member name: apache_two
•
first member pServer: apache_1
•
second member pServer: apache_2
•
first member IP resource: apache1ip
•
second member IP resource: apache2ip
•
each members' failover policy: Apache_failover
•
weighting criteria: apache_one handles twice the load of apache_two
lb -a app_apache -p apache_1 -F Apache_failover -I apache1ip -W 2 -H apache_hmon lbsapache/mylpan lb -a app_apache -p apache_2 -F Apache_failover -I apache2ip -H apache_hmon lbsapache/mylpan
Note: The filesystem must be configured on unit “(0.0)” of the disk resource of each pServer running each instance of Apache in the LPAN named market1. An initialization script for Apache (applications/Apache/etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd) must also exist on this disk of each application's pServer. Boot the load-balancing service, lbsapache, and start the service members, apache1 and apache2: lb -b market1/lbsapache 2-100
PM5.2_BF
LB
Move this load-balancing service from its current pServer to one listed in the Apache_failover policy: lb -m market1/lbsapache
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP FS HMON IP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_ip).
PM5.2_BF
2-101
PAN Manager Command Reference
LPAN
NAME
lpan
SYNOPSIS
lpan -b [-w [-q]] lpanname
- creates, lists, or modifies an LPAN configuration.
lpan -E [-aA |-rA emailaddress] [-V {1-6}] [-Q {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname lpan -H [-l] lpanname lpan -I "template_name" lpanname lpan -s [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname lpan [-x|-X] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname lpan [-aB |-rB] {platformname/pN} lpanname lpan [-aD |-rD] {switchname|"(SCSI_)"} lpanname lpan [-c |-d [-f]] lpanname lpan -G globalpoolname {[-F {"yes"|"no"}][-P {"yes"|"no"}]} lpanname lpan [-l] [lpanname] lpan [-n new_name] [-L "text"] lpanname lpan [--group-hypervisors|--ungroup-hypervisors]
lpanname lpan [-e | -u] DVDROMname lpanname
DESCRIPTION
2-102
The lpan command creates, lists, or modifies an LPAN configuration. LPAN administrators use the lpan command to: •
Create, modify, or remove an LPAN configuration.
•
List all the resources currently allocated to the LPAN(s) under their control.
•
Boot, reboot, or shut down a specific LPAN and its currently active pServers.
•
Configure default actions for LPAN security domain events. PM5.2_BF
LPAN
•
Boot, shut down, reboot, or release resources for all the pServers in an LPAN.
•
Authorize LPAN access for global pools.
An LPAN is a set of logically isolated computing resources that includes processors, network connections and storage allocated to an organization. PAN Manager software provides each organization the ability to exclusively manage its set of resources after the resources are allocated by a PAN administrator. These resources include the following: •
pBlade resources — Specify pBlades available to pServers within the LPAN, or authorize that pServers can access a global pool of pBlades. Note that each global pool must explicitly be given access to LPANs (for example, lpan -F yes -G globalPool2 foo), pServers must be configured with a specific local pool (for example, pServer -B localPool2 foo/ps1), and local pools must be linked with accessible global pools (for example, pool -G globalPool2 foo/localPool2).
•
SCSI disks from a SAN — Assign disk storage from a SAN available to pServers within the LPAN.
•
SCSI tape devices — Assign fiber channel tape devices to pServers within the LPAN.
•
vSwitches — Assign vSwitches that pServers can use to connect to internal and external networks.
•
DVD-ROM — Provide an LPAN with shared access to the DVD-ROM drive located on each cBlade. Use these to install DVD-ROM-based applications on pServers.
After an LPAN has its resources and these assignments, LPAN administrators use the pserver and disk commands to configure the resources in LPANS by creating the pServer(s), attaching each device to a specific name, and assigning a root filesystem to each pServer as necessary. LPAN administrators then use the lpan command to define an activation order for the pServers within their LPAN, boot their LPAN, and specify shutdown options for their LPAN.
PM5.2_BF
2-103
PAN Manager Command Reference
For more information about creating and modifying LPANs, see the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
"(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
2-104
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays).
PM5.2_BF
LPAN
•
54
is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
switchname
Specifies a virtual switch (vSwitch). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to specify the name of any vSwitches you created using the sw command.
OPTIONS
-aA, --add-email emailaddress
Adds a recipient to the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option to activate the setting. You set the severity criteria for e-mail notification for security domain events with the -V (severity) option. -aB, --addblade platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies a pBlade to be used as a processing resource for the pServer(s) of an LPAN. -aD, --adddevice {switchname| "(SCSI_ID)"| DVDROMname}
Specifies an optional device assignment to a specified LPAN for disks, tape devices, or switches. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -b, --boot lpanname
Boots an LPAN after it has been configured. By default, an LPAN boots into a multi-user configuration and applies the configuration to all pServers within the LPAN. If you wish to change the option for an individual pServer, you can reset that pServer’s boot option using the pserver -b command. Booting and rebooting an LPAN boots only the LPAN’s pServers that were booted when it was shut down; therefore, pServers already shut down when an LPAN is shut down and rebooted will remain shut down. The LPAN reboots normally and all LPAN resources function normally. The pServers that do not boot must be started manually using the pserver -b command.
PM5.2_BF
2-105
PAN Manager Command Reference
Note: If an LPAN fails to boot, it is possible that one of the pServers was not able to boot with a configuration that prevented the LPAN boot process. See the pserver man page and the -o (optional) option or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -c, --create lpanname
Creates a new LPAN, within a PAN, named as the LPAN administrator wishes. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -d, --delete lpanname
Removes a specified LPAN configuration. Use the -f (force) option to delete without prompting. All pServers in the LPAN must be shut down before this command succeeds. -e, --enabledevice DVDROMname
Allows a physical DVD-ROM on the cBlades to be accessed by each pServer within the specified LPAN. In order to allow an LPAN’s pServers access, PAN administrators must initially use this option to grant specific LPANs access to a physical DVD-ROM. LPAN administrators can then use this option to either enable all pServers within the LPAN DVD-ROM access or they can use the pserver -e DVDROMname pservername command to grant DVD-ROM access to specific pServers. The access status of physical DVD-ROMs(s) on a pServer are displayed under the Enabled column in the output of the pserver -l command. This command option is not necessary to enable a pServer to access its virtual CD-ROM (VCD). LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager pserver --insert-vcd image_name command option to insert and can immediately access the media image in the VCD via a console on the pServer. -E, --default-event-action
Activates event type actions for all events in the LPAN security domain. Use this option to set criteria and e-mail recipients for sending e-mail notification of events with the -aA (add-email) and -V (severity) options. 2-106
PM5.2_BF
LPAN
Use this option to activate or inactivate the sending of SNMP traps with the -Q (send-snmptrap) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -f, --force
Forces an LPAN operation without prompting. This option requires the -d (delete), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option. -F, --pool {"yes"|"no"}
Authorizes an LPAN to access a global pool of pBlades for failover (see the -G option). PAN administrators must use this option to allow the pServers in an LPAN to access a global pool of failover pBlades created using the pool command. Authorize access with a yes argument, and deauthorize access with a no argument. Use the -P option to give the pServers boot access to the blades in the global pool. -G, --global_pool {globalpoolname}
Specifies the global pool to which the LPAN should have failover or unlimited (boot) access. See the -F option for failover access, or the -P option for unlimited access. --group-hypervisors lpanname
Groups the hypervisors in a specified LPAN. This is required if you plan to perform migration operations on any vBlade pServers in that LPAN. If you don’t plan to perform these operations, grouping hypervisors is not recommended. PAN Manager does not support VBXS Hypervisor v2.0 or earlier in a group. Make sure that your LPAN does not contain any of these older hypervisors. (Support for migration on VBXS Hypervisor v1.1 does not require hypervisor grouping. VBXS Hypervisor v2.0 does not provide support for migration.) Before you can group or ungroup the hypervisors in an LPAN, all of the hypervisors in that LPAN must be shut down. -H, --high-availability
Lists all of the high availability resources in the LPAN and can be combined with the -l (long) option. PM5.2_BF
2-107
PAN Manager Command Reference -I, --extract-template “template_name”
Extracts a set of scripts and binaries that makes VMware GSX Server 3 resources available to the LPAN. You must enclose template_name within quotation marks. -l, --long
This option lists current LPANs within an administrator’s domain and includes a display of each LPAN’s description, pServers booted, and properties, as well as details about the pServers, pBlades, and devices within each LPAN. If you specify an LPAN argument following this option, it lists these details only for that LPAN. Note: Without the -l option, the lpan command lists the following status information for the LPANs within their security domain: pServer, status, agent, pBlade, hostname, up time. -L, --description "text"
Adds a descriptive label to an LPAN, for human reference. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional warning message to be printed before an LPAN is shut down. LPAN administrators can use this option to provide details to LPAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) or -X (reboot) option. -n, --rename new_name
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified LPAN. -P, --unlimited {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an LPAN has unlimited (boot) or restricted (failover only) access to the pBlades in a global pool (see the -G option). Specify unlimited with a yes argument and restricted with a no argument.
2-108
PM5.2_BF
LPAN -q, --quiet
Combined with the -w (wait) option, this option suppresses any information messages and the progress indicator during a boot or shutdown process. Use the -q and -w options only in combination with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -X (reboot) options. -Q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an SNMP trap is sent for any event within the LPAN security domain. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -rA, --remove-email emailaddress
Removes a recipient from the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. -rB, --removeblade platformname/pn
Specifies a pBlade to be removed from the processing resources of an LPAN. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -rD, --removedevice {switchname|"(SCSI_ID)"| DVDROMname}
Specifies a device to be removed from a specified LPAN. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -s, --shutdown lpanname
Halts the processing of an LPAN, including all of its pServers. The current LPAN configuration is saved for the next LPAN reboot. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M (message), or -w (wait) options to create a conditional shutdown.
PM5.2_BF
2-109
PAN Manager Command Reference -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before an LPAN shuts down. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) or -X (reboot) option. -u, --disabledevice DVDROMname
Removes DVD-ROM access from all the pServers within the specified LPAN. --ungroup-hypervisors lpanname Ungroups the hypervisors in a specified LPAN. This is appropriate if you no longer plan to perform migration operations on any vBlade pServers in that LPAN. -V, --severity severity_number
Sets the severity criteria for e-mail notification for LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. By default this value is 2. -w, --wait
Causes the lpan command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway and display a progress indicator. Use this option with either -b (boot) or -s (shutdown) options in cases where you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed. -x, --reboot lpanname
Reboots the specified LPAN. Use the -f (force) option to reboot without prompting. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M (message), or -w (wait) options if you want to create a conditional reboot. -X, --reboot-all
Reboots all pServers in an LPAN, including pServers that are shut down. Use the -f (force) option to reboot without prompting. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M
2-110
PM5.2_BF
LPAN (message),
or -w (wait) options if you want to create a conditional reboot.
EXAMPLES
Remove a disk device from the development LPAN: lpan -rD "(9.0.1.10)" development
Add a descriptive label to the development LPAN: lpan -L "Processing area for project" development
Add a blade to the development LPAN: lpan -aB PlatformOne/p3 development
Disable access to the DVD-ROM on cBlade 2 for all the pServers within the development LPAN: lpan -u "(2.0.2.0)"@PlatformOne/c2 development
Force the removal of the development LPAN without verification prompt: lpan -d -f development
List the pServers and hypervisors configured for the pBlades in an LPAN named doc: lpan doc
Enable the LPAN lpan1 to have failover access to the blades in global pool IA32: lpan -F yes -G IA32 lpan1
Enable the LPAN lpan1 to have boot access to the blades in global pool IA32: lpan -P yes -G IA32 lpan1
PM5.2_BF
2-111
PAN Manager Command Reference
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP BFRAME BLADE DISK EVENTTYPE FOP MON MONDEF PAN POOL PSERVER RETH SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-112
PM5.2_BF
MON
MON
NAME
- lists or modifies the statistical monitors for system processes on pBlades, LPANs, or a platform.
SYNOPSIS
mon [-l] [-B {platformname | platformname/pn} | -P {lpanname |lpanname/pservername}] |-M {monitor-name | monitor_ID} |-S "(SCSI_ID)" |-n ethn@platformname/{sn | cn}]
mon
mon -M {monitor-name | monitor_ID} -T trigger-number {[-H high-value] [-L low-value] [-D duration]}
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager mon command lists or modifies the statistical monitors and their trigger values for processes on each pServer or across an LPAN. There are two sets of processes that you can monitor using PAN Manager software — system resources and hardware resources. Only the following system resource triggers can be modified: •
CPU (utilization, load average)
•
Memory (current: physical and virtual)
•
Disk I/O (bytes read/written, errors)
•
Network (packets, errors)
•
Swap (available space)
•
Paging (available space)
•
Filesystem (available space)
LPAN administrator’s permission is required to use the mon command to optionally configure any monitor trigger for a specified LPAN or pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-113
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn or lpanname/pservername
Specifies a pBlade or a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the name of the platform or LPAN and the pBlade or pServer name. For example, the pServer Web1 in the production LPAN would be referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform and the lpan command to name LPANs, while LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers. Monitor Names and IDs
Each monitor has a unique name and ID and has settings that include its configurability as well as trigger number(s) and trigger values. To see the exact name and ID for the event monitors for a platform, LPAN, or pServer, use the mon -l command with the appropriate argument. Trigger Numbers and Values
Each monitor has one or more trigger numbers that contain trigger value settings. Trigger numbers specify a set of trigger values specific to each event monitor and can number one or greater. Trigger values are the statistical values that create an event and are specific to the trigger number for an event monitor. Before modifying trigger values from the default values, determine the trigger number and the trigger values for the specific monitor using the mon -l command with the appropriate argument. High and low
2-114
PM5.2_BF
MON
trigger values are dependent upon the resources monitored, while the duration value is used to calculate a timed average and must be greater than 120 seconds. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-B, --bladeframe-name {platformname|platformname/pn}
Specifies the name of a platform or pBlade. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display all the monitors and their settings for a platform or pBlade. -D, --duration number_of_seconds
Specifies a duration, in seconds, used to calculate a timed average for monitoring over which a trigger value is monitored. For example, some triggers work by monitoring a system value and triggering an event the moment the system values exceeds a threshold value; others trigger an event when the system value is averaged over a timed duration and the averaged value exceeds a threshold value. The duration is used in the latter case. This input value must be greater than 120.
PM5.2_BF
2-115
PAN Manager Command Reference -H, --high-value high-value_integer
Specifies an upper-limit threshold trigger over which the event monitor triggers an event. -l, --long
Lists setting information about all or specified event monitors. The display includes a monitor ID, its trigger types and trigger values and the event actions for a specified pServer or LPAN. Not specifying an argument lists this information for all the monitors within the current LPAN for LPAN administrators or within a platform for PAN administrators. -L, --low-value low-value_integer
Specifies a lower-limit threshold trigger under which the event monitor triggers an event. -M, --monitor-name {monitorname|monitor_ID}
Specifies an event monitor by its name or monitor ID. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display the settings for an event monitor by its name or monitor ID. -n, --eth {ethn@platformname/sn | cn}
Lists the monitors for the specified Eth. -P, --lpan-name {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Specifies the name of a LPAN or pServer. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display all the monitors and their settings for a particular LPAN or pServer. -S, --san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the monitors for the specified SCSI path device (a SAN disk or tape device). -T, --trigger-number triggernumber
Specifies an exact monitor trigger to be modified. Trigger numbers and their values are displayed for each monitor with the mon -l [-B | -M | -P] command. In general, triggers are numbered 1 or
2-116
PM5.2_BF
MON
greater and some monitors have more than one trigger number. Use this option in combination with the -M (monitor-name) option to modify a specific monitor trigger value followed by the -H (high-value), -L (low-value), or -D (duration) values.
EXAMPLES
List the triggers for the monitors of the entire LPAN named Staging: mon -l -P Staging
List the triggers for the monitors of the pServer named Web1 in the Staging LPAN: mon -l -P Staging/Web1
Modify the monitor named “pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization” so that it triggers events if Swap Utilization exceeds 90% or returns below 60%: mon -M "pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization” -T 1 -H 90 -L 60 -D 300
You can reset this monitor’s triggers by specifying its monitor ID number — 1930 — instead of its name: mon -M 1930 -T 1 -H 90 -L 60 -D 300
With either command you get the following confirmation display with the new trigger values in parentheses: Trigger 1 Criteria: Sent when pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization exceeds (90)% or then returns below (60)% for (300) seconds
List the monitors for disk 9.0.2.28: mon -S "(9.0.2.28)"
PM5.2_BF
2-117
PAN Manager Command Reference
Display a long listing of the monitors for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne. mon -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT EVENTTYPE HMON INTNET LPAN MONDEF PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-118
PM5.2_BF
MONDEF
MONDEF
NAME
- lists or modifies the default trigger values for statistic monitors for the PAN security domain.
SYNOPSIS
mondef [-l] [monitor-name]
mondef
mondef [-H high-threshold] [-L low-threshold] [- D duration] -T trigger-type monitor-name
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager mondef command lists or modifies the default trigger values for statistic monitors for the PAN domain. Default trigger values are inherited from the most current configuration; therefore the default values for LPANs come from the default values of the PAN domain. PAN administrators can list or modify the PAN domain default values using the mondef command. LPAN administrators can list or modify the set of statistical monitor trigger values within their LPAN using the mon command. PAN administrators use the mondef -l command to see a list of the default trigger values for the PAN domain. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
PM5.2_BF
2-119
PAN Manager Command Reference
Monitor Names and Trigger Types
Each monitor and its trigger type refers to either a threshold event trigger or a return event trigger that is used as an argument to the mon command. To see the exact name of each trigger type name for each monitor, use the mon -l lpanname/pserver or mon -l lpanname commands. Trigger Values
The default values list thresholds as percentages of resources used and a duration used to calculate a timed average in seconds.
OPTIONS
-D, --duration number_of_seconds
Sets the default time limit, in seconds, for a monitor trigger. A trigger duration must be at least 120 seconds. -H, --high-threshold high-value_integer
Sets the default upper limit for a monitor trigger. -l, --list
Lists information about all the monitors for the PAN domain. This option provides information such as the type and trigger values of each monitor. -L, low-threshold low-value_integer
Sets the default lower limit for a monitor trigger. -T, --trigger-type triggernumber
Identifies which trigger of the monitor you are modifying.
EXAMPLES
List the trigger default values for the disk space monitors within the PAN domain: mondef -l system threshold.remainingdiskspace
2-120
PM5.2_BF
MONDEF
Modify default trigger values for CPU utilization and disk space monitors within the PAN domain. The high threshold event trigger for CPU utilization is set to 33, while the low threshold event trigger for disk space monitors is set to 10 and the duration for the low event trigger is extended to 300 seconds: mondef -H 33 -T system.threshold.high system.threshold.memoryutiliz mondef -L 10 -D 300 -T system.threshold.low system.threshold.remainingdiskspace
You do not need to reference the former trigger values since the new values overwrite the previous values.
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT HMON INTNET LPAN MON PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-121
PAN Manager Command Reference
NFS
NAME
- creates a network filesystem resource that PAN Manager mounts from a shared NFS server directory to a mount point on a pServer that the pServer’s services can access.
SYNOPSIS
nfs [-c] [-L description] [-A {"rw"|"ro"}] [-H {hostname |ipaddress}] [-F filesystemname] [-M mount_point] [-m "yes"|"no"] [-O "mount_command_options"] lpanname/
nfs
nfsname nfs -N newname lpanname/nfsname nfs [-l] lpanname [/nfsname] nfs -d lpanname/nfsname
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager nfs command creates a network filesystem (NFS) resource. LPAN administrators use the nfs command to specify an NFS server hostname or host IP address, a pServer mount point, and a filesystem name of the shared disk or directory. Administrators can specify the access permission (read-write or read-only) and Linux mount command options as well as rename, delete, or create a description for a specified NFS resource. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-122
PM5.2_BF
NFS
lpanname/nfsname
Specifies the name of an NFS resource in an LPAN. NFS Resources are unique to an LPAN. Use the nfs -l command to list the NFS resources within the LPAN.
OPTIONS
-A, --access-mode {"rw"|"ro"}
Specifies whether an NFS resource accesses the specified hostname’s filesystem with read-write (rw) or read-only (ro) privileges. -c, --create
Creates an NFS resource available to all pServers within an LPAN. -d, --delete
Removes an NFS resource from an LPAN. -F, --host-filesystem filesystemname
Specifies a valid hostname filesystem name for the shared disk or directory. -H, --host {hostname|ipaddress}
Specifies the hostname or IP address of an NFS server available on an LPAN administrator’s network. -L, --description "text"
Specifies a description for the NFS resource. -l, --long
Lists current NFS resources within an LPAN. -m, --create-mountpoint {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to create a new mountpoint on the pServer if it does not exist.
PM5.2_BF
2-123
PAN Manager Command Reference -M, --set-mountpoint mount_point
Specifies a directory path on a pServer’s filesystem PAN Manager will use as the directory mount point for the specified NFS resource. -N, --rename new_name lpanname/nfsname
Renames the specified NFS resource. -O, --mount-option mount_command_options
Specifies additional Linux mount command arguments PAN Manager can use when an LPAN administrator is creating or modifying an NFS resource.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a mountpoint with read and write access for the /home/mylogin directory on the LPAN LP_mylogin: nfs -c -A "rw" -H 192.23.20.2 -F /home/mylogin -M /mnt/temp -m "yes" LP_mylogin/nfs
List the parameters of the NFS resource of the LPAN LP_mylogin and verify that the mountpoint has been created successfully: nfs -l LP_mylogin
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FS
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
2-124
PM5.2_BF
PAN
PAN
NAME
pan
SYNOPSIS
pan [-l [-i [-R |-I |-J image_name]]][domainname]
- lists and modifies the PAN configuration.
pan [-b |-s [--force] |-x] [domainname] pan [-L description] [-o owner] [-w owner_location] [-W {"yes"|"no"}] [domainname] pan -a {-R -C image_location -F fs_type| -I [-C image_location]} [-T OS_type] [-P description] image_name pan {-R [-F fs_type] |-I}[-N new_image_name -T OS_type -P description] [--update-image image_location [--force]] image_name pan -a -J -C image_location [-T OS_type][-P description]
image_name pan -J [-N new_image_name][-T OS_type][-P description] [--update-image image_location [--force]] image_name pan -f fs_type root_image_name pan -r |-y {-R |-I | -J} image_name pan -z {-R |-I} pan [--set-default-hypervisor-image image_name | --clear-default-hypervisor-image] pan --set-hypervisor-password password pan -E [-aA |-rA emailaddress] [-V {1-6}][-Q {"yes"|"no"}] pan -X {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}[-j] [-M newarchivename][archivename] pan -Y {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}[-M newarchivename] [archivename] pan {-K [-l] |-S [-j]} [archivename] pan -K -H "(SCSI_ID)" pan -v panname pan [-m resourcemapfile [-h] [-t] | -c [--force] |-D [-H "(SCSI_ID)"] |-g [-G name_map] |-M newarchivename]
archivename PM5.2_BF
2-125
PAN Manager Command Reference pan -k [schedulename] pan -q schedulename pan -p schedulename -n "frequency:hour:min" [-H "(SCSI_ID)"] pan --modify-schedule schedulename [--rename-schedule newschedulename] [-n "frequency:hour:min"] [-H "(SCSI_ID)" | --set-default-location] pan --rename-schedule newschedulename schedulename pan [-e |-d | {-l -u}] pan --set-name newpanname pan [--export-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"} | --restore-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}] [--use-san sanEntryName] [--overwrite-images] [--no-boot-images] [--no-root-images] [--no-media-imagse] [--no-firmware-images] pan --erase-dr-disk "(SCSI_ID)" pan --image-archive-status
DESCRIPTION
2-126
The pan command lists the status of the platforms within a PAN security domain and lets a PAN administrator use the pan command to do the following: •
List configuration information for all platforms and Storage Area Network (SAN) resources within the PAN security domain.
•
Boot, reboot, or shut down all the LPANs within the PAN security domain.
•
Configure default actions for PAN security domain events.
•
Add (register), remove, or modify the root image(s) for disks and boot image(s) for pServers within the PAN security domain.
•
Add (register) or modify media images for use by ALL pServers within the PAN security domain.
•
Import. export, and merge a PAN configuration archive.
•
Implement disaster recovery (PAN archiving) plans or facilitate a periodic switching from one configuration to another.
PM5.2_BF
PAN
•
Enable or disable the PAN Manager Linux user account tool.
•
Enable or disable flow control for the PAN domain.
Without any arguments, the pan command lists configuration information for all the platforms within the PAN security domain. For more information on PAN Administrators should refer to the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for further details about archiving for disaster recovery. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: archivename
Specifies the name of a PAN archive. panname
Specifies the name of a PAN domain. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies the PAN Manager SCSI ID of a device for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID. 2-127
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
•
1
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays).
•
54
is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-a, --add image_name
Adds a display name for a disk root image, a boot image for pServers, or a media image within the PAN security domain. Creating a new display name does not overwrite other images or display names. This option allows any number of display names for a given image. Boot and root images are copied to both cBlades in the /tftpboot directory, while PAN Manager manages usage of all media images on both cBlades (copying large media files to a particular area which could use up all available cBlade hard disk space. PAN administrators should check these directories for available area to ensure no size restrictions exist before registering the image. PAN administrators must register a media image for use by all pServers before a pServer or hypervisor can access the image via a virtual CD-ROM (VCD). To do so, PAN administrators must mount (from one of the cBlades) or copy the media image (to one of the cBlades) then use the PAN Manager pan -a -J -C image_location imagename command. This command allows you to manage media images that are stored on the cBlades, and helps you avoid using excess cBlade disk space. PAN administrators must register any custom pServer image before multiple pServers can boot from it. PAN administrators should note that registering a media image with PAN Manager makes the image available to all pServers in the PAN, that is, all pServers in all LPANs. For more information on registering custom boot images, see the appropriate pServer Guide for the software release you want to install on the pServer.
2-128
PM5.2_BF
PAN -aA, --add-email emailaddress
Adds a recipient to the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option to activate the setting. You set the severity criteria for e-mail notification for security domain events with the -V (severity) option. -b, --boot
Boots the PAN domain and all LPANs within it. -C, --image-location image_location
Specifies the directory path on the cBlades containing the root, boot, and media images within the PAN security domain. Boot and root images are copied to both cBlades in the /tftpboot directory, while PAN Manager manages usage of all media images on both cBlades (copying large media files to a particular area which could use up all available cBlade hard disk space). -c, --swap archivename
Replaces the current PAN domain configuration with the PAN configuration archive. Swapping an imported PAN configuration archive automatically validates the archive file with the target platform physical resources before attempting the swap, even if you separately perform a validation with the -v (validate) option. A swap cannot occur until it is free of validation errors. --clear-default-hypervisor-image
Specifies that you don’t want any hypervisor ISO image set as the default. -D, --delete-pan-archive
Deletes a specific PAN archive file. -d, --disable-user-account
Disables PAN Manager control of Linux user accounts. This configuration enables third-party tools to manage Linux user accounts, and disables the account command.
PM5.2_BF
2-129
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --default-event-action
Activates event type actions for all events in the PAN security domain. Use this option to set criteria and e-mail recipients for sending e-mail notification of events with the -aA (add-email) and -V (severity) options. Use this option to activate or inactivate the sending of SNMP traps with the -Q (send-snmptrap) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -e, --enable-user-account
Enables PAN Manager software to create and remove Linux user accounts. This is the default configuration and enables the account command. --erase-dr-disk “(SCSI_ID)"
Removes all the disaster recovery image archives that are on the disaster recovery disk. --export-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Exports a set of images either to a SAN disk or to a designated location on the master cBlade (or network location accessible from the master cBlade). The PAN Administrator can specify a name for the set of exported images and indicates which type(s) of images the set contains: non-custom boot images, root disk images, media images (VCDs), and/or pBlade firmware images. You can export PAN configuration archives to a local disk on a cBlade or to a SAN volume as a means to back up the configuration outside the platform (in conjunction with SAN volume HW mirroring software such as EMC SRDF or MirrorView). PAN archiving can be configured to occur on a periodic schedule, which can ensure that recent backups are available. Archived PAN configurations can be used for different purposes, including the following:
2-130
PM5.2_BF
PAN -F, --file-system-type fs_type(s)
Specifies one or more filesystem type(s) associated with a root image. PAN administrators use this option with the -a (add), -R (root-image), and -C (image_location) options to associate the filesystem type(s) with a newly added root image. They use this option with the -R (root-image) options to modify the association between a root image and a filesystem type. PAN administrators use the -f (set-default-file-system) option to set a default filesystem for a specific root image. PAN Manager supports ext2 and ext3 (Red Hat) filesystem types. -f, --set-default-file-system fstype root_imagename
Specifies the default filesystem type for a root image. PAN administrators can set the default filesystem type for all the root images LPAN administrators use to create their pServers in the PAN security domain. Only PAN administrators have the ability to create, modify, or remove this setting. You can see the default installation setting using the pan -i command. See the disk man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager supports ext2 and ext3 (Red Hat) filesystem types. --force
Forces a PAN operation without a prompt. PAN administrators use this option with the -s (shutdown) option to gracefully shut down all operations in the PAN domain without a prompt. -g, --merge archivename
Replaces data in the specified PAN configuration archive with data from the basic configuration of the target platform for the settings listed in the DESCRIPTION section. You cannot merge the PAN configuration archive until it is imported to the target platform using the -Y (import) option. -H, --sandisk "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a SAN disk target that has a PAN configuration archive file. Use this option in combination with the -D (delete), -K (list-PAN-archive), or -p (add-schedule) options.
PM5.2_BF
2-131
PAN Manager Command Reference -h, --mergereths
Deletes all rEths and vSwitches using those rEths from a PAN configuration archive. Use this option only in combination with the -m (map) option. -I, --boot-image image_name
Specifies a boot image PAN administrators want to add, modify, or remove for pServers within the PAN security domain. Important: This file cannot be updated while the image is currently in use by any pServer. If it is configured by pServers, the --force option is required. -i, --list-images
Displays the registered root disk, boot, and media images for the PAN. By itself, this option displays only the display names for the root disk and boot images; with the -l (long) option, the display name, image location, OS type and description are also printed. This command can be used by PAN administrators, LPAN administrators, LPAN monitors, and LPAN operators. --image-archive-status
Displays the status of any image archive operation in progress. This will reflect if there is an export or restore running, or if none are running, the time that the last one finished. It will also give information about how it finished (successful, failed, etc). If it is still running, information about what part of the process it is in (such as creating the archive, writing the archive to SAN, restoring the media images, etc) will be desplayed. This information is only held in memory, so if there is a restart of the PAN Manager, or failover, the last run job information would be lost. -J, --media-image image_name
Specifies a media image that PAN administrators register with PAN Manager for all pServers within the PAN to use. After you mount (from one of the cBlades) or copy the media image (to one of
2-132
PM5.2_BF
PAN
the cBlades), PAN administrators use this option with the -a and -P (description) options to register the image with PAN Manager. (add), -C (image_location),
This command option allows you to manage media images that are stored on the cBlades, and helps you avoid using excess cBlade disk space. For more information about disk space on cBlades, contact Fujitsu Siemens Computers customer support or your authorized support vendor. PAN administrators should note that registering a media image with PAN Manager makes the image available to all pServers in the PAN, that is, all pServers in all LPANs. Important: A file cannot be updated if the image is currently inserted into the virtual CD (VCD) of a pServer that is not shutdown (booting, booted, suspended, shutting down, etc.). If the media file is inserted into the VCD of a pServer that is shutdown, you can modify the image using the --force option. -j, --include-logs
Specifies that the following log files under /opt/panmgr/logs are included when you save a PAN archive: •
console.log
•
tomcat.log
•
egenera_cli.log
•
tftp.log
Depending on the size of these log files, this action can add a significant amount of time to any subsequent archiving process for this particular PAN Archive file. -K, --list-PANarchives
Displays the names or the names and settings (using the -l (long) option) of the PAN configurations that have been saved to a PAN configuration archive on the cBlade of the current platform. Use this option in combination with the -H "(SCSI_ID)" option to
PM5.2_BF
2-133
PAN Manager Command Reference
specify a SAN disk containing one or more PAN configuration archive. A PAN configuration archive does NOT include the following settings or files, which you may need to recreate on the target platform for a disaster recovery plan: •
Linux user accounts and any files there
•
cron
files
-k, --list-schedule schedulename
Displays the settings for the specified archive schedule. -L, --label "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration for administrator reference. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -l, --long
Displays more detailed information about the current platforms within a PAN than using the pan command without an argument. -M, --rename-PANarchive “newarchivename” archivename
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified PAN configuration archive. -m, --map resource-map-file archivename
Replaces settings in a PAN configuration archive with settings in a resource map file, specified using the full file pathname. This map must exist on a local, master cBlade, and must conform to the format specified in the Resource Mapping section in the DESCRIPTION section of the pan command. --modify-schedule schedulename
Modifies a specific schedule configured in the PAN. Use this option with the --rename-schedule newschedulename or -n "frequency:hour:min" or --sandisk "(SCSI_ID)" options.
2-134
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Remember, descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -N, --image-name new_image_display_name
Renames the specified root, boot, or media image for the PAN security domain. -n, --schedule-time "frequency:hour:min"
Specifies an archiving schedule frequency and 24 hour time of day. Use this option combined with the -p (add-schedule) option to add the necessary details for the archive schedule. Specify a daily or weekly frequency using either the string "daily" or the day of the week the weekly archiving should be done. For example, the string "daily:14:30" specifies an archiving each day at 14:30, while the string "Tuesday:14:30" specifies an archiving each week on Tuesday at 14:30. You must spell the day of week correctly, in either uppercase or lowercase. --no-boot-images
Specifies not to include the boot-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-firmware-images
Specifies not to include the firmware-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-media-images
Specifies not to include the media-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-root-images
Specifies not to include the root-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. -o, --owner "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration naming of the person who determines the operating configuration
PM5.2_BF
2-135
PAN Manager Command Reference
of the PAN security domain. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. --overwrite-images
Specifies to overwrite any duplicate image already in archive. The overwrite operation should only be done at time that there is very little frame activity, so you do not end up writing over and removing files that are in use. Used with the --export-images or the --restore-images options. -P, --image-description "text"
Adds descriptive text to a root or boot image used in the PAN security domain configuration. Use this option with the -a (add) or the -R (root-image) or -B (boot-image) options. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -p, --add-schedule schedulename -n "frequency:hour:min"
Schedules the current PAN configuration to be saved as a PAN configuration archive file on the master cBlade (Default) or to a disk specified with the -H (sandisk). The name of the scheduled archive is automatically derived from the current PAN configuration. You can modify a current schedule by specifying the schedule and resetting the -n (schedule-time) option. You can rename the archive file later using the -M (rename-PANarchive) option. -Q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an SNMP trap is sent for any event within the PAN security domain. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP. -q, --remove-schedule schedulename
Removes a specific schedule configured in the PAN.
2-136
PM5.2_BF
PAN -R, --root-image root_image_display_name
Specifies a root image that PAN administrators want to add, modify, or remove from disks within the PAN security domain. Important: A file cannot be updated if it is currently being used to root a disk. Concurrent attempts to root a disk while you attempt to modify the image file will fail until the current rooting or modification is complete. PAN Manager returns an error message until the first operation is complete. -r, --remove image_display_name
Removes a root or boot image from pServers within the PAN security domain. Removing an image currently listed as a default root disk or boot image leaves the PAN security domain without a default root disk or boot image. -rA, --remove-email emailaddress
Removes a recipient from the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. --rename-schedule "newschedulename" schedulename
Renames a specific schedule configured in the PAN. --restore-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Restores a set of archived images from either a SAN disk or a designated location on the master cBlade (or network location accessible from the master cBlade). This command can only be
executed by the PAN Administrator. -S, --save archivename
Saves the current PAN configuration into an archive file with the same name. You can later rename the archive file with the -M (rename-PANarchive) option. Saving a PAN configuration archive places the file on the current cBlade you are logged into or on the master cBlade if you are logged into PAN Manager.
PM5.2_BF
2-137
PAN Manager Command Reference -s, --shutdown
Shuts down the PAN domain and all LPANs within it. This command halts the processing for all the pBlades within the PAN domain. Caution: PAN administrators shut down all current LPANs within the PAN domain with this command and should warn LPAN administrators well in advance of using this command. --set-default-hypervisor-image image_name
Specifies the display name of a particular hypervisor ISO image (as registered in the PAN) to set as the default. To view a list of the registered hypervisor ISO images and their display names, use the PAN Manager command pan -i. --set-default-location
Set the default location of a specific archive file schedule configured in the PAN. --set-hypervisor-password password
Specifies that you want to change the current hypervisor root password. PAN Manager applies your password change to all hypervisors in the PAN, whether or not they are currently running. You need the hypervisor root password when logging on to a hypervisor console. The default password is egenera, but it is recommended that you change this to ensure security. --set-name newpanname
Specifies a new name for the PAN. If the chosen name is in use by other PANs on the same LAN subnet, PAN Manager generates a warning. -T, --os-type "text"
Adds descriptive text about the operating system a root or boot image is associated with in the PAN security domain configuration. Use this option with the -a (add) or the -R (root-image) or -B (boot-image) option. Descriptive text containing spaces must use 2-138
PM5.2_BF
PAN
quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. This option must be used to register WinPE images. -t, --map-disk-by-UID
Used with the -m option, maps disks according to their unique IDs. -u, --user-account
Toggles whether PAN Manager software is enabled to create Linux accounts (true) or if it is disabled so PAN administrators must rely on third party Linux account management tools (false). A false setting means that the PAN Manager account command is disabled. This option requires the -l (long) option. --use-san sanEntryname
Specifies that you want to the image archive to go to a SAN disk. The sanEntryname is the name of the image archive entry on the SAN disk. Used with the --export-images or the --restore-images options. --update-image image_location image_name
Specifies that you want to modify a root, boot, or media image registered with PAN Manager. PAN administrators can modify these images as long as the image is not in use by a pServer. Combine this option with the:
PM5.2_BF
•
option to modify a boot image (if the boot image is configured by pServers, you must use the --force option.
•
-R (root-image)
•
-J (media-image) option to modify a media image. The file cannot be updated if the image is currently inserted into the virtual CD (VCD) of a pServer that is not shutdown (booting, booted, suspended, shutting down, etc.). If the media file is inserted into the VCD of a pServer that is shutdown, you can modify the image using the --force option.
-I (boot-image)
option to modify a root image (the file cannot be updated if it is currently being used to root a disk).
2-139
PAN Manager Command Reference -V, --email-severity severity_number
Sets the severity criteria for e-mail notification for PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. By default this value is 2. -v, --validate
Checks the current physical resources with those listed in the current (target) PAN configuration. This ensures that after you have modified a PAN configuration archive to work with the current (target) platform configuration, a swap (using the -c (swap) option) will work with the current physical resources. -W, --flow-control {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether flow control is enabled for broadcast network traffic between pServers. By default flow control for the PAN domain is not enabled. If flow control is enabled for a redundant ethernet configuration (rEth) with the reth -F "yes" command, flow control becomes automatically enabled for broadcast traffic between pServers. -w, --owner-location "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration specifying where the PAN administrator is physically located. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -X, --export {dir | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Specifies a directory or SCSI path device on which to target the saving of a PAN configuration. By default, exporting a PAN configuration creates an archive file named after the PAN domain from which it was created. To specify a non-default name for the archive file, use the -M (rename-PANarchive). See the Archiving for Disaster Recovery (PAN archiving) section of the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.
2-140
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Caution: PAN administrators temporarily shut down all current LPANs within the PAN domain with this command and should warn LPAN administrators well in advance of using this command option. -x, --reboot
Reboots the PAN domain. PAN administrators use this command to reboot all the LPANs (and the current pServer configurations in each LPAN) within the PAN domain. -Y, --import {dir | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Specifies a directory or SCSI path device from which to import a PAN configuration archive. By default, importing a PAN configuration creates a local archive file in the /opt/panmgr/pars directory on both cBlades named after the PAN configuration archive file. To specify a different name for the archive file locally, use the -M (rename-PANarchive). See the Archiving for Disaster Recovery (PAN archiving) section of the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -y, --set-default-image image_display_name
Specifies the default root and boot images for a PAN security domain. PAN administrators can set the default root and boot images from a list of available images LPAN administrators use to root disks or create their pServers in the PAN security domain. Only PAN administrators have the ability to create, modify, or remove this setting. You can see the default installation setting using the pan -l command. LPAN administrators use the pserver -l command to see the default setting. See the disk or pserver man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -z, --clear-default-image {-R |-I}
Clears any default boot or root disk image assignment for a PAN security domain.
PM5.2_BF
2-141
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
List the current platforms and their current state within the PAN domain: pan
Display whether the PAN Manager user account tool is enabled for the PAN domain: pan -u -l
Reboot all the LPANs in the PAN domain Development_Lab pan -x Development_Lab
List display names of PAN registered images (this includes boot, root, and media images such as hypervisor ISO images): pan -i
Display detailed information about these images: pan -i -l
Register a boot or root WinPE image: pan -a -I -C /tftpboot/winpe_x86_gs.tgz -T WINPE winpe_x86_gs
Rename the 32-bit RHEL 4.2 boot image (named RHEL420xxxxI_IA32 by default) to RHEL42_32bit_bootimage: pan -I -N "RHEL42_32bit_bootimage" RHEL420xxxxI_IA32
Set the newly renamed, 32-bit RHEL 4.2 boot image RHEL42_32bit_bootimage as the default boot image for all pServers in the PAN security domain: pan -y -I RHEL42_32bit_bootimage
2-142
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Set the name of the PAN to "PAN_002A": pan --set-name "PAN_002A"
Clear the PAN default hypervisor ISO image setting: pan --clear-default-hypervisor-image
Change the hypervisor root password in the PAN to t0pSecret: pan --set-hypervisor-password t0pSecret
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT BFRAME DISK EVENTTYPE LPAN PSERVER SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-143
PAN Manager Command Reference
PANMGR
NAME
panmgr
SYNOPSIS
panmgr [-v]
DESCRIPTION
The panmgr command lists information about the Control Blades (cBlades) and the current version and build number of PAN Manager running on each cBlade
- lists information about the current PAN Manager software.
Using the panmgr command without an argument displays the current role (master or slave) and up since (date and time) information for each cBlade.
OPTIONS
-v, --version
Limits the display to the current PAN Manager version and build number.
EXAMPLES
List the current version of PAN Manager software: panmgr -v
List the cBlades’ master/slave status: panmgr
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
2-144
PM5.2_BF
PIM
PIM
NAME
- lists or modifies hardware and configuration settings for a specified Redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
SYNOPSIS
pim [-p "A"|"B"|"none"] [-A amperage_event_trigger] [-a][-W wattage_event_trigger] [-w] platformname/pimn
pim
pim [-e "yes"|"no"] platformname/pimn pim [--select |--unselect] platformname/pimn pim [-l] platformname/pimn
DESCRIPTION
The pim command lists the status of specified PIM-R devices (includes current PIM-R data displays) and allows administrators to configure and modify PIM-R settings. Administrators use the pim command to: •
Display status and settings for one or all PIM-R devices
•
Select and unselect a PIM-R device (similar to select and unselect for a blade)
•
Enable and disable the PIM-R power line preference
•
Set a preferred power line (A, B, or none)
•
Set or clear a PAN Manager event trigger limit for current (in Amperage) and power (in Wattage)
PAN administrator and Operator roles have read/write permissions to configure PIM-R devices; PAN Monitor roles have read-only permissions to display current PIM-R settings. PAN Manager must be running on the cBlades to take advantage of the PAN Manager pim command. The pim command is disabled on systems that do not support the PIM-R option.
2-145
PAN Manager Command Reference
Choosing a Line Preference For Each PIM-R A PIM-R device connects a single power domain to two redundant power sources. BladeFrame BF400 S2 requires four PIM-R devices, which are connected through the BladePlane. If the primary power source fails, the PIM-R automatically switches to the secondary power source, thereby maintaining constant power to the PIM-R device’s power domain. You set a primary power line preference for one of the two power line inputs. You make this selection either physically using the PIM-R device’s Line Preference Select button or using the pim -p (preferred) command option. The default settings on a new PIM-R are that the Line Preference Select button is enabled and PAN Manager’s line preference setting is set to “none.” PAN Manager persists setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device. Setting a power line preference (A or B, which is labeled on each PIM-R device) through PAN Manager automatically disables the Line Preference Select button on the PIM-R device. To re-enable the Line Preference Select button through PAN Manager, you must use the pim -e "yes" command). This command sets the PAN Manager line preference setting to “none” and prevents conflicting preference settings between PAN Manager and the Line Preference Select button. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-146
PIM
platformname/pimN
Specifies a PIM-R, where 1 >= N <= 4. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and PIM-R number. For example, pim2 on the platform named Production would be referred to as Production/ pim2. PIM-R devices are numbered one to four from the bottom up, according to their slot location on the BladePlane. PAN administrators use the bframe command to name or rename a platform.
OPTIONS
-a, --clear-current-limit
Removes any current limit that was set using the -A (current-limit) option. -A, --current-limit {amperage_event_trigger}
(BladeFrame EX only) Specifies an amperage at which the PIM-R device triggers a PAN Manager event. Valid values (in Amps) are integers in the range of 0 to 51. Only use the pim -A or -W options to set PAN Manager event triggers. Do not use these options to configure PIM-R voltages. See the bframe command for details on configuring the voltage input to a PIM-R device. For more information about configuring voltage, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -e, --enable-pref-button {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the power line preference button (labeled Line Preference Select) on a specified PIM-R is enabled. The default setting for a new PIM-R is that the Line Preference Select button is enabled. If the Line Preference Select button on a PIM-R is disabled, the button on the PIM-R does nothing when you press it. Configuring the PIM-R device’s power line preference using the -p (preferred) option automatically disables the Line Preference Select button. PAN Manager persists any setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device.
2-147
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long
Displays the current PIM-R device settings. -p, --preferred-power {"A"|"B"|"none"}
Specifies a preferred (if any) power line for the primary power source for a specified PIM-R and automatically disables the Line Preference Select button on that PIM-R device. If at any time the Line Preference Select button is re-enabled through PAN Manager (using the pim -e "yes" command), PAN Manager’s preferred power line setting is reset to “none.” The default setting on a new PIM-R is that the line preference is set to “none.” PAN Manager persists any setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device. --select platformname/pimN
Causes the indicator lights on a specified PIM-R device LED to blink blue. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends using this feature to help locate a specific PIM-R on the BladePlane. The blinking blue indication persists until reset with the --unselect option. --unselect platformname/pimN
Terminates the blinking blue indication on a specified PIM-R device. The indicator light on the PIM-R reverts to its normal meaning: steady amber for recognized, steady blue for active. -w, --clear-power-limit
Removes any power limit previously set with the -W (power-limit) option. -W, --power-limit {wattage_event_trigger}
Specifies a wattage at which the PIM-R device triggers a PAN Manager event. Valid values (in Watts) are integers in the range of 0 to 6375. Only use the pim -A or -W options to set PAN Manager event triggers. Do not use these options to configure PIM-R voltages. See the bframe command for details on configuring the voltage input to 2-148
PIM
a PIM-R device. For more information about configuring voltage, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide.
EXAMPLES
List the current settings of PIM-R device pim1 on platform PlatformOne: pim -l PlatformOne/pim1
For PIM-R device pim1 on platform PlatformOne, set the preferred power line to A (this setting disables the Line Preference Select button on the PIM-R device); and set PAN Manager to trigger an event if the PIM-R amperage reaches 30 amps or the wattage reaches 1500 watts: pim -p "A" -A 30 -W 1500 PlatformOne/pim1
Re-enable the Line Preference Select button on this device (this resets the PAN Manager’s line preference setting to “none”): pim -e "yes" PlatformOne/pim1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_bframe).
2-149
PAN Manager Command Reference
POOL
NAME
- creates, lists, or modifies a set of Processing Blades (pBlades) for a local or global pool.
SYNOPSIS
pool [-l] [globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname]
pool
pool [-c | -d] {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname} pool [-L "descriptiontext"] [-n newname] {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname} pool [-G globalpoolname | -g] lpanname/localpoolname pool [-a | -r] platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
DESCRIPTION
The pool command allows PAN administrators to create, list, or modify a global pool of pBlades, or LPAN administrators to create or remove a local pool of pBlades to be used by pServers. PAN Manager enforces a limit on the total number of global pools and local LPAN pools that can be created: 20 global pools, 20 pools per LPAN, and 200 pools total. Using the pool command, administrators perform the following pBlade pool settings: •
PAN Administrators can create, list or modify a global pool.
•
LPAN Administrators can create or remove a local pool.
•
Add pBlades to pools
•
Link a global pool to a local pool. Named global pools functionality allows PAN administrators to create multiple global pools. Administrators can create and authorize access to a global pool for each type of pBlades processor you have in a PAN. The LPAN administrator can then link an existing local pool to this 0global pool.
2-150
PM5.2_BF
POOL
•
Configure a pServer to obtain a failover pBlade from a pool. A pServer cannot have a pBlade assignment (primary or failover) designated by pBlade type. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends PAN or LPAN administrators create global or local pools made of similar types of pBlades by processor-type to ensure that a pServer obtains a pBlade from a pool that is appropriate for its requirements. For example, you would assign 32-bit and 64-bit blades to separate pools. Likewise, Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends assigning pBlades with large memory configurations and fast processor speeds to the same pool to ensure that pServers requiring these pBlade resources always obtain a primary or failover pBlade with a suitable configuration.
See the pserver command man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
PM5.2_BF
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
2-151
PAN Manager Command Reference
globalpoolname
Specifies a global pool name. lpanname/localpoolname
Specifies a local pool name within an LPAN. More than one local pool can have the same name in the PAN domain as long as the locals pools are not in the same LPAN.
OPTIONS
-a, --addblade platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Assigns a specified pBlade to a specified global or local pool. Note: With Release 5.0 and higher, the following formats for global pools are removed: pool -a platformname/pn (no global pool name specified) and pool -a platformname/pn lpanname (no local pool name specified). You must specify the global pool name to which you are adding a pBlade. -c, --create {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Creates a specified global (PAN administrator only) or local pool (LPAN administrator only). PAN Manager enforces a limit on the total number of global pools and pools per LPAN that can be created: 20 global pools, 20 pools per LPAN, and 200 pools total. -d, --delete {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Deletes a local or global pool. -g, --clear-global lpanname/localpoolname
Clears the global pool link between the local pool lpanname/ localpoolname and any global pool. It is not necessary to specify the name of the global pool, because a local pool can link to only one global pool. -G, --set-global globalpoolname lpanname/localpoolname
Sets a global pool link between local pool lpanname/ localpoolname and global pool globalpoolname. PAN Manager 2-152
PM5.2_BF
POOL
allows the local pool to access only one global pool at a time. To allow a pServer to access more than one global pools of pBlades, LPAN administrators must create a local pool for each global pool that they want pServers to access. -l, --list [globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname]
Lists the current pBlades assigned to the specified global or local pool. With no argument, this option lists settings and status of all local and global pools. -L, --description "text" {globalpoolname | lpanname/
localpoolname}
Adds text to the description field for a global or local pool. Descriptions are limited to 1024 characters in length. -n, --rename newpoolname {globalpoolname | lpanname/ localpoolname}
Renames the specified local or global pool. -r, --removeblade platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Removes the specified pBlade from the specified global or local pool. You cannot remove a blade from a local pBlade pool if it is a pServer’s current pBlade, and you cannot remove a pBlade from a global blade pool if it is a pServer’s current pBlade, unless you are removing the pBlade from the global pool and adding it to the LPAN in which that same pServer resides.
EXAMPLES
Create a global pool named global_IA64s: pool -c global_IA64s
Create a local pool named local_IA64s in the LPAN DEPT7 and link it to global pool global_IA64s: pool -c -G global_IA64s DEPT7/local_IA64s
PM5.2_BF
2-153
PAN Manager Command Reference
Add pBlade 1 in platform DIV_PLATFORM to the global pool global_IA64s pool -a DIV_PLATFORM/p1 global_IA64s
Add pBlade 2 in platform DIV_PLATFORM to local pool local_IA64s in the LPAN DEPT7 (the pBlade must already be present in the LPAN in which the local pool resides): pool -a DIV_PLATFORM/p2 DEPT7/local_IA64s
Add text to the description field of global pool global_IA64s: pool -L "This pool contains IA64 blades for use by all division LPANs" global_IA64s
List only the names of blade pools (local and global) and their contents, to which you have access: pool
List all blade pools (local and global) and their contents, to which you have access: pool –l
Add vBlade p7-1 in platform zeus to the local pool named pool in the doc LPAN: pool -a zeus/p7-1 doc/pool
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
LPAN PAN
2-154
PM5.2_BF
POOL PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-155
PAN Manager Command Reference
PSERVER
NAME
SYNOPSIS
- creates, lists, or modifies a pServer configuration within an LPAN. pserver
pserver [-c [-I image_name [-K "boot_args"]]lpanname/
pservername pserver [-l] [lpanname | lpanname/pservername] pserver [-I image_name|-i] [-K "boot_args"]lpanname/
pservername pserver [-B|-F] {platformname/pn | localpoolname | "none"} lpanname/pservername pserver -d [-f] lpanname/pservername pserver [-L "labeltext"] [-n new_pservername] [-O activateorder] lpanname/pservername pserver -a switchname [-f][-P {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}] [-G "macaddress"] lpanname/pservername vethn pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" [-f] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername "(X.0)" pserver [-e |-u] DVDROMname lpanname/pservername pserver -m {"(X.0)"}[-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername pserver -m vethn [-D switchname][-P {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}][-G "macaddress"] lpanname/
pservername pserver -M platformname/pn[-n] lpanname/pservername pserver --pan-boot-image image_name lpanname/pservername pserver -r [-f] lpanname/pservername {vethn|"(X.0)"} pserver [-o] {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver -p {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver -h {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver [--fe|--fd|--fc] {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
lpanname/pservername pserver [-S "(SCSI_ID)"|-R [platformname/pn[-n]]]
lpanname/pservername
2-156
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER pserver -b [-I image_name] [-K "boot_args"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname/pservername pserver -s [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname/pservername pserver -x [-I image_name] [-K "boot_args"] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]] lpanname/pservername pserver [--insert-vcd {image_name}|--eject-vcd]
lpanname/pservername pserver --set-keyboard-map keyboardmapname lpanname/
pservername
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The syntax “sdn” for the pserver command is deprecated in Release 5.1. The following pserver command options should be removed from any scripts: pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" [-f] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername {sdn} pserver -m {sdn} [-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-A {"yes"|"no"}][-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername pserver -r lpanname/pservername {sdn}
The syntax to enable and disable hyper-threading using the pserver command has changed in Release 5.1 The following pserver command option should be removed from any scripts: pserver -h {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The pserver command creates, lists, or modifies a pServer within an LPAN configuration. LPAN administrators configure pServers by combining a Processing Blade (pBlade) with Storage Area Network (SAN)-accessible disk devices, fiber channel tape devices, and virtual switch (vSwitch) resources assigned to their LPAN. LPAN administrators use the pserver command to do the following: •
Create, modify, or remove a pServer configuration
•
Specify a boot image and a boot order for a pServer
•
Boot, shut down, suspend, resume, or reboot a pServer
2-157
PAN Manager Command Reference
Using the pserver command, LPAN administrators configure the following pServer settings: •
pBlade resources — Specify whether the pServer uses a particular pBlade or obtains one from a pool of pBlades.
•
SCSI disks from a SAN — Assign disk storage from a SAN to a pServer.
•
SCSI tape devices — Assign fiber channel tape devices to a pServer.
•
vSwitches — Connect a pServer to internal communications and external networks.
•
DVD-ROMs — Access a physical DVD-ROM in an LPAN with shared access to the DVD-ROM drive located on either cBlade.
•
Virtual CD-ROMs — Access a single virtual CD-ROM (VCD) attached to a pServer. In general, PAN Manager attaches one VCD device to a pServer and recognizes the device using unit number "(125.0)". For vBlades running a hypervisor, PAN Manager allocates up to 32 VCDs, one for each Guest OS running on the hypervisor.
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/pservername
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer named Web1, in the LPAN named
2-158
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER production is
referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs, and LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers. platformname/pn
Specifies a platform and a specific pBlade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
switchname
Specifies a virtual switch (vSwitch). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to specify the name of any vSwitches created using the sw command. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). 2-159
PAN Manager Command Reference
"(X.0)"
Specifies the unit name of a pServer’s media assignment. When specifying unit name, enclose the Unit name in parentheses and quotation marks. Caution: The unit name to which you assign a root filesystem for a pServer must be autoenabled for the pServer to boot. vethn
Specifies the map name of a pServer’s vSwitch assignments. You are allowed to map 31 vEths to a pBlade pServer and must use the naming convention: veth0, veth1, veth2...veth30. lpanname/localpoolname
Specifies a local pool within an LPAN. More than one local pool can have the same name in one system as long as the locals pools are not in the same LPAN.
OPTIONS
-a, --attachdevice {switchname | "(SCSI_ID)"} lpanname/ pservername {vethn |"(X.0)"}
Creates a pServer device assignment. Depending on the arguments that you specify, you use this option to attach vEths (-a switchname lpanname/pservername vethn) and disk or fiber-channel tape devices (-a "(SCSI_ID)" lpanname/pservername "(X.0)"). When you first configure pServers in an LPAN, combine this option along with the -A (autoenable) option to attach disks and the -G (mac address) option to attach vSwitches for a pServer. By default, disk attachments are autoenabled. After you create a device assignment using this option, you can modify it with the -m (modifydevice) -D (devicename) option combination.
2-160
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -A, --autoenable-device {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether a disk or fiber-channel tape device is accessible to a pServer when it boots. By default, attaching any SCSI path device name configures the disk to be autoenabled. Use this option to specify disk access as not autoenabled or to reset access to a specific disk as autoenabled. Only one pServer can be autoenabled to a SCSI disk or fiber-channel tape device ID at one time. In the case of high-availability failover, SCSI path devices used for a high-availability application must be allocated to each of the failover pServers that you would like to use for the application. In addition, the SCSI path device(s) must be allocated to each pServer as not autoenabled, because the enabling occurs upon pServer boot and failover. Thus for a high-availability application, you must use the command pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" -A "no" lpanname/ pservername "(X.0)" to allocate the SCSI path device(s) that contain the high-availability application to the primary and failover pServers. -b, --boot lpanname/pservername
Boots the specified pServer configuration after it is created and defined within an LPAN. By default, a pServer boots with a multi-user configuration. Because conflicts can arise in sharing disk resources, LPAN administrators should contact the PAN administrator if they experience difficulty obtaining their configuration resources. -B, --set-primary-pblade {platformname/pn |localpoolname |"none"}
Specifies whether a pServer’s primary pBlade for booting is a specific blade, a blade from a local pool, or unspecified. To specify a pBlade, that pBlade must be assigned to the same LPAN in which the pServer is located, and the pBlade cannot be assigned to any pool or another pServer. Specifying localpoolname configures the use of a pool of pBlades. PAN and LPAN administrators use the pool command to set up
PM5.2_BF
2-161
PAN Manager Command Reference
global or local pools. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. Note: For a pServer to have access to pBlades in a global pool, PAN administrators first create the global pool using the pool command and then authorize an LPAN to access this pool using the lpan -P -G globalpoolname command. See the lpan command for argument details. Specifying “none” deletes the current pBlade allocation. Use this option to remove the current setting. If you want to change the assignment from a specific pBlade to a local pool, or from a local pool to a specific pBlade, you do not need to delete the original assignment; instead, your new setting overwrites your old assignment. -c, --create lpanname/pservername
Creates a new pServer within an LPAN. For a complete set of instructions to create a pServer, see the appropriate pServer Guide for the software release you want to install on the pServer. You can get this document from the appropriate installation DVD, or from your authorized support website or vendor. -d, --delete lpanname/pservername
Removes a specified pServer from an LPAN. -D, --devicename {"(SCSI_ID)"|switchname}
Specifies either the SCSI path device or the name of a switch. -e, --enabledevice DVDROMname
Allows cBlade DVD-ROM drive access for the specified pServer for a specified DVD-ROM if the pServer is in an access-enabled LPAN. By default, a newly created pServer derives its DVD-ROM access from the LPAN’s access state. --eject-vcd lpanname/pservername
Specifies that PAN Manager should release the current media image from the virtual CD-ROM (VCD) on a specified pServer. If
2-162
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
you force eject an image using the pserver --eject-vcd -f lpanname/pservername command option, you must log on to a console on this pServer and clear the mount point the VCD had on the pServer. Failing to clear the mount point from the pServer may return I/O errors on your next attempt to access an image inserted into the pServer’s VCD. -f, --force
Forces a pServer operation without a prompt. LPAN administrators use this option with the -a (adddevice) or -d (delete) options to remove the verification prompt or with the -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) options to shut down or reboot a pServer when a node agent is unavailable. Forcing the --eject-vcd option ejects the media image even though it is mounted via the pServer. Forcing a VCD image ejection requires administrators to log on to a console on this pServer and clear the mount point the VCD had on the pServer. -F, --set-failover-pblade {platformname/pn | localpoolname |”none”}
Specifies whether a pServer uses a pool of pBlades or a specified pBlade as a backup if its primary pBlade becomes disabled. By default, there is no failover assignment. To specify a pBlade, that pBlade must be assigned to the same LPAN in which the pServer is located, and the pBlade cannot be assigned to any pool or another pServer. Specifying localpoolname enables the use of a pool of pBlades. PAN and LPAN administrators use the pool command to set up global or local pools. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. Note: If any pServer in an LPAN is to have failover access to a global pool, PAN administrators first create the global pool using the pool command and then authorize an LPAN to access this pool for failover pBlades using the lpan -F -G globalpoolname command (see the lpan command for argument details).
PM5.2_BF
2-163
PAN Manager Command Reference
Specifying “none” deletes the current pBlade allocation. Use this option to remove the current setting. If you want to change the assignment from a specific pBlade to a local pool, or from a local pool to a specific pBlade, you do not need to delete the original assignment; instead, your new setting overwrites your old assignment. --fc --firmware-clear
Clears all firmware settings. This option tells PAN Manager to use the default pBlade configuration during the next pServer boot. --fd --firmware-disable {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
Disables a specified firmware setting on a specified pServer. Disabling a setting through PAN Manager that is not supported on a pBlade will have no effect on the pBlade the next time the pBlade boots. --fe --firmware-enable {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
Enables a specified firmware setting on a specified pServer. Enabling a setting through PAN Manager that is not supported on a pBlade will have no effect on the pBlade the next time the pBlade boots. -G, --mac-address mac_address
Specifies a MAC address for a virtual Ethernet connection (vEth). -i, --reset-default-image
Resets the pServer’s boot image back to the default image (if any) set by the PAN administrator for the PAN domain. LPAN administrators can use the lpan -l command to list the current default image. -I, --boot-image image_name
Specifies the boot image used to boot the specified pServer. You can use this option either when you create a pServer using the -c (create) command, or after you create it by specifying the pServer. If a PAN administrator creates a default boot image for the PAN security domain, LPAN administrators are not required to 2-164
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
provide an argument to this option and can use the pan -i command to list the default boot image. For a non-default boot image, LPAN administrators must specify one of the available images listed using the pan -i command. See the pan man page or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. --insert-vcd {image_name} lpanname/pservername
Specifies that PAN Manager inserts a specified media image into the virtual CD-ROM (VCD) on a pServer. This media image must be a registered image available for all pServers within the PAN domain. LPAN administrators can access the image by logging onto the pServer and mounting the image. The VCD is attached to the first SCSI device of the pServer. The VCD status for a pServer is displayed in the pserver -l command output under the DVD-ROM column as (VCD-ROM). -K, --boot-arguments valid Linux boot argument
Specifies a string to use as a boot argument for a pServer’s boot image. LPAN administrators use either a SAN disk or Network Attached Storage (NAS) for the root filesystem for each pServer. To use SAN disk resources for creating a pServer, LPAN administrators root the disk with their choice of filesystem. This disk must be autoenabled for the pServer to boot and can only be attached as a primary disk for one pServer.
Supported TFTP boot arguments include:
PM5.2_BF
•
noht
•
s
•
ip=
- Turn hyper-threading off.
- Boot the pServer into single user mode. - Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
2-165
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
ks=
- Install using a Red Hat Kickstart installation process, accessing the specified configuration file.
•
nfsroot=
•
root=
- Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
- Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
For an extensive list of valid arguments, go to www.tldp.org at the BootPrompt-HOWTO. For more information on creating an NFS-based root filesystem, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. See the disk man page, PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide, and appropriate pServer Guide for more information. -l, --long
This option lists each pServer configured in an administrator’s LPAN domain and includes a display of description, properties, status information, pBlades, devices, kernel image arguments, hyper-threading status, and user-defined arguments for all pServers within the domain. Specifying a pServer argument following this option only lists these details for the specified pServer. Without the -l option, the pserver command lists the following status information for all the pServer configurations within the user’s security domain: pServer name, status, agent, pBlade, hostname, up time. LPAN administrators can use the pserver -l command to display hypervisor details because PAN Manager treats each hypervisor as a special type of pServer. The output on a hypervisor includes categories similar to the long listing for a regular pServer, but with hypervisor configuration information. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information to a pServer configuration, for human reference.
2-166
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -m, --modifydevice {vethn|"(X.0)"} -D {switchname| "(SCSI_ID)"} lpanname/pservername
Modifies a pServer device assignment by specifying a switch or SCSI path device using the -D (devicename) option. You can also modify the current autoenabled state of the SCSI path device using the -A (autoenable) option and the optional state using the -o (optional) option. For vEths, you can modify the switch name or the MAC address for a vEth using the -G (devicemap-arg) option. You can combine this option with the -o option to designate any or all of disks of pServer as required. A pServer with required disks will not boot, reboot, or recover until all of its required disks are available. If you initiate a boot or reboot command to a pServer with required disks and one or more disks are unavailable, the pServer will enter or remain in one of the following expected states: •
On a boot command, the pServer will remain shut down.
•
On a reboot command from the PAN Manager, the pServer will stay booted.
•
On a reboot command from the pServer, the pServer will shut down.
-M, --migrate platformname/pn-n lpanname/pservername
Indicates that you want to migrate the target pServer from its current vBlade to the specified vBlade. Migration to or from a pBlade is not supported. Migration is not supported between AMD and Intel processors. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional shutdown message to be displayed on a pServer to warn users that the pServer is to be shut down. This message is displayed in both telnet and console windows open to a pBlade. LPAN administrators can use this option to provide details to LPAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. LPAN administrators can only use this option with the -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) options.
PM5.2_BF
2-167
PAN Manager Command Reference -n, --rename new_name
Allows an LPAN administrator to rename the specified pServer. -o, --optional {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an LPAN can boot if the specified pServer does not boot. For example, if you set this to "no" for a specified pServer, you prevent the pServer’s LPAN from booting if this pServer does not boot. -O, --bootorder integer
Specifies the order in which a pServer obtains its resources, including its place in the boot order of pServers within an LPAN. -p, --map-disk-subpaths {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the subpath mappings of a pServer’s disks are visible to the pServer. By default, a pServer only recognizes the PAN Manager path device SCSI ID for any disk attached to the pServer (not tape devices). If you specify -p “yes” you enable the pServer to see the subpath mappings for it’s disks, and the pServer displays the subpaths for each of its disks, next to the path device SCSI ID. -P, --rate-control {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}
Sets an upper limit rate, if any, in megabits per second, at which network traffic flows through a pServer interface. To use this option, create the interface with the -a (adddevice) option or modify the traffic rate limit with the -m (modifydevice) option. A pServer’s vEth interface(s) can be assigned to more than one vSwitch. Therefore, an LPAN administrator can map any vSwitch assigned to an LPAN to more than one vEth for each pServer in the LPAN. You need to have multiple vEths on a pServer connected to the same vSwitch in the case where your applications are limited in the rate that they transmit data. --pan-boot-image image_name
Specifies that you want PAN Manager to extract the boot image of a pServer, copy the image to the /images directory on the cBlades 2-168
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
and register the image as image_name in the PAN. This operation subsequently deploys this boot image for use by all other pServers in the PAN. After you use this option, you can see the image, image_name, displayed among all boot images registered in the PAN in the output of the pan -i command. -q, --quiet
Combined with the -w (wait) option, this option suppresses any information messages and the progress indicator during a boot or shutdown process. Use the -q and -w options only in combination with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option. -r, --detachdevice lpanname/pservername {vethn|"(X.0)"}
Removes a specified vEth, disk, or fiber-channel tape device currently attached to a pServer. -R, --resume [platformname/pn-n] lpanname/pservername
Specifies that you want to resume the target pServer (from the corresponding suspend disk) on the appropriate vBlade. For details and cautions on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. During this operation, PAN Manager marks the pServer’s status as Resuming. It then maps the corresponding suspend disk to the hypervisor and loads the pServer’s state from that disk to the chosen vBlade. When the operation is complete, the pServer’s status changes to Booted. The suspend disk is unmapped from the hypervisor and cleaned up. PAN Manager removes the suspend-related partitions from the disk and unmarks it as a suspend disk. However, PAN Manager does not scrub the disk’s contents. --set-keyboard-map keyboardmapname
Specifies the name of a keyboard map to use (currently en-us or de are supported) for the specified pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-169
PAN Manager Command Reference -s, --shutdown lpanname/pservername
Halts the processing of a pServer, allowing the current pServer configuration to be resumed at a later time. LPAN administrators use this option with the -T (number_of_minutes), -M (message), -w (wait), or -x (reboot) options to create a conditional shutdown. Note: The most current configuration of a pServer is rebooted, which means the exact pBlade a pServer reboots on depends upon its configuration. If a pServer is configured to run on a pBlade from a local pool, or if a pServer failed over to a pblade pool, the pServer will reboot on the first available pBlade within that pool. -S, --suspend "(SCSI_ID)" lpanname/pservername
Indicates that you want to suspend the target pServer to the specified SAN disk. For details and cautions on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. During this operation, PAN Manager marks the pServer’s status as Suspending and the specified SAN disk as a suspend disk for that pServer. PAN Manager then repartitions the disk, maps it to the hypervisor, and writes the suspend image (the pServer’s entire machine state, including all RAM contents). When the operation is complete, the pServer’s status changes to Suspended and the vBlade becomes available for allocation (according to your configuration). The suspend disk is unmapped from the hypervisor, but the disk’s data (the suspend image) is retained for a future resume. While a pServer is suspended, the only runtime operations it supports are resume or shutdown. I/O and network configuration changes (such as attaching or detaching disks and eths) are not supported for a suspended pServer. If you boot an LPAN that includes a suspended pServer, that pServer remains suspended.
2-170
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before a pServer shuts down or reboots. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -u, --disabledevice DVDROMname
Removes cBlade DVD-ROM drive access for the specified pServer for a specified DVD-ROM. Use the lpan -u lpanname command to disable access for all pServers within the LPAN. -w, --wait
Causes the pserver command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway and display a progress indicator. Use this option with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option in cases where you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed. -x, --reboot lpanname/pservername
Specifies that a pServer reboots. You can force a reboot using the -f (force) option.
EXAMPLES
Specify a primary blade for a pServer in the development LPAN on the platform named PlatformOne (this pBlade cannot be assigned to a pool by a PAN administrator): pserver -B PlatformOne/p3 development/webdev1
Configure three pServers in the production LPAN using a local pool of pBlades named webpool for the primary pBlade for each: pserver -B "webpool" production/web1 pserver -B "webpool" production/web2 pserver -B "webpool" production/web3
Here there is no need to use the -F (failover) option, because in the case of pServer failover, the failed pServer gets an available pBlade from a local pool. If none is available, PAN Manager looks to see if the local pool is linked to a global pool. If it is linked and
PM5.2_BF
2-171
PAN Manager Command Reference
the LPAN has access to this linked global pool (the PAN administrator uses the lpan -F -G globalpoolname command), the failed pServer gets an available pBlade from the linked global pool. If none are available, the pServer fails. Utilize a local pool of pBlades named pool2 for pServer webdev1 in the development LPAN: pserver -F pool2 development/webdev1
Failover works the same for this pServer. The difference between pServer configurations web1 and webdev1 failover is seen when failover occurs and the original pBlade is repaired. With web1 failover, a repaired pBlade is returned to the pool after the PAN Manager recognizes it, making it immediately available to all the pServers in the LPAN. In the case of webdev1, the pBlade remains inaccessible until you shut it down and reboot webdev1. Configure the pServer production/web5, to boot using the image named RHEL42_32bit_bootimage: pserver -I RHEL42_32bit_bootimage production/web5
Attach a disk already configured with a root filesystem on it to the pServer web2 within the staging LPAN: pserver -a "(9.0.0.10)" staging/web2 "(0.0)"
Attach a second disk to the same pServer: pserver -a "(9.0.0.4)" staging/web2 "(1.0)"
Remove the unit name “(3.0)” from the pServer web3 in the LPAN production: pserver -r production/web3 "(3.0)"
2-172
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
Create veth2 with switch2 without a verification prompt using a specific MAC assignment to a pServer within an LPAN: pserver -a switch2 -f -G "02:00:03:00:01:00" production/ web5 veth2
Remove veth2 from the pServer web5: pserver -r production/web5 veth2
Assign webdev1 the second position within the development LPAN to boot: pserver -O 2 development/webdev1
List the details for the hypervisor _hv-zeus-p7 in the doc LPAN: pserver -l doc/_hv-zeus-p7
Assign vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus as a primary blade for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: pserver -B zeus/p7-3 doc/docps1
Assign vBlade p5-2 on platform zeus as a failover blade for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: pserver -F zeus/p5-2 doc/docps1
Migrate the pServer named docps3 (in the doc LPAN) from its current vBlade to vBlade p5-1 (of platform zeus): # pserver -M zeus/p5-1 doc/docps3
Modify the keyboard map to de (standard German keyboard) for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: # pserver --set-keyboard-map de doc/docps1
PM5.2_BF
2-173
PAN Manager Command Reference
Suspend the pServer named docps2 in the doc LPAN and save its state to the SAN disk 9.0.1.54: # pserver -S "(9.0.1.54)" doc/docps2
Resume the suspended pServer named docps5 in the doc LPAN on vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus: pserver -R zeus/p7-3 doc/docps5
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME BLADE CONSOLE DISK ETH EVENTTYPE FOP LPAN MON PAN POOL SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-174
PM5.2_BF
RETH
RETH
NAME
reth
SYNOPSIS
reth [-l] [rethname]
- creates, lists, or modifies a redundant Ethernet configuration
reth -d rethname reth [-F {"yes"|"no"}][-p {"1"|"2"|"none"}] rethname reth -c rethname -1 ethn@platformname/c1 -2 ethn@platformname/c2 [-F "yes"|"no"][-p {"1"|"2"|"none"}] [-P] reth -c rethname -1 ethn@platformname/c1 -2 ethn@platformname/c2 [-F "yes"|"no"] [-P|-S] reth -f {"link"|"ping"} rethname
DESCRIPTION
The reth command creates, lists, or modifies a redundant Ethernet (rEth) configuration. A rEth is a pair of Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), with the same configuration and external connectivity. Network port locations vary depending upon your platform. On BladeFrame, the network ports (NIC cards) are on the Control Blades (cBlades). A rEth provides redundant load-balancing and failover capability for platform network connectivity. PAN administrators use the reth command to configure the following rEth settings: •
PM5.2_BF
cBlade NIC — Specify the cBlade NICs you are configuring as rEths. Each pair of cBlade NICs can only be used by one rEth on a platform at a time. To configure a rEth, you must use the same uplink settings for a given NIC type on each cBlade. For example, if you want two Gigabit rEths, your platform configuration requires four cBlade Gigabit NICs, two on each cBlade.
2-175
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Load-Balancing Options — Choose one of the following options if you are configuring a rEth to provide a load-balanced service: •
Pair (default) — packets are transmitted on the same Ethernet interface that is receiving packets. For rEths configured in ‘Pair’ mode, you can specify one eth as the primary (active) interface and the other as the secondary (standby) interface. If a “paired” rEth’s primary (active) Ethernet interface cannot either transmit or receive packets for any reason, such as a cblade failure or a failed uplink, rEth failover occurs. Failover allows processing to continue on the secondary (standby) Ethernet interface. If the uplink is reestablished on the primary Ethernet interface that was down, the rEth configuration can automatically failback to the original configuration. When automatic rEth failback occurs, there can be an interruption of service if there is an interval between the time the external link is reestablished and the time that the external network is fully configured. To avoid this kind of interruption of service, you can disable automatic rEth failback using the reth -p none command.
•
Static — incoming and outgoing pBlade traffic is assigned to a cblade NIC based on the MAC address of the pBlade. As long as pBlade MAC addresses end with an even split of even and odd numbers, both cblades balance the traffic volume. This option is most useful when you know some pBlades within the platform will see a higher volume of network traffic profile. For static mode, traffic is assigned to a cblade MAC address based on a pBlade's veth MAC address. If a pBlade MAC address ends with an even number, the vEth uses cbladeA, while vEths with MAC addresses ending with an odd number use cbladeB. This load-balancing option can be undermined if pBlade MAC assignments are overweighted with odd or even numbers. In the event that administrators
2-176
PM5.2_BF
RETH
don't auto-assign these addresses, it is possible to send all static rEth traffic through one cblade which will effect performance. •
Flow Control — PAN administrators can configure PAN Manager network resources to ensure no network packets are dropped between a pServer and its destination on an external network. Enabling flow control for a rEth effects only broadcast traffic between pServers and unicast and broadcast traffic between pServers and an external network: •
To enable pServer to pServer flow control — PAN administrators use the pan -W "yes" command to enable flow control only for broadcast traffic flowing between pServers. Enabling this configuration does not effect unicast traffic between pServers.
•
To enable pServer to External Network flow control — PAN administrators use the reth -F "yes" rethname command to enable flow control for unicast and broadcast traffic flowing from pServers through the specified rEth to an external network. Enabling this configuration also enables flow control for broadcast traffic from pServer to pServer.
Enabling flow control does not effect existing Load-Balancing configurations. PAN Manager Intelligent Network Failover By default, PAN Manager uses “link status mode” to detect a network failover. PAN administrators have the option to configure rEths to report Ethernet device failures based on ping results (ping failover detection mode, or just "ping mode"). The “ping mode” option uses ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ECHO_REQUEST and ECHO_REPLY packets to determine the status of Ethernet devices, while “link status mode” checks for physical connectivity with the external Ethernet switch. To choose ping mode instead of link status mode, PAN administrators must configure several required parameters for each Ethernet device with the PAN Manager eth command and then use PM5.2_BF
2-177
PAN Manager Command Reference
the -f (failover-mode) option to enable “ping mode” on the rEth. (“Ping mode” status parameters set with the eth command are retained but ignored if you do not enable “ping mode” with the reth -f command.) Use one of the following commands to choose how you want PAN Manager to manage network failover on each rEth: •
reth -f ping — Enables PAN Manager to determine Ethernet device failure using “ping mode” for each Eth device in the rEth.
•
reth -f link — Enables PAN Manager to determine Ethernet device failure using “link status mode” for each Eth device in the rEth. This is the default behavior.
PAN Manager enforces that the Ethernet devices on a rEth both operate with the same failover detection mode. In other words, PAN Manager does not allow you to specify “ping mode” for one device and link status mode for the other device in a rEth configuration. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: ethn@platformname/cn
Specifies a cblade Network Interface Card (NIC). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cblade number. For example eth1 on cblade 2 on the platform named production, would be referred to as eth1@production/c2.
2-178
PM5.2_BF
RETH
OPTIONS
-1, --interface1 ethn@platformname/c1
Specifies the first cblade or NIC of a rEth. -2, --interface2 ethn@platformname/c1
Specifies the second cblade NIC of a rEth. -c, --create rethname
Creates a redundant Ethernet configuration. Use this option along with the -1 (EthernetNIC1) and -2 (EthernetNIC2) options to specify the rEth’s redundant cblade NICs on. Each pair of cblade NICs can only be used by one rEth on a platform at a time. For example, two rEths on one platform require two separate, redundant cblade NICs. See PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for information about configuring the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for a rEth. Caution: To make other modifications to a rEth after it is created, delete it using the -d (delete) option and re-create it using the -c (create) option while making the appropriate modifications. Caution: After you create a rEth, you can only modify a -F (flow control) or -p (primary-eth) setting. To make other modifications to a rEth after it is created, delete it using the -d (delete) option and re-create it using the -c (create) option while making the appropriate modifications. -d, --delete rethname
Removes a specified rEth configuration from a platform. All vSwitch uplinks specifying a rEth must be cleared using the sw -r switchname command before a rEth can be deleted. -f, --failover-mode {"link"|"ping"}
Specify the mode PAN Manager uses to determine Ethernet device failure. By default, PAN Manager uses “link status mode” (failures are determined solely by the link status of the Ethernet device). Specifying “ping” enables “ping mode” (Ethernet device failures are determined by ping results). To enable “ping mode,”
PM5.2_BF
2-179
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager requires the Ethernet devices on a rEth both operate with the same “ping mode” settings. You disable “ping mode” by issuing the “link” option. -F, --flow-control {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether flow control is enabled for all network traffic flowing through the rEth. By default flow control for a rEth is not enabled. If flow control is enabled for a rEth with this option, flow control becomes automatically enabled for broadcast traffic between pServers. -l, --long
Lists information about the current rEth configuration(s) for a platform. -p, primary-eth {"1"|"2"|"none"}
Specifies which, if any, cblade NIC is used as the rEth’s primary interface. In addition, this option is used to disable and reinstate automatic rEth failback on an as-needed basis. This option is only used for rEths configured as "paired." In general, you can achieve more uniform distribution of network traffic between the NICs on both cblades using two paired rEths each specifying a primary NIC on a different cblade, as described in the example above. Specifying "none" for a rEth with a primary interface configuration disables automatic rEth failback. After automatic rEth failback is disabled, it can be reinstated using the eth -p n rethname command where n indicates the number of the Ethernet interface (1 or 2) that had been the primary (active) eth. If nothing is specified, the default is 1. -P, --pair
Sets the specified rEth’s Load-Balancing Option as “pair.” This option is the default. The failover policy associated with this configuration is to fail over all rEth send and receive responsibility to the other cblade. When the failed cblade returns, it resumes its original send and receive responsibilities. 2-180
PM5.2_BF
RETH -S, static
Sets the specified rEth’s load-balancing option as static. The failover policy associated with this configuration is to fail over all traffic to the remaining cblade. When the failed cblade returns, the original static assignment resumes.
EXAMPLES
Create a rEth from two gigabit cBlade NICs and a “paired” load-balancing option: reth -c GigaReth -1 eth1@PlatformOne/c1 -2 eth1@PlatformOne/c2 -P
Enable “ping mode” detection on rEth1: reth -f "ping" reth1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME BLADE ETH IP LPAN SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-181
PAN Manager Command Reference
ROLE
NAME
role
SYNOPSIS
role [-l][rolename]
- Lists the roles within the PAN or an LPAN security domain.
role [-l] [-P lpanname |-B platformname] role [-l] -U rolename
DESCRIPTION
The role command lists the roles within a specified LPAN. PAN administrators use the role command to list the exact name of roles they use as arguments for the user command when assigning roles to PAN Manager users. To see all the roles within the PAN domain, use the role command without options or arguments.
OPTIONS
-B, --bladeframe platformname
Lists the roles within a specific LPAN. -l, --long
Adds a description for each role within the PAN domain. Use this as a verbose alternative to using the role command without options or arguments. -P, --lpanname lpanname
Lists all roles associated with the specified LPAN. -U, --users rolename
Lists the PAN Manager users for a specified role.
2-182
PM5.2_BF
ROLE
EXAMPLES
Lists all the roles and a description of each role for the PAN domain: role -l
List the users with the role of system or PAN administrator: role -U PAN-Administrator
List the users with the Operator role for the development LPAN: role -U development-LPAN-Operator
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT UMON
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-183
PAN Manager Command Reference
SAN
NAME
- lists configuration information and controls operations on SCSI devices that are physically connected to a PAN.
SYNOPSIS
san [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"]
san
san -s san [-i |-m] san [-a |-d |-p] "(SCSI_ID)" san [-X |-P] [-f] san -n "(new_SCSI_ID)" {"(SCSI_ID)" | "UID"}
DESCRIPTION
The san command allows you to manage disk and tape devices in a Storage Area Network (SAN). After a SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device is physically connected and configured to a platform, PAN administrators use the san command to: •
Display information about these SCSI path devices.
•
Manually scan SCSI resources to discover newly added SCSI path devices.
•
Configure PAN Manager to manually or automatically import newly discovered SCSI path devices into a PAN.
•
Remove a specified SCSI path device or all SCSI path devices from a PAN. This is commonly referred to as disk purging.
•
Rename a SAN device (disk or tape) to have a specific SCSI ID (useful if you want the PAN Manager display names (SCSI IDs) for SAN devices to remain the same, despite changes to the PAN’s overall SAN configuration).
See the disk or tape command for operations that are limited to a disk- or tape-based SCSI device.
2-184
PM5.2_BF
SAN
The discovery process for SCSI path device resources takes place automatically during a cBlade boot. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you add SCSI device resources during off-hours, or other low traffic times, to minimize the I/O impact that the discovery process might have on the storage network. See the PAN Manager SAN Integration Guide for details. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). 2-185
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
-a, --add-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Allows you to manually add a specified path device SCSI ID to the PAN after PAN Manager discovers it. PAN administrators only use this option to manually import disks into the PAN after they disable auto-import mode using the -m (manual-pan-import) option. -A, --all-san-devices
Displays all PAN and non-PAN discovered path device SCSI IDs. -C, --configured-san-devices
Lists all path device SCSI IDs that are currently allocated to LPANs, assigned pServers, or reserved to archive DR resources. This listing displays each allocated device’s storage capacity, type of storage array, and storage array serial number. -d, --remove-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Removes a path device SCSI ID from the PAN. This command option fails if the path device SCSI ID is allocated to an LPAN, if PAN Manager is in auto-import mode, or if the disk is reserved to archive DR resources. PAN administrators can remove and purge a path device SCSI ID and UID from the cBlade kernel and PAN Manager by adding the -p (purge-san-device) option (san -dp "(SCSI_ID)"). You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. -f, --force
Forces a san command operation without a prompt. -i, --auto-pan-import
Enables PAN Manager auto-import mode and disables manual device-import mode. With the auto-import mode enabled, all devices discovered outside of the PAN are brought into the PAN when either a scan (using the -s (scan) option) or PAN Manager startup takes place. If auto-import is enabled, you cannot delete a path device. Auto-import mode is enabled by default. 2-186
PM5.2_BF
SAN -l, --long
Lists UID, I/O Path details, and partition information by path device SCSI ID in addition to the default information listing storage capacity, type of storage array, storage array serial number, and LPAN assignment. This option displays a partition table for each path device in a data format you can use as the basis for a new partition table file. To do so, copy this data into any text editor and edit appropriately. Important: Under some circumstances, the path device SCSI ID can have an unexpected form, or can change unexpectedly after a cBlade reboots. This can occur if: •
You change the SAN configuration (including adding or removing one or more disks)
•
You change the cBlade kernel’s SCSI settings
•
You change path groups on existing devices, then reboot (which may change the UIDs of existing devices)
These changes can impact a PAN Manager path device SCSI ID in one of two ways: •
The path device SCSI ID can change from 9.n.n.n to 9.n.128.n
•
The PAN Manager path device SCSI ID can change from 9.n.n.n to 10.n.n.n.
Although this condition is harmless, it may cause confusion. To help prevent the situation in which a single device is identified by multiple path device names, be sure to check to see that any disk or tape SCSI ID target you expose is visible on all paths as the same SCSI ID number when you initially configure the SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device. See the PAN Manager SAN Integration Guide for details. -m, --manual-pan-import
Enables manual device import mode and disables auto-import mode. In manual device-import mode, newly discovered path device SCSI IDs using the -s (scan) option remain outside a PAN PM5.2_BF
2-187
PAN Manager Command Reference
until a PAN administrator manually adds each path device using the -a (add-san-device) option. PAN administrators must enable this mode to allow purging of one or more path device SCSI IDs and UIDs from PAN Manager using the -p (purge-san-device) or -P (purge-all-san-devices) options. By default this option is disabled. -n "(new_SCSI_ID)" {"(SCSI_ID)" | "UID"}
Renames the current SCSI ID of a SAN device to a different SCSI ID. To identify which SAN device you are renaming, you can specify either its current SCSI ID or its unique identifier (UID). -p, --purge-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Removes a specified path device SCSI ID from PAN Manager memory. You can combine this option with the -d (remove-san-device) to purge a path device from PAN Manager memory or you can delete the specific path device(s) first and then use this option later. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. To permanently remove any path device SCSI ID from PAN Manager memory, remove access to the devices in the SAN before you reboot the cBlades. -P, --purge-all-san-devices
Removes all path device SCSI IDs from PAN Manager memory. You can combine this option with the -X (remove-all-san-devices) to purge all path device SCSI IDs from PAN Manager memory or you can delete all path device SCSI IDs first and then use this option later. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes.
2-188
PM5.2_BF
SAN -s, --scan
Instructs PAN Manager to scan its resources for SCSI devices added after the cBlades have booted and PAN Manager is running. This option returns a list of changes found during the scan, along with warnings, if any. When the prompt returns, use the -l (long) option to see newly added disks. -U, --unconfigured-san-devices
Displays information only about SCSI devices in a PAN that are not currently assigned to an LPAN. -X, --remove-all-san-devices
Removes all path device SCSI IDs for devices that are not currently allocated to an LPAN or pServer. If the force option (-f) is not used, PAN Manager prompts the user for a confirmation. PAN administrators can purge all path device SCSI IDs and UIDs from the cBlade kernel and PAN Manager by adding the -P (purge-all-san-device) option (san -XP "(SCSI_ID)"). Before you purge all devices, you should manually scan (using the option) to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of all sub paths to the path device before the purge. -s
EXAMPLES
Search for newly added SAN storage devices: san -s
List detailed information about all path device SCSI IDs: san -l
List detailed information about path device (9.0.1.76): san -l "(9.0.1.76)"
List brief information about all unconfigured path device SCSI IDs: san -U
PM5.2_BF
2-189
PAN Manager Command Reference
Remove all disks that are not currently allocated for another use; do not prompt for confirmation: san -X -f
Remove path device (9.0.1.76) (it must not be currently allocated for another use): san -d "(9.0.1.76)"
Remove path device (9.0.1.76) (it must not be currently allocated for another use) and purge all references to its UID from PAN Manager memory : san -dp "(9.0.1.76)"
Rename the device 9.0.1.25 to 12.3.0.58: # san -n “(12.3.0.58)” “(9.0.1.25)”
Specify a new SCSI ID for a device whose UID is EMC-SYMMETRIX-WWN-6006048000038722003753594d3237 41: # san -n “(9.0.3.78)” “EMC-SYMMETRIX-WWN-6006048000038722003753594d323741”
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
DISK LPAN PSERVER
2-190
PM5.2_BF
SAN TAPE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-191
PAN Manager Command Reference
SMTPSVR
NAME
smtpsvr
SYNOPSIS
smtpsvr [-l] [domainname]
- lists and modifies the PAN security domain’s configuration for the Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server at your site.
smtpsvr [-i ipaddress] [-p port] [-U username] [-P password] [-s send-address] [domainname]
DESCRIPTION
The smtpsvr command lists and modifies the configuration to allow a PAN to communicate with the Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server at your site. PAN administrators use the smtpsvr command to allow a PAN to send e-mail messages from their SMTP server as well as set up a sender address of the PAN Manager mail gateway. Though it is possible to have more than one PAN administrator enabled to configure a PAN’s SMTP server, PAN administrators can only configure one mail gateway for a platform. Only PAN administrators can use the smtpsvr command.
OPTIONS
-l, --list
Displays the current configuration for your SMTP server and the PAN Manager mail gateway. -i, --ipaddress ipaddress
Modifies the IP address to match your SMTP server. To clear the setting, PAN administrators must leaving an empty string for this argument. If this configuration is empty, PAN Manager cannot send any e-mail notifications. -p, --port port_number
Modifies the port number to match your SMTP server. 2-192
PM5.2_BF
SMTPSVR -P, --password "text"
Modifies the password associated with the account designated with the -U (user) option. -s, --send-address emailaddress
Modifies the sender of the PAN Manager mail gateway. There can only be one send-address for a platform and this e-mail address must match an existing account on your SMTP server. -U, --user username
Modifies the Linux account name of the PAN administrator(s) you designate as the sender. Only accounts with PAN administrator roles are valid.
EXAMPLES
Configure the PAN Manager to not send e-mails for the LPAN domain, PlatformOne/p3 development smtpsvr -i "" PlatformOne/p3 development
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
PAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-193
PAN Manager Command Reference
SNMP
NAME
- lists or modifies the configuration for a PAN Manager Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent.
SYNOPSIS
snmp [-I ipaddress] [-P port] [-R readstring] [-S {"monitor"|"control"|"disable"}[-W writestring] [-T sysContact] [-N sysLocation]{-G |-L lpanname}
DESCRIPTION
The snmp command lists or modifies SNMP agent settings for a specified security domain — global (the PAN domain) or LPAN domain. PAN Manager SNMP agents support SNMP versions 1 and 2c. PAN Manager software provides an SNMP agent for each security domain. You are required to have PAN or LPAN administrator permission to use the snmp command, depending on the SNMP agent’s security domain.
snmp
For example, if there is one platform in a PAN and it has four LPANs, this system would have a total of five SNMP agents: •
One PAN domain agent
•
Four LPAN agents
SNMP agents are disabled by default in PAN Manager software. To enable SNMP, administrators use the snmp command to configure each agent. It is recommended that you use non-default values when enabling your community strings. All SNMP agents reside on the Master cBlade, each one with a unique combination of IP address and UDP port used to communicate with a set of SNMP managers. This pair must not be bound to a specific cBlade. See the PAN Manager extnet command or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information about SNMP agents. Use the snmp command to set attributes of each agent including:
2-194
PM5.2_BF
SNMP
•
IP address — the IP address to which the agent binds.
•
UDP Port — the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port to which the agent binds.
•
Community Strings — the accepted authorization string required from an SNMP manager to send valid read or read/ write requests to an agent. It is recommended that you enter a non-default value for read-only and read/write community strings.
•
Monitor and Control — the level of authority an agent has. SNMP agent action is an escalating scale ranging from disable, to monitor only, to monitor and control. You enable a level using the -S option.
PAN Manager software administrators also need to authorize external SNMP managers, which may send requests to or receive traps from a specified SNMP agent. You use the snmpmgr command for these configuration options. Each SNMP agent can respond to more than one SNMP manager. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP. PAN Manager Command Syntax For the snmp command, providing only a global (the PAN domain) LPAN argument displays a list of the SNMP agents configured for that area. This security domain name is also the command argument to specify an agent you want to modify.
OPTIONS
-G, --global-pan-domain
Specifies the agent you are configuring is a global (PAN) agent. -I, --ipaddress ipaddress
Specifies the IP address of the specified SNMP agent. -L, --lpan lpanname
Specifies that the agent you are configuring is an LPAN agent. PM5.2_BF
2-195
PAN Manager Command Reference -N, --location System_Location_String
Specifies the physical location of the platform running the managed node. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP traps and managers. -P, --port port_number
Specifies the UDP port number of the specified SNMP agent. This option takes a valid port number as an argument. While the default SNMP port is 161, you can choose a non-default setting, providing it is unused. -R, --read-community "text"
Specifies a read-only community string accepted by the SNMP agent. This option requires a string as an argument. A non-default setting for read-only community strings is recommended. -S, --agent-scope {"monitor"|"control"|"disable"}
Specifies the SNMP agent functions and provides a way to enable or disable the snmp monitor and control functions. -T, --contact System_Contact_String
Specifies the contact information for the System Contact. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP traps and managers. -W, --write-community "text"
Specifies a read-write community string accepted by the SNMP agent. This option requires a string as an argument. A non-default setting for read/write community strings is recommended.
EXAMPLES
Enable an SNMP agent for the staging LPAN, specifying port 161 on IP address 12.24.48.96 with a read community string cgable24, a read/write community string cgable45, and with monitor and control enabled: snmp -I 12.24.48.96 -P 161 -R cgable24 -W cgable45 -S control
2-196
PM5.2_BF
SNMP
Modify this agent to have a new read/write community string cgable28 snmp -W cgable28
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENTTYPE EXTNET SNMPMGR
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_snmpmgr).
PM5.2_BF
2-197
PAN Manager Command Reference
SNMPMGR
NAME
- lists or modifies the set of authorized Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) managers with which a PAN Manager SNMP agent interacts.
SYNOPSIS
snmpmgr -I ipaddress [-P port -C trapstring] [-M manageripmask |-m] [-V {1|2}]{-G |-L lpanname}
snmpmgr
snmpmgr -r ipaddress {-G |-L lpanname}
DESCRIPTION
The snmpmgr command lists or modifies the set of authorized SNMP managers with which each SNMP agent communicates. To list all the SNMP managers to which an agent responds, use the IP address as a command argument and identify the agent by its security domain (-G for global PAN domain or -L for LPAN domain). Using the snmpmgr command, you can specify the IP address of an SNMP manager with which an agent interacts or specify a UDP trap port, a trap community string and IP address of an SNMP manager to which you want an SNMP agent to send traps. PAN Manager software provides an SNMP agent for each security domain of the PAN structure - global (the PAN domain) or LPAN. You are required to have PAN or LPAN administrator permission to use the snmpmgr command, depending on the area of responsibility the SNMP agent is assigned. The snmpmgr command allows you to specify the following attributes:
2-198
•
IP addresses — the IP address(es) and the network mask(s) of the SNMP manager(s) with which an agent interacts.
•
UDP Trap Port — the UDP port assignment of the SNMP manager with which an agent interacts.
•
Trap community string — the community string sent in each trap to the specified SNMP manager.
PM5.2_BF
SNMPMGR
Administrators use the snmpmgr command to establish the set of SNMP managers, which may request and/or receive traps from a specified SNMP agent. Use the snmp command to set up the attributes for each SNMP agent. PAN Manager Command Syntax For the snmpmgr command, providing only a global (the PAN domain) or LPAN argument displays the configuration for the SNMP manager, which send requests to and receive traps from a specified SNMP agent for that area. This security domain name is also the command argument to specify an SNMP manager you want to modify.
OPTIONS
-C, --trap-community "text"
Specifies a community string an agent uses to send traps to an SNMP manager. -G, --global-pan-domain
Specifies the agent that responds to the global (PAN domain) manager you are configuring. -I, --ipaddress ipaddress
Specifies the IP address of an SNMP manager with which an agent interacts. Use this option alone to print out the specified SNMP manager setting or with the -p (port) and -c (trapcommunity) options to assign the port setting and trap community string for an SNMP manager with which a specified agent interacts. -L, --lpan lpanname
Specifies the agent that responds to the LPAN manager you are configuring. -M, --ip-mask manageripmask
Specifies the IP address for a network mask. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.255. See the PAN Manager
PM5.2_BF
2-199
PAN Manager Command Reference
Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP managers and trap destinations. -m, --reset-mask
Resets the manager network mask to 255.255.255.255. -P, --port port_number
Specifies the UDP port number to which a specified SNMP agent sends traps. For the agent to send traps to this manager, the port number must be greater than zero. To prevent an agent from sending traps to this manager, assign the UDP port to zero. -r, --remove-ipaddress ipaddress
Removes an SNMP manager from the set of managers with which an SNMP agent interacts. -V, --version {1|2}
Specifies an administrator’s trap version choice between SNMPV1 or SNMPV2C. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details of configuring SNMP trap version.
EXAMPLES
Create a staging LPAN SNMP manager with the IP address 12.24.48.95 the staging SNMP agent interacts with: snmpmgr -I 12.24.48.95 staging
Create the staging LPAN SNMP manager with the IP address 12.24.48.95 the staging SNMP agent sends traps to using the community string cgable to port 1090: snmpmgr -I 12.24.48.95 -P 1090 -C cgable staging
Remove the staging SNMP manager: snmpmgr -r 12.24.48.95 staging
RETURN VALUE 2-200
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1. PM5.2_BF
SNMPMGR
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENTTYPE SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_snmp).
PM5.2_BF
2-201
PAN Manager Command Reference
SW
NAME
sw - creates, modifies, or lists the configuration for a Virtual Switch
(vSwitch).
SYNOPSIS
sw -n newvswitchname oldvswitchname sw [-l] [vswitchname] sw [-c |-d|-r] vswitchname sw [-c] [-U -E {rethname|} [-V VLAN_ID | -N VLAN_name]]
vswitchname
DESCRIPTION
The sw command creates, modifies, or lists the configuration for a virtual switch (vSwitch). vSwitches establish connectivity between pServers and external networks or between pServers. PAN administrators use the sw command to create enough vSwitches to accommodate requests from the LPAN administrators for vEths to provide one of two types of connectivity: •
Internal Connectivity LPAN administrators can create vEths for pBlade-to-pBlade communication using any vSwitch they have permission to access. If two pServers connect to the same vSwitch, the two pServers can communicate.
•
External Connectivity PAN architecture only supports external network communication through Redundant Ethernet (rEth) configurations. PAN administrators can only create vSwitches for external connectivity using an uplink configured with the reth commands. PAN administrators create vSwitches for external connectivity with the sw command by specifying the rEth and optional VLAN ID configuration the vSwitch uses.
2-202
PM5.2_BF
SW
External traffic through an uplink can be non-VLAN tagged over any rEth or VLAN-tagged over the Gigabit rEths . Only uplinked vSwitches on a rEth can have a VLAN setting. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: vswitch_name
Specifies a switch name. You cannot name a vSwitch beginning with the three characters eth, since these characters are reserved for switch-related devices (names for LPANs, pServers, even users can begin with these characters, however). rethname
Specifies a rEth created with the reth command. VLAN_ID
Specifies a VLAN ID configured using the eth command.
OPTIONS
-c, --create vswitchname
Creates a vSwitch. You cannot create a vSwitch and an uplink in the same command. -d, --delete vswitchname
Removes the specified vSwitch configuration. This option can be combined with the -f (force) option.
PM5.2_BF
2-203
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --reth-device {rethname}
Specifies a rEth for a vSwitch’s external network connectivity. Note: You are required to configure rEths using the reth commands before you can associate a vSwitch with it. You must clear this uplink using the -r (clear-uplink) option before you can delete this rEth with the reth command. -l, --long
Lists the current vSwitches within a platform and includes a listing for each vSwitch’s External connectivity and Uplink settings. -n, --rename newvswitchname oldvswitchname
Renames the specified existing vSwitch. -N, --vlan-name VLAN_name
Specifies an optional VLAN name assigned to a specified Ethernet card for the -U (set-uplink) option. -r, --clear-uplink vswitchname
Clears the current assignment of a specified vSwitch configuration. Clearing a vSwitch uplink makes it unusable as a conduit to an external network. You must use this option when you want to remove or modify a rEth configuration. -U, --set-uplink vswitchname
Associates a vSwitch with a specified rEth and its uplink information. Use the reth -l rethname command to list the available uplinks configured for your rEth. You cannot create a vSwitch and add an uplink at the same time. Caution: You must clear this uplink with the -r (clear-uplink) option before you can remove or modify this rEth at a later time with the reth command. -V, --vlan-id VLAN_ID
Specifies an optional VLAN ID assigned for a rEth. Use this option with the -U (set-uplink) option. To see the list of valid (if any) 2-204
PM5.2_BF
SW
VLAN IDs for a rEth, use the reth -l rethname command for the Gigabit cBlade NICs that make up your rEth. Note: You can only assign one VLAN ID to a vSwitch. For example, if you have five VLAN IDs configured for a rEth that LPAN administrators will use for external network connectivity, you must create five vSwitches.
EXAMPLES
Create a vSwitch, ext_sw: sw -c ext_sw
Add the GigaReth uplink configuration and VLAN id 17 already configured to the rEth of the vSwitch, ext_sw: sw -U -E GigaReth -V 17 ext_sw
Remove the VLAN Ids from the configuration for the vSwitch, GigaReth: sw -r GigaReth
Delete the vSwitch, ext_sw, without verification prompt: sw -d -f ext_sw
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ETH IP PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_eth). PM5.2_BF
2-205
PAN Manager Command Reference
TAPE
NAME
tape
SYNOPSIS
tape [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"]
- lists tape devices physically connected to a PAN.
tape -L "text" "(SCSI_ID)"
DESCRIPTION
The tape command displays information about tape devices physically connected to a platform, and also allows you to set a text string that will be displayed in the “Description” field of subsequent detailed listings. Issuing the tape command with no options displays a brief listing of all tape devices. You can produce brief or detailed listings for a specific tape device as specified by its SCSI ID, or for all tape devices, or for just those that are configured or unconfigured for an LPAN. You can also specify a descriptive text string that will be displayed as part of the long information listing. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Addition naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-206
PM5.2_BF
TAPE
"(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-A, --all-tapes
Displays I/O path information about all tape devices attached to the PAN. -C, --configured-tapes
Displays I/O path information about only configured tape devices attached to the PAN. -l, --long
Displays a detailed listing of the specified tape device(s). -L, --description "text"
Sets a text string that will be displayed in the Description field of long listings for a specified tape device. -U, --unconfigured-tapes
Displays I/O path information about only unconfigured tape devices attached to the PAN.
PM5.2_BF
2-207
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
Set the descriptive text string "StorageTek 9840B" for the tape device at “(9.0.0.170)”: tape -L "StorageTek 9840B" "(9.0.0.170)"
Produce a detailed listing of the tape device at “(9.0.0.170)”: tape -l "(9.0.0.170)"
Produce a brief listing of just those tape devices that are assigned to an LPAN: tape -C
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
LPAN PSERVER SAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-208
PM5.2_BF
UMON
UMON
NAME
umon - creates, modifies, or lists user-defined monitor resources for
an LPAN.
SYNOPSIS
umon [-c] -E exec [-L description] [-I interval][-D delay] [-U unit] [-a eventname -C {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="} -T value -S {1-6}]
lpanname/monitorname umon -m eventname [-N newname] [-C {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="}] [-T value][-S {1-6}]
lpanname/monitorname umon -n newname lpanname/monitorname umon -r eventname lpanname/monitorname umon -d lpanname/monitorname umon [-l] lpanname[/monitorname]
DESCRIPTION
The umon command provides the ability to create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors defined by the user to monitor the activity on an LPAN. The events tracked by these monitors can help monitor and subsequently control PAN Manager behavior. Output can be used to monitor applications and, if necessary, trigger application fail-over. User-defined monitor resources let a user create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors and use the monitor’s events to control PAN Manager behavior. administrators configure resources for a specific monitor by specifying the following attributes:
PM5.2_BF
•
Monitor name
•
Monitor description
•
Names of the health, status, or statistical events connected with this user-defined monitor
•
Value used for the comparison
2-209
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
•
Time to delay the start of the user-defined monitor
•
Path to the executable script
•
Frequency with which the user-defined monitor runs
•
Event severity
-a, --add-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be added to the user-defined monitor. -C, --comparator-type {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="}
Specifies a comparing symbol to enable a user to compare a target value with a return value from a user monitor. -c, --create
Creates a basic user monitor when an executable script path is specified using the -E (executable) option. -D, --startup-delay time_in_seconds
Specifies the number of seconds to wait after the start of the application or load balancer before starting the monitor. -d, --delete
Deletes the specified user-defined monitor. -E, --executable "text"
Specifies the path to the executable script when the user-defined monitor is first created. -I, --schedule-interval {time_in_seconds}
Defines the frequency that the specified monitor will run. The default and the minimum time interval is 10 seconds. -L, --description "text"
Specifies an optional description of the user-defined monitor when it is first created. 2-210
PM5.2_BF
UMON -l, --long
Lists information about current user-defined monitors. Without an additional argument, the list option displays the Name, Description, path to the executable, Schedule Interval, and Startup Delay for all user-defined monitors within a specified LPAN. -m, --modify-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be modified in an existing user-defined monitor. -N, --new-event-name event_name
Renames the specified event. -n, --rename {new_monitor_name}
Renames the specified existing user-defined monitor. -r, --remove-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be removed from an existing user-defined monitor. -S, --event-severity {1-6}
Specifies the severity of the event as an integer between 1 and 6. -T, --target-value integer
Specifies an integer indicating the value that the returned monitor value will be compared against. -U, --set-unit unit
Assigns a unit measure for the monitor value, for example bytes/sec or percentage.
EXAMPLES
Create a standard VMware status application monitor vm_status: umon -c -E "/opt/panmgr/templates/vmware/status.sh" MyLPAN/vm_status
PM5.2_BF
2-211
PAN Manager Command Reference
Create a PAN Manager event vmstuck of severity 3 whenever your VMware status application monitor vm_status returns a value equal to 1: umon -a vmstuck -C "==" -T -1 -S 3 MyLPAN/vm_status
Create a PAN Manager event vmerror of severity 3 whenever your VMware status application monitor vm_status returns a value greater than 0: umon -a vmerror -C ">" -T 0 -S 3 MyLPAN/vm_status
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT LPAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-212
PM5.2_BF
USER
USER
NAME
- creates or modifies attributes, including role assignments, for each PAN Manager software user.
SYNOPSIS
user [-a |-m] [-N fullname][-T title][-E email][-D deptname] username
user
user -r [-f] username user [-l] [username] user [-l] [-O |-S |-B platformname |-P lpanname] user [-aR |-rR] rolename username
DESCRIPTION
The user command creates or modifies attributes, including role assignments, for each PAN Manager software user. PAN administrators can create PAN Manager users with the same username on the cBlades using either the account command or another Linux account management tool. PAN Manager users require a Linux user account created with the PAN Manager command, account, for cBlade access. You should create PAN Manager accounts for those administrators who will use PAN Manager to manage a PAN or an LPAN. PAN Manager users with only a PAN Manager user account cannot access the cBlades directly. Using the user -l command without an argument displays a list of current users. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed.
PM5.2_BF
2-213
PAN Manager Command Reference
Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: username
Reference to the username PAN Manager uses to identify a PAN Manager user. lpanname|platformname
Specifies the LPAN or platform name to which you are adding users.
OPTIONS
-a, --add username
Adds a specified Linux account user as a PAN Manager user. -aR, --assign rolename username
Assigns a role to a user. You can get a complete list and description of current roles using the role -l command. -B, --framename platformname
Displays a list of users for a specified platform. Use this option in combination with the -l (list) option. -D, --deptname "text"
Specifies a user’s department. Department names cannot contain spaces. -E, --email emailaddress
Specifies the e-mail address for a user. -f, --force
Forces a user command operation without a prompt. -l, --long
Lists information about current users. Without an additional argument, the list option displays the roles, full name, title, e-mail, 2-214
PM5.2_BF
USER
and department name for all users, while providing a username displays this information for a specified user. You can use this option in combination with the -C (componentUsers), -S (sysadmins) and -O (roles) options to display a filtered list of users. -m, --modify username
Modifies the settings for a specified PAN Manager user. -N, --fullname fullname
Specifies the full name of a user, if needed. Full names cannot contain spaces. -O, --roles {lpanname|platformname}
Lists all the users by username, and the roles they have been assigned. Use this option in combination with the -l (long) option. -P, --lpanusers lpanname
Displays a list of users in a specified LPAN. Use this option in combination with the -l (list) option. -r, --remove username
Removes a specified PAN Manager user. -rR, --un-assign rolename username
Removes a role from a user. -S, --sysadmins {lpanname|platformname}
Lists all the users assigned the role of System administrators. Use this option in combination with the -l (long) option. -T, --title "text"
Specifies the title of a user, if needed. Titles cannot contain spaces.
PM5.2_BF
2-215
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
Add a full name and an e-mail address to the user cgable: user -m -N Clark_Gable -E [email protected] cgable
List the users with the LPAN administrator role in the LPAN development: user -l development-LPAN-Administrator
Give user cgable an LPAN administrator role in the development LPAN: user -aR development-LPAN-Administrator cgable
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT ROLE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_role).
2-216
PM5.2_BF
VERSION
VERSION
NAME
version - Lists versions of software packages installed on a cBlade
or pServer.
SYNOPSIS
version [-c |-p |-e |-x |-g] [platformname/cn |-s lpanname/pservername] version -r {"egenkern"|"panmgr"}[platformname/cn|-s
lpanname/pservername]
DESCRIPTION
The version command lists versions of software packages (RPMs) installed on a platform. Specific information displayed includes: •
Software installation history, detailing release and build number, and build date for either a specified cBlade or a pServer.
•
The version(s) of Installation media, Linux kernel, Egenera kernels, PAN Manager software, and Egenera RPMs that have been installed on a specified cBlade or pServer.
•
A log of all Egenera RPM installations made to date.
PAN administrators use the version command to list the history, version number, and kernel type of software running on a specified cBlade or pServers. LPAN administrators use the version command to list the history, version number, and kernel type of software running on a specified pServer in their LPAN. All users can use the version command without arguments to display a list of all version information for the platform. The specified cBlade or pServer you are interested in must be currently booted for the information to be updated or displayed.
PM5.2_BF
2-217
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/cN
Specifies a cBlade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. lpanname/pservername
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, to be designated as a MON server in the production LPAN, would be referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs, and LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers.
OPTIONS
-c, --cd-version
Displays the release and build number of the installation media for a cBlade or pServer as well as the date the installation was built. -e, --egen-kernel
Displays the release and build number of the production kernel and user packages for pServers as well as the date the kernel package was built.
2-218
PM5.2_BF
VERSION -g, --revision-log
Displays a list of the production RPMs installed on the cBlade. This options displays the output of the Linux cat command on the log of the package installation process. -p, --panmgr-version
Displays the release and build number of PAN Manager running on the specified cBlade or pServer, as well as the date the package was built. -r, --rpm {"egenkern"|"panmgr"}
Displays the RPMs used to install the specified component, the production Kernel or the PAN Manager software. -s, --pservername lpanname/pservername
Specifies the LPAN and pServer you want to display version information about. Without this option, you can only display version information about cBlade software. -x, --linux-kernel
Displays the kernel version of the operating system running on the cBlade. This output is taken from the output of the Linux command uname -r.
SEE ALSO
PM5.2_BF
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-219
Document Number 430-SB0085 November 2008 PM5.2_BF
Copyright Copyright © 2008 Egenera, Inc. All rights reserved. This document, and the product described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used in accordance with the terms of such license. The content of this document is furnished for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice. Egenera, Egenera stylized logos, BladeFrame, BladeLatch, BladeMate, BladePlane, cBlade, Control Blade, PAN Manager, pBlade, Processing Blade, sBlade, and Switch Blade are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. PRIMERGY is a registered trademark of Fujitsu Siemens Computers. AMD, AMD Opteron, and AMD Athlon are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.. EMC, CLARiiON, and Symmetrix are registered trademarks of EMC Corporation. The IBM Developer Kit for Linux, Java 2 Technology Edition contains software which is copyright IBM Corporation, Sun Microsystems Inc., Hewlett-Packard Co., and X Consortium. Intel and Itanium are registered trademarks and Xeon is a trademark of the Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun Logo, Solaris, and the Java logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The virtual VGA console uses Microsoft Terminal Services Advanced Client (TSAC), which is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation. MindTerm is copyright AppGate AB. Nero is a trademark of Nero AG. NetApp is a registered trademark and Network Appliance is a trademark of Network Appliance, Inc. Oracle9i is a trademark of Oracle Corporation. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX Products GmbH, a Novell business. VMware, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware, Inc. Xen, XenSource, XenServer, and XenEnterprise are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Printed in the United States of America. Egenera, Inc., 165 Forest Street, Marlboro, Massachusetts 01752.
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1: PAN Manager Commands Overview Using PAN Manager Commands ............................................................................ 1-2 Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands .............................................. 1-3 The Man Page Format ............................................................................................. 1-8
Chapter 2: PAN Manager Commands ACCOUNT ............................................................................................................. 2-2 APP ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 BFRAME ............................................................................................................ 2-15 BLADE ................................................................................................................. 2-21 CONSOLE ......................................................................................................... 2-33 DISK ................................................................................................................... 2-35 ETH ................................................................................................................. 2-44 EVENT ................................................................................................................. 2-49 EVENTTYPE ....................................................................................................... 2-56 EXERES ............................................................................................................ 2-62 EXTNET .............................................................................................................. 2-66 FOP ................................................................................................................... 2-70 FS ....................................................................................................................... 2-75 HMON ................................................................................................................ 2-79 INTNET .............................................................................................................. 2-85 IP .................................................................................................................... 2-87 LB ................................................................................................................... 2-92 LPAN ................................................................................................................. 2-102 iii
PAN Manager Command Reference
MON .................................................................................................................. 2-113 MONDEF ........................................................................................................... 2-119 NFS ................................................................................................................... 2-122 PAN .................................................................................................................... 2-125 PANMGR ........................................................................................................... 2-144 PIM .................................................................................................................... 2-145 POOL .................................................................................................................. 2-150 PSERVER .......................................................................................................... 2-156 RETH .................................................................................................................. 2-175 ROLE .................................................................................................................. 2-182 SAN .................................................................................................................. 2-184 SMTPSVR ......................................................................................................... 2-192 SNMP ............................................................................................................... 2-194 SNMPMGR ....................................................................................................... 2-198 SW ..................................................................................................................... 2-202 TAPE ................................................................................................................ 2-206 UMON ............................................................................................................... 2-209 USER ................................................................................................................. 2-213 VERSION .......................................................................................................... 2-217
iv
Preface
Welcome to PAN Manager PM5.2_BF. The PAN Manager Command Reference is part of the PAN Manager documentation set. Its purpose is to describe how PAN Manager commands are grouped, and provides the command man pages in a print format. Audience — PAN Manager Command Reference is for PAN Administrators and LPAN Administrators. Topics — Read this book to learn about the following: •
Using PAN Manager Commands
•
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
•
The Man Page Format
PAN Manager Documentation Set — To learn about the other documents available in the PAN Manager documentation set, see Chapter 2, “Document List,” of PAN Manager Feature Summary. PAN Manager Features — To learn about the PAN Manager features available in the current release, see Chapter 3, “Feature List,” of PAN Manager Feature Summary.
v
PAN Manager Command Reference
Customer Support
If you require customer support regarding this product, use the following contact information. Fujitsu Siemens Computers customer support Internet
http://www.fujitsu-siemens.com/support
Telephone
See the Help Desk information at http:// manuals.fujitsu-siemens.com/ primergyservers.html under General Information, Warranty and Support.
Document Conventions
Convention
Description
>
Directory-level delimiter used to navigate the left pane of the PAN Manager GUI. Example: Resources > Ethernet Connections
Sans serif italics
Variable text, such as a path, a filename, or an LPAN name. Example: lpan -c lpanname
Sans serif
Text that must be typed as shown. Example: Type root at the login prompt.
vi
PM5.2_BF
Preface
Convention
Description
Bold
The name of a field or window element appearing in a GUI. It also highlights default values in PAN Manager man pages. Example: In the Users page...
Italics
Text that is emphasized. Example: Do not connect the power.
[text]
Text that is optional to a command.
{text}
A set of choices, one of which is required.
|
Separation of mutually exclusive choices in syntax lines. Example: lpan [-aD | -rD]{switch | SCSI_ID} lpanname
Note
Information of importance or that may not fit in main text.
Caution
Failure to heed a caution could result in loss of data.
!
PM5.2_BF
Warning — Failure to heed a warning could result in physical harm to the user or the hardware.
vii
PAN Manager Command Reference
viii
PM5.2_BF
Chapter 1 PAN Manager Commands Overview
This overview of the PAN Manager Command Reference includes the following topics: •
Using PAN Manager Commands
•
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
•
The Man Page Format
1-1
PAN Manager Command Reference
Using PAN Manager Commands
PAN Manager provides a set of commands that you can use from the Linux command line or from scripts like any other Linux command. These commands are described in detail in the next chapter, and their documentation can also be accessed on-line as described below.
Using the PAN Manager commands in scripts
If you are running shell scripts with PAN Manager commands, you must add the following line at the beginning of the script: #!/bin/bash --login
For more information about how to run scripts using PAN Manager commands, see the PAN Manager Scripting Guide.
Argument placement
For PAN Manager commands that have add, create, edit, or modify options, the argument of those options must be placed at the end of the command string. For example, to add a user and specify the user’s e-mail address, enter the following: user -a -E [email protected] username
Even though the option flag (-a) is at the beginning of the command, the argument (username) must be at the end of the command string. If the argument of one of these options is not the last string, a parsing error may occur, losing the user’s original intent.
Accessing PAN Manager man pages
1-2
PAN Manager man pages are reference pages available for each PAN Manager command. PAN Manager man pages conform to the standard Red Hat Linux man page format.
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
You access PAN Manager man pages from the Linux prompt like any other man page, except that you must preface the command with an “egenera_” prefix. For example, to view the lpan man page, enter the following command at the Linux prompt: # man egenera_lpan
Accessing PAN Manager Help
To display the options and appropriate syntax for each command, enter the following command, substituting the actual command name: # help commandname
Functional Groupings of PAN Manager Commands
The following tables group PAN Manager commands according to commonly performed functions. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for a detailed understanding of how and when these functions are used while managing a PAN.
Getting Started
PAN administrators use the following commands to configure the basic settings for a PAN: Task
Commands used
Rename the platform.
BFRAME
Configure the PAN security domain, including an SNMP agent, a mail server, and boot and root images.
SNMP SNMPMGR PAN
Configure power management.
BFRAME PIM
PM5.2_BF
1-3
PAN Manager Command Reference
Configuring Connectivity
PAN administrators use the following commands to set up their PAN’s network communication: Task
Commands used
Configure the cBlade Ethernet configurations.
ETH
Configure the cBlade Redundant Ethernet (rEth) connections.
RETH
Configure external management network properties.
EXTNET
Configure internal management network properties.
INTNET
Create a new resource that mounts a shared disk or a directory on the network so that services can access storage outside the LPAN.
NFS
Configure the cBlade Virtual Switches (vSwitches).
SW
Configure external disk or tape devices.
DISK SAN TAPE
Establishing Access Control
1-4
PAN administrators use the following commands to set up user accounts for everyone who will work directly in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create Linux accounts.
ACCOUNT -a
Create Linux account passwords.
ACCOUNT -m-p
Assign administrative roles to PAN Manager users.
USER -aR
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
Creating LPANS
Creating pServers
PAN or LPAN administrators use the following commands to create LPANs and add resources to them in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create a new LPAN.
LPAN -c
Allocate pBlades to an LPAN.
LPAN -aB
Allocate disks to an LPAN.
LPAN -aD
Allocate vSwitches to an LPAN.
LPAN -aD
Assign administrative roles to users of the LPAN.
USER -aR
Create a pServer pool.
POOL
Once LPAN administrators have created LPANs, they use the following commands to create pServers within LPANs in their PAN: Task
Commands used
Create a new pServer.
PSERVER -c
Assign a primary pBlade to a pServer.
PSERVER -P bladename
PM5.2_BF
Assign a pBlade processing pool to a pServer.
PSERVER -B “none” bladepoolname
Assign a failover pBlade or pBlade pool to a pServer.
PSERVER -F
Assign a disk to a pServer. (To partition a disk and add a root file system, use the DISK command.)
PSERVER -a
Assign the vSwitch(es) to a pServer.
PSERVER -a
Boot a pServer.
PSERVER -b
1-5
PAN Manager Command Reference
Configuring Application Control
LPAN administrators use the following commands to create the configurations necessary to run applications under the control of PAN Manager: Task
Commands used
Create an IP resource for an application.
IP
Define a file system resource.
FS
Create a health monitor for application(s).
HMON
Create a failover policy for application(s).
FOP
Configure an application to run under PAN Manager control.
APP
Configure a load-balancing service.
LB
Create or modify an executable resource that let users start, stop, or run a program or script (Linux init scripts, for example) on a pServer.
EXERES
Create a new resource that mounts a shared disk or a directory on the network so that services can access storage outside the LPAN
NFS
For specific information on using the hmon command, see PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Monitoring the PAN
1-6
PAN or LPAN administrators use the following commands to display the status of or alter the various hardware and software monitors in their PAN or LPAN: Task
Commands used
List events that have been registered by the PAN Manager software.
EVENT
List the event types that the PAN Manager software monitors or modify a specific event type actions.
EVENTTYPE
PM5.2_BF
PAN Manager Commands Overview
PM5.2_BF
Task
Commands used
List and modify the default trigger values for each monitor the PAN Manager software monitors.
MONDEF
List and modify the default trigger values for each system monitor of the PAN.
MON
List, modify, or create user-defined monitor resources for an LPAN. User-defined monitor resources let a user create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors, and use the monitor’s events to control PAN Manager behavior.
UMON
1-7
PAN Manager Command Reference
The Man Page Format
PAN Manager man pages follow a format commonly seen in Linux man pages. The format for PAN Manager man pages can include the following items: Format
Content
NAME
The command name followed by a brief, functional description.
SYNOPSIS
A listing of syntax showing how to use each command argument.
DESCRIPTION
The details of command functionality and important technical details.
OPTIONS
The descriptions of each command option function.
EXAMPLESa
Specific uses of some or all of a command's arguments.
RETURN VALUES
A description of the command's return value, a useful feature for scripting purposes.
SEE ALSO
A list of related man pages in alphabetical order to aid the reader in seeing other commands related to the task they are performing.
a. Not provided for certain commands or platform
1-8
PM5.2_BF
Chapter 2 PAN Manager Commands
This chapter provides an alphabetical list of the PAN Manager commands, and is formatted to provide users with printed and html versions of the command manpages. PAN Manager Command Syntax For PAN Manager commands that have add, create, edit, or modify options, the argument of the option must be placed at the end of the command string. For example, to add a user and specify the user’s email address, enter: user -a -E [email protected] username
•
Even though the option flag (-a) is at the beginning of the command, the argument (username) comes at the end of the command string. If the argument of one of these options is not the last string, a parsing error may occur, losing the user’s original intent
2-1
PAN Manager Command Reference
ACCOUNT
NAME
account
- creates, lists, or modifies a user’s Linux account on a
cBlade.
SYNOPSIS
account [-l] [username] account -a [-L "descriptive_label" -N groupname]
username account -r [-R] username account -m [-U UID] [-P password] [-N groupname] [-L "descriptive_label"] [-H homedirectory] [-I groupID] [-S defaultshell] username account [-lG] account [-aG |-rG] groupname
DESCRIPTION
The account command provides a Linux account tool for the PAN Manager software. Only PAN administrators use the account command to add, remove, modify, or list user accounts on both Control Blades (cBlades). The software facilitates a PAN administrator’s tasks of creating Linux user accounts by duplicating the Linux account information on both cBlades. By default, PAN Manager software is enabled to allow PAN administrators to create and remove users. PAN administrators can choose to enable a third-party Linux user account management tool using the pan -u command; however, by enabling a third party management of Linux accounts, they cannot use the account command to set up Linux user accounts. For additional information, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. You must create a Linux account for any administrator who will need to access the Control Blade directly, such as for installation or debugging purposes. Be sure to issue these accounts with discretion, as they have security implications.
2-2
PM5.2_BF
ACCOUNT
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: username
Reference to the username PAN Manager uses to identify a PAN Manager user. groupname
Reference to a Linux-recognized group that exists on the cBlades.
OPTIONS
-aG, --addgroup groupname
Specifies a Linux-recognized group to create. If you want to create a Linux user account and add that user to a group at the same time with the -N (groupname) option, you must first create the group using this option with the -aG (addgroup) option. -a, --add username
Specifies a new Linux user account. Use this option with the -L the -N (groupname) option, and requires a unique username. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you add a user to group at the same time you create a Linux user account so you do not create a new GID in the /etc/group file with the same number as the UID created. See the Linux usermod man page for more information.
(description) or
-H, --homedir homedirectory
Specifies the login directory associated with the specified Linux user account. When an account is initially created, a default /home/ username directory is created and assigned as the login directory
PM5.2_BF
2-3
PAN Manager Command Reference
for the user. If you use this option to change the login directory, make sure that the directory already exists before the user can log in. This option is only valid with the -e (edit) option. -I, --groupid groupID
Specifies a group ID number for a Linux user account. -l, --long
Lists the Linux user accounts and displays the description, UID, groupname, GID, home directory, and default shell for each username. This option is only valid with the -l option. Using the command without an argument lists all the Linux user accounts by username only. -L, --description "text"
Adds a description to the information associated with the specified Linux user account. This option is valid with the -a (add) or -m (modify) options. Enter this option’s text within quotes as in the example: account -aN development -L "Development manager" cgable -lG, --listgroup
Lists the current groupnames with their group ID. -m, --modify
Allows you to edit the information associated with the user account. With this option, you must specify any or all of the -U (UID), -N (group/GID), -L (description), or -H (home directory) options. -N, --groupname groupname
Specifies a Linux recognized group to which to add a user. Groups are created with the -G (group) option. This option is used with the -a (add) and -m (modify) options and requires a groupname as an argument. When you create a new Linux account, the default group is that user. For this reason, Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you specify an existing group.
2-4
PM5.2_BF
ACCOUNT -P, --password "text"
Sets a Linux user password for a user account. You can create or modify a user password using this option with the -m (modify) option. -r, --remove username
Removes a Linux user account. For complete removal of a user, add the -R (recursive) option to remove the home directory of the user as well. -R, --recursive
Removes all traces of the Linux account, including the user default directory and the /etc/group and /etc/passwd listings for the specified user. This option is only valid with the -r (remove) option. -rG, --removegroup groupname
Specifies a Linux-recognized group to delete. -S, --shell defaultshell
Specifies the Linux shell associated with the specified Linux user account. When an account is initially created, the default assignment is the bash shell. If you use this option to change a user’s shell, make sure that the shell file already exists before the user logs in. This option is only valid with the -m (modify) option. -U, --uid UID
Specifies a user ID to use with the specified Linux user account. By default, when you add a user account, a UID is automatically generated. Use this option to change the default UID of the Linux user account. This option is only valid with the -m (modify) option.
EXAMPLES
List user accounts by name, description, UID, group name, GID, home directory, and default shell: account -l
PM5.2_BF
2-5
PAN Manager Command Reference
Create Linux user cgable and add him to the development group; also pick up GID, if it exists: account -N development cgable
Edit a user’s home directory for login: account -m -H /home/panmgr cgable
Delete user account cgable and remove the /home/cgable directory: account -r -R cgable
Add the group production: account -aG production
Add user cgable to the production group account -m -N production cgable
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
UMON ROLE PAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-6
PM5.2_BF
APP
APP
NAME
- creates, lists, or modifies an application configured to run under PAN Manager control.
SYNOPSIS
app [-c] [-L description] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [[-a filesystem] [-G nfs] [-I IPresource] [-N executable {-B {"yes"|"no"} |-S {"yes"|"no"}|-E {"yes"|"no"}}] [-o order]] [-V "name=value"] [-F failoverpolicy] [-H healthmon -j IPresource] [-P primary_pservername]
app
lpanname/application app [-k newname] [-F failoverpolicy |-e] [[-I |-i] IPresource] [-H monitorname -j IPresource |-h monitorname] [[-G |-g] nfs] [[-a |-r] filesystem] [[-N |-n] executable] [-o order] [-V "name=value" |-v name] [-p] lpanname/application app [-b | -d | -m [pservername] |-s [-f]] lpanname/
application app [-l] lpanname[/application] app -R executable lpanname/application app --add-monitor monitorname lpanname/application app --remove-monitor monitorname lpanname/application app -M monitorname -U eventname -Q {"failover"| "restart"|"none"} lpanname/application
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The app command configures a stand-alone application to run under PAN Manager control, for high availability. After you create a filesystem, a network resource, a health monitor, a failover policy, a health monitor, an executable resource, an NFS mount point, a failover policy, or a load-balancing service in an LPAN, use the app command to choose the dependencies and policies for an application with the appropriate option.
2-7
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/app_name
This is a reference to a high-availability application running on the primary pServer you create using the app command. To maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN you would like the application to run in. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a '/' between the LPAN name and the application name. For example, the application, Webserver1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as 'production/ Webserver1'. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs. monitorname
Specifies a PAN Manager user-defined monitor. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors.
OPTIONS
--add-monitor monitor_name
Associate a user-defined monitor with the specified application. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors. -a, --add-filesystem lpanname/application
Designates a filesystem resource disk to mount for a high-availability application’s physical resources to access using PAN Manager software.
2-8
PM5.2_BF
APP -A, --autostart {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an application starts when the pServer boots and the PAN agent is available. By default, this is set to “no.” -b, --start lpanname/application
Manually starts all stand-alone application resources. This option is required to start an application after the stand-alone configuration has been created and the LPAN is booted. -B, --exeres-start {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether to start the specified executable resource on the pServer when the application starts. The LPAN administrator can start all resources (for example network resources or SCSI file disk resources) without starting the executable resources to help install or debug an application. -c, --create lpanname/application
Creates the application specified. -d, --delete lpanname/application
Deletes the specified stand-alone application configuration from an LPAN. -e, --reset-failover
Removes the current failover policy from an application. -E, --exeres-execute {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether or not users can run the specified executable resource on the pServer after the application starts and before the application stops. -f, --force
Forces an application to stop. This option can only be used with the -s (stop) option.
PM5.2_BF
2-9
PAN Manager Command Reference -F, --set-failover failoverpolicy
Assigns a failover policy to an application. When specifying a failover policy, use only a failover policy set to use a pServer configured to run this application. -g -- remove-nfs nfs_resource
Removes a network disk resource. -G --add-nfs nfs_resource
Adds a network disk resource and configures it to run under PAN Manager control for high availability. -h, --remove-healthmonitor monitorname
Removes the specified health monitor from an application. -H, --add-healthmonitor monitorname
Assigns a health monitor to an application. -i, --remove-ipresource IPresource
Removes the specified network resource assignment from an application. -I, --add-ipresource IPresource
Assigns a network resource to an application. -j, --assign-hmon-ipresource hmon-associated IPresource
Assigns a network resource to a health monitor. Before assigning a health monitor to an application you must specify the network resource that the health monitor uses. The network resource must already be assigned to the application. -k,--rename new_name
Renames the specified application.
2-10
PM5.2_BF
APP -l, --long
Lists information about each stand-alone application within an LPAN such as status, configuration, and the IP, failover policy, and all resources used by each application. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified application. -m, --move pservername
Moves an application to the specified pServer. If the option is used without the pservername argument it moves the application to the pServer set in the current failover policy. To use this option without an argument, create a failover policy with the fop command using a pServer configured to run this application. -M, --monitor monitor_name
Specifies an existing user-defined monitor that has already been added to the application configuration. LPAN administrators add user-defined monitors to the application configuration with the --add-monitor option. Use this option with the -U (event), and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure a user-defined monitor event and specify actions for a specific user-defined monitor for this application. -n --remove-exeres executable_resource
Removes the specified executable resource. -N --add-exeres executable_resource
Assigns a specified executable resource to the application. -o, --order resource_order
Specifies an order in which you want this application to use specified resources, if you need to specify the order in which resources start. Use this option with the -S, -N, -G, and -I options.
PM5.2_BF
2-11
PAN Manager Command Reference -p, --remove-primaryserver primarypservername
Disassociates the specified pServer from an application. -P, --primaryserver primarypservername
Assigns a pServer within a specified LPAN to run the specified application. -Q, --set-event-action {"failover"|"restart"|"none"}
Specifies an action to take if a a user-defined monitor triggers an event. -r, --remove-filesystem filesystem
Removes a filesystem resource for a specified stand-alone application. -R, --run-exeres executable_resource
Run an executable resource that can be invoked by an administrator at any time after an application has started and before it has stopped. --remove-monitor monitor_name
Remove the specified user-defined monitor association from an application. -s, --stop lpanname/application
Manually stops the specified stand-alone application. Use this option to shut down a stand-alone application or to stop resources, instead of halting the application from within its pServer. -S, --exeres-stop {"yes"|"no"}
Determines whether or not to stop the specified executable resource on the pServer when the application stops. -U, --event event_name
Configures a user-defined monitor event. LPAN administrators use this option in conjunction with the -M (monitor) and -Q
2-12
PM5.2_BF
APP (set-event-action)
options to configure an action for the
specified event. -v, --remove-variable variablename
Removes the environment variable. -V, --add-variable {"name=value"}
Creates an environment variable name and value (such as VMWARE_CONFIG and /vmware_mnt/linux/linux.cfg). This makes the application associated with this environment variable available for all executable resources and user-defined monitors executed on the pServer.
EXAMPLES
The following example configures an instance of Apache to run under PAN Manager control with the following settings: LPAN name:
development
Application name: Apache1 Primary pServer: Web1 Use the following resources already configured: Filesystem:
Apache_fs
Failover policy: IP resource:
Apache_failover
Apache_IP
Health monitor:
Apache_health
Executable resource:
Apache_exe
app -c -a Apache_fs -P Web1 -F Apache_failover -j -H Apache_health -I Apache_IP -N Apache_exe development/ Apache1
PM5.2_BF
2-13
PAN Manager Command Reference
Start the Apache1 application: app -b development/Apache1
Move this application from its current pServer to one listed in the Apache_failover policy: app -m development/Apache1
Stop this application: app -s development/Apache1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EXERES FOP FS HMON INTNET IP LPAN NFS PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-14
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME
BFRAME
NAME
- lists hardware and configuration information about a specified platform and modifies its power settings.
SYNOPSIS
bframe [platformname]
bframe
bframe [-g | -I BFID] bframe [-l] [platformname] bframe -n newname [oldname] bframe [-s |-x] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [platformname] bframe [-W {16|20|24|30}] [platformname] bframe [-U {200|208|210|216|220|230|240}][-P {"separate"|"AC-BD"}] [platformname]
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to directly specify voltage drop targets to guide PAN Manager in failing over a PIM-R power line using the PAN Manager bframe command is deprecated in Release 5.1. This command will be removed from future releases. The following command option should be removed from any scripts: bframe [-p "high"|"medium"|"low"]
For Release 5.1 and higher, PIM-R power line failover is automatically calculated to be 85% of the configured voltage. For systems with PIM-Rs, the default value is 200 volts; for this configuration, PAN Manager initiates a failover to the second power line if the primary line voltage drops to 170 volts or lower (85% of 200).
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The bframe command lists the status of a specified platform within the PAN security domain. Administrators use the bframe command to do the following:
2-15
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Configure PAN Manager support for power management.
•
Shut down or reboot a specified platform. Note: Shutting down a platform shuts down all the servers running on it, and then the two cBlades. Rebooting a platform brings back the last configuration before it was shut down.
•
Display the status, power configuration, processor configurations, blade, and current usage details of a platform.
All users can use the bframe command without arguments to display the overall status, power configuration, processor configurations, blade, and current usage details of the platform you are using. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname
Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you rename a new platform to something specific to your application. This name is used in arguments when you issue the eth, pserver, pool, reth, role, and blade commands. platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
2-16
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME
OPTIONS
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
-f, --force
Forces a bframe operation without a prompt. You can use -f with the -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) options -g, --suggest-frame-id
Requests PAN Manager to suggest a unique platform ID (BFID) for the current platform by discovering all platforms on the local network and then picking an ID that is not in use. -I, --set-frame-id BFID
Sets a new platform ID (BFID). -l, --long
PAN administrators use this option to list the status, serial numbers, processor configuration, and current usage in LPANs for each of their platform’s physical blades and vBlades. Also displays FRU data such as BMC, BIOS, and CMOS revs. The output displays only populated chassis slots to which the user has access. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional warning message to be displayed before a platform is shut down. PAN administrators can use this option to provide details to PAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. PAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -n, --rename newname oldname
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified platform.
PM5.2_BF
2-17
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --power-domain {"separate"|"AC-BD"}
Specifies whether a platform is configured with four power domains or combined into two power domains (requires Y-cables). Use separate to configure four separate power domains; use AC-BD to combine power domains. (This option does not apply to BladeFrame BF200 systems.) -s, --shutdown platformname
Gracefully shuts down all pServers, LPANs, and hardware in this order (Slave, then Master cBlade). PAN administrators use this option with the -T (time) and -M (message) options to create a conditional shutdown. Note: When you power down a platform with the bframe -s option, the entire platform, including switches, is gracefully powered off. To power back on, you must flip the breaker switches on domains A and B. If you insert a cBlade and attempt to boot it without first cycling these switches, it will fail to boot with a “switches broken or missing” kernel panic message. -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before the blades of a platform begin to shut down. PAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -U, --power-input {200|208|210|216|220|230|240}
Specifies the power input voltage to the platform. By default the power input is configured for 200 Volts. PIM-R power line failover is automatically calculated to be 85% of the configured voltage. For systems with PIM-Rs, the default value is 200 volts; for this configuration, PAN Manager initiates a failover to the second power line if the primary line voltage drops to 170 volts or lower (85% of 200). -W, --bladeplane {16| 20 24|30}
Specifies whether the BladePlane is configured as 16, 20, 24, or 30 Amperes. By default the BladeFrame BF400 S2 BladePlane is configured for 20 Amperes.
2-18
PM5.2_BF
BFRAME -x, --reboot platformname
Specifies that a platform reboots. Note: The last configuration of a pServer is rebooted. This means that previously booted LPANs reboot, and if a pServer was running on a failover pBlade, the pServer reboots using either the specified failover pBlade or the first available pBlade in the failover pool when the reboot occurs.
EXAMPLES
View the current state of the pBlades and cBlades on the platform PlatformOne: bframe PlatformOne
View the current state of both cBlades: bframe | grep ^c
For the PlatformOne platform, set the power input voltage to 220 and the BladePlane amperage to 30 from the default settings of 200 and 24, respectively (this also sets the failover voltage target to 187 volts if the system utilizes PIM-Rs): bframe -W 30 -U 220 PlatformOne
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BLADE EVENTTYPE LPAN PAN PIM POOL
PM5.2_BF
2-19
PAN Manager Command Reference PSERVER ROLE SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-20
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
BLADE
NAME
- Lists or controls manual diagnostic tools on a specified cBlade, pBlade, or sBlade (the BladeFrame BF200 does not have an sBlade).
SYNOPSIS
blade {-b |-s |-x}[-w][-l]{platformname/pn[-n]| platformname/sn}
blade
blade {-b |-s |-x}[-w][-f] platformname/cn blade {-b |-s |-x} -S [-w][-f] platformnameES/cn blade --boot-hypervisor [-I image_name] {platformname/ pn} blade [-c][-M RAMvalue{"Gb"|"Mb"}][-P cpu_number][-p {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"}] platformname/pn-n blade -p {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"} platformname/pn[-n] blade --config-hypervisor [-I image_name] {platformname/pn} blade --unconfig-hypervisor {platformname/pn} blade [--notify-slave-hypervisor| --promote-to-master-hypervisor]{platformname/pn} blade -d platformname/pn-n blade [-D | -R] platformname/pn blade -h hostname platformname/cn blade --list-vblades [-l] [platformname/pn[-n]] blade -n {platformname/pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn} blade [--select|--unselect |-i |-o][-l] {platformname/ pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn} blade [-W | -C] platformname/pn
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The blade command lists information about a specified blade and allows you to perform diagnostic operations. Administrators use the blade command to do the following: 2-21
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Power on or off any blade in a platform.
•
Diagnose problems associated with hardware or a system hang traced to a specific blade.
•
Create or delete a vBlade configuration on a pBlade.
•
Recover a hypervisor group from recovery mode.
•
Configure, unconfigure, boot, and shutdown a hypervisor instance running on a pBlade.
•
Modify the cBlade hostname.
Caution: Place a pBlade into or remove it from the maintenance LPAN (.maint). Use of the blade command can make a blade unavailable to its LPAN. If the LPAN has failover actions defined for this blade, those actions could be triggered, affecting applications and other blades running in that LPAN. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends notifying LPAN administrators that a blade in their LPAN is being diagnosed, so they are prepared in the event that a specified blade is shut down, rebooted, or marked unused by PAN Manager software. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
2-22
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
platformname/pn-n
Specifies a vBlade (of a particular pBlade), preceded by the platform on which it is located. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use the format pn-n to specify the vBlade name, where: •
pn is the name of the pBlade (such as p5) that hosts this vBlade.
•
-
•
n is a number (from 1 to 32) that uniquely identifies this vBlade
(hyphen) is a required separator.
on its pBlade.
OPTIONS
-b, --boot
Indicates that you want to power on the specified blade. You do not need to use this option initially. Use this command option to power on and boot a specified blade that you manually shut down or powered off. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the PAN Manager command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete. --boot-hypervisor [-I image_name] platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies that you want to power on the target pBlade and boot a hypervisor (in preparation for running vBlades on that pBlade). PAN Manager follows these rules to determine which hypervisor to boot on the pBlade: •
PM5.2_BF
If you specify a hypervisor ISO image name in this command, PAN Manager boots the hypervisor from that image.
2-23
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
If you omit the image name in this command, PAN Manager tries to obtain the hypervisor ISO image to use from the following: a. The pBlade’s current hypervisor configuration (if any) b. The PAN’s default hypervisor ISO image (if any)
If PAN Manager can’t obtain a hypervisor ISO image, it displays an error message. -c, --create-vblade {platformname/pn-n}
Specifies that you want to create a vBlade on a specified pBlade. The target pBlade slot must be filled in order for this command to be valid. LPAN administrators can use this option with the -M (memory) and -P (CPUs) options to set configurations on this vBlade. -C, --cool platformname/pn
Turns off the power for a failover pBlade that you have designated as warm using the -W (warm) option. --config-hypervisor {platformname/pn}
Specifies that you want the target pBlade to be configured with a hypervisor (in preparation for running vBlades on that pBlade). Including this option without a hypervisor ISO image name tells PAN Manager to use the default hypervisor ISO image PAN administrators set with the PAN Manager command pan --setdefault-hypervisor-image image_name. If no default hypervisor ISO image is currently set, PAN Manager displays an error message. To specify a hypervisor ISO image name instead of using the default, LPAN administrator must combine this blade command option with the -I (image_name) option. -d, --delete-vblade {platformname/pn-n}
Deletes the vBlade on a specified pBlade. Specifies that you want to remove the target vBlade from its pBlade. LPAN administrators can delete a vBlade only when the specified pBlade slot is filled,
2-24
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
the vBlade is not currently assigned to a pServer configuration or used by a running pServer, and the vBlade is not currently assigned to a blade pool. -D, --set-maintenance platformname/pn
Marks the pBlade for a maintenance task. This places the pBlade in the maintenance LPAN (.maint), but does not remove the pBlade from the LPAN and pServer, if any, in which it is already configured. This option assumes the pBlade is currently in an Out of Service state (blade -o). -f, --force
Forces a cBlade operation without a prompt. This option requires a -b (boot), -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) option. Used with the -s or -x option, forces a cBlade shutdown with no attempt to do it gracefully. You cannot combine this option with sBlade, pBlade, or vBlade operations. -h, --hostname platformname/cn
Allows a PAN administrator to change the default cBlade hostname (control-blade-A and control-blade-B) to something more meaningful. -i, --in-service platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to assign In Service status to a specified specified blade. In normal start-up mode, PAN Manager automatically marks a blade as In Service, so there is no need to use this option initially. Use this command when you need to toggle a specified blade status from Out of Service to In Service. Placing a blade In Service powers it on. In many cases this results in the blade automatically booting. -I, --media-image image_name
Specifies the display name of a particular hypervisor ISO image (as registered in the PAN under media images) to override the default hypervisor ISO image. To view a list of the registered hypervisor
PM5.2_BF
2-25
PAN Manager Command Reference
ISO images and their display names, use the PAN Manager command pan -i. -l, --long [platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}]
Lists information about a specified blade or all the blades in a platform. Information includes FRU data such as architecture, and BMC, BIOS, and CMOS revs. --list-vblades platformname/pn-n
Specifies that you want to display information about vBlades only (not pBlades). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -l (long) option to request a long version of the listing, with details about the specified vBlade(s). -M, --memory RAMvalue {"Gb"|"Mb"} platformname/pn-n Specifies how many GB or MB of the pBlade’s RAM to allocate to this vBlade. LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -p (priority), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the memory allocation of this vBlade. If you omit this option, the default value of 512MB is used. For details on valid values for this option, see the list of restrictions in the “About vBlades” chapter in the Using vBlades guide. If PAN Manager encounters a problem with your vBlade memory allocation, it displays an error message. --notify-slave-hypervisor platformname/pn
Specifies that you want to notify the target pBlade hypervisor about a new master hypervisor for the group following the recovery of a hypervisor group. LPAN administrators must perform this command individually for each remaining slave in the hypervisor group. For details on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. -n, --nmi {platformname/pn | platformname/cn | platformname/sn}
Sends a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) to a specified blade for diagnostic purposes. This NMI causes the blade to behave as if it had a panic. By default, a panic causes a pBlade to dump core
2-26
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
memory and reboot. Use the following entry from a terminal on the specified pBlade to change the behavior to reboot-only: #echo "reboot" > /proc/egenera/panic To return the behavior to dump and reboot, use the following entry: #echo "dump" > /proc/egenera/panic You can also include this command in a start-up script. -o, --out-service platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to assign Out of Service status to a specified blade. This option marks the specified blade not to be used, even though it remains listed in its configuration definitions. Use this option when you want a specified blade to be left idle, but you do not want to edit configuration definitions. For example, if you have assigned a pBlade to an LPAN, but the LPAN administrator does not want to use the pBlade, you can shut down the LPAN, mark the pBlade Out of Service, and then reboot the LPAN. To return the specified blade to service, use the -i (in-service) option to mark the blade In Service. -p, --priority {"lowest" | "low" | "normal" | "high" | "highest"} platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies a CPU priority for a vBlade relative to the other vBlades (using the vBlade argument pn-n) or the management domain on that pBlade (using the pBlade argument pn). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -M (memory), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the CPU priority for a vBlade relative to the other vBlades or the management domain on that pBlade. For details on changing the priority setting, see the Using vBlades guide.
PM5.2_BF
2-27
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --cpus cpu_number platformname/pn-n
Specifies how many CPUs to allocate to this vBlade. These are virtual CPUs (which the underlying hypervisor maps to the pBlade’s physical CPUs). LPAN administrators can combine this option with the -c (create-vblade), -p (priority), -P (cpus) options when you create a vBlade. You can also use this option to modify the number of CPUs allocated to this vBlade. For details on valid values for this option, see the Using vBlades guide. --promote-to-master-hypervisor platformname/pn
Specifies that you want to promote the target pBlade hypervisor from slave to master status in its hypervisor group. LPAN administrators must perform this command to recover a hypervisor group from recovery mode.For details on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. -R, --unset-maintenance platformname/pn
Unmarks the pBlade for a maintenance task. The pBlade must not be configured on any pServers in the maintenance LPAN. This removes the pBlade from the maintenance LPAN. -s, --shutdown platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to power off the specified blade. This option immediately shuts down any pServer(s) or hypervisor currently running on the pBlade or vBlade; however, on a cBlade, it initiates a graceful shutdown of a cBlade and all its processing (the equivalent of the Linux shutdown -h command), due to the severe consequences of powering off a cBlade. A graceful shutdown requires that PAN Manager is running on the other cBlade and is communicating with the master cBlade. If you want to force a cBlade shutdown without attempting to do it gracefully, add the -f (force) option. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the PAN Manager command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete.
2-28
PM5.2_BF
BLADE -S, --switch-comp
Specifies the switch component on the BladeFrame BF200 cBlade. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete. --select platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Causes the indicator lights on a specified blade to blink blue. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends using this feature to help locate a specific blade in the chassis. The blinking blue indication persists until reset with the --unselect option. --unconfig-hypervisor {platformname/pn}
Specifies that you no longer want the target pBlade to be configured with a hypervisor. As a result, this pBlade will not boot up into the hypervisor (unless PAN Manager does that automatically in response to pServer boot or failover demands for vBlades defined on the pBlade). A pBlade without a hypervisor can be used to boot a regular pServer, but it doesn’t support vBlades. You can unconfigure a hypervisor on a pBlade only when that pBlade is shut down. --unselect platformname/{pn | sn | cn}
Terminates the blinking blue indication on a “selected” blade. The indicator lights on the blade revert to their normal meaning: steady amber for recognized, steady blue for active. -w, --wait
Causes the blade command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway, and displays a progress indicator. Use this option with the -b (boot/power-on), -s (power-off), or -x (reboot) options when you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed.
PM5.2_BF
2-29
PAN Manager Command Reference -W, --warm platformname/pn
Allows a failover pBlade to boot more rapidly when a failover occurs by designating it in advance as a warm pBlade. A warm pBlade is powered ON, and is bootable only when it becomes a pServer’s current pBlade. -x, --reboot platformname/{pn[-n] | sn | cn}
Indicates that you want to reset and reboot the specified blade. PAN administrators can use this option with the -w (wait) option to cause the command line prompt to not return until this operation is complete
EXAMPLES
List the details for pBlade p7 on platform zeus: blade -l zeus/p7
Power off pBlade p7 on platform zeus (which shuts down the pServer or hypervisor currently running): blade -s zeus/p7
Power off vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus: blade -s zeus/p7-3
Reset and reboot pBlade 3 in the PlatformOne platform: blade -x PlatformOne/p3
Mark pBlade 14 In Service in the PlatformOne platform: blade -i PlatformOne/p14
Set the indicator light to blink blue on cBlade 1 in the production platform: blade --select production/c1
2-30
PM5.2_BF
BLADE
Set the indicator light on cBlade 1 to its normal meaning in the production platform: blade --unselect production/c1
Configure pBlade p7 on platform zeus to use the default hypervisor ISO image: blade --config-hypervisor zeus/p7
Configure pBlade p7 on platform zeus to use the hypervisor ISO image named HV30002005_IA32: blade --config-hypervisor -I HV30002005_IA32 zeus/p7
Unconfigure the hypervisor from pBlade p7 on platform zeus: blade --unconfig-hypervisor zeus/p7
Power on pBlade p7 on platform zeus and boot the hypervisor from the hypervisor ISO image named HV30002005_IA32: blade --boot-hypervisor -I HV30002005_IA32 zeus/p7
Create vBlade 1 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus, allocating the default amount of memory to 512MB and number of CPUs to 1: blade -c zeus/p7-1
Create vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus, and allocate 256 MB of memory and 2 CPUs for it: blade -c -M 256"Mb" -P 2 zeus/p7-2
Modify vBlade 1 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus to allocate 1 GB of memory: blade -M 1"Gb" zeus/p7-1
PM5.2_BF
2-31
PAN Manager Command Reference
Modify vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus to allocate 128 MB of memory and 1 CPU for it: blade -M 128"Mb" -P 1 zeus/p7-2
Delete vBlade 2 on pBlade p7 of platform zeus: blade -d zeus/p7-2
List all of the vBlades in the PAN: blade --list-vblades
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_bframe).
2-32
PM5.2_BF
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
NAME
console
SYNOPSIS
console [lpanname/pServername]
DESCRIPTION
The console command opens a Linux console device on a pServer. Entering the console command without an argument displays a list of initialized or booted pServers to choose from; if you enter the console command with a valid pServer argument, the console opens immediately.
- opens a terminal session on a pServer.
The PAN Manager console initiates a terminal session and sends standard input to the pServer console. The pServer console output is displayed as the standard output. A PAN Manager console normally translates the inputs for sigint (Control-C), sigquit (Control-/), and sigtstp (Control-z). To abort a pServer console, press Enter once and type a tilde character (~) followed by a period (.). There is a one second pause after typing the tilde character in which to type the period. (if "." is not typed within one second, the abort sequence is terminated) If both characters in the sequence (~.) is not typed within one second, the sequence is not sent to the pServer (and thus not echoed) and the pServer connection is aborted. Issues to be aware of when using the console command include:
PM5.2_BF
•
Once opened, a pServer console remains opened until it is aborted, even after the pServer is shut down.
•
In the case of certain network communication errors, you may need to re-establish a pServer console. An administrator can open a console on a pServer to watch the pServer's output as it boots if it has been previously booted.
2-33
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Opening a console on an uninitialized or unbooted pServer opens the console late which means you may miss the first few seconds of booting.
OPTIONS
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pServer).
2-34
PM5.2_BF
DISK
DISK
NAME
disk - controls or lists operations on a disk physically connected to
a PAN and recognized by PAN Manager software by means of the sfdisk utility.
SYNOPSIS
disk [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"] disk -z {"yes"|"no"} "(SCSI_ID)" disk -v {"yes"|"no"} [-n][-f] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -c [-n] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -b "(SCSI_ID)" disk -L "text" "(SCSI_ID)" disk -p [part_table_filename] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -R [-P partition] [-r root_image_name [-F fs_type]][-g] "(SCSI_ID)" disk --clear-suspend-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to import devices automatically or manually and the ability to manually add and delete specific devices using the PAN Manager disk command is deprecated in Release 5.1. Use the PAN Manager san command for such operations. The following disk command options should be removed from any scripts. disk [-i |-m] disk [-a |-d] "(SCSI_ID)" disk -s
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.2
The WinPE 2.1 method automatically partitions the disk, therefore the following PAN Manager disk command for partitioning a disk is deprecated in Release 5.2. For information on using WinPE, see the Windows pServer Guide. The following disk command options should be removed from any scripts. disk -W [-S partition-size] [-I ip-address -G gateway -M
PM5.2_BF
2-35
PAN Manager Command Reference
subnet-mask] "(SCSI_ID)"
DESCRIPTION
The disk command allows you to list, modify and control certain operations on a specified disk that is physically connected to the PAN. Administrators use the disk command to do the following: •
Configure disk resources.
•
Partition disks on remote storage devices.
•
Choose root images and filesystem types for disks, and create a root filesystem on disks allocated to an LPAN.
•
Specify a default filesystem type for each pServer disk in an LPAN.
•
Control persistent reservations.
•
Configure Linux GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) functionality when assigning a Linux-based root filesystem.
PAN administrators should use the san and tape commands to scan a Storage Area Network (SAN) for recently added disks and tape devices after the Control Blades of a platform are initially booted. PAN administrators use the disk command to list information about any disk available to a PAN, while LPAN administrators can only list information about disks allocated to their LPAN. Administrators use the disk command without arguments to see all the disks available to their security domain, or the disk -l command to see details about these disks. See the -l (long) option for details. After PAN administrators allocate disk(s) to an LPAN using the command, LPAN administrators configure their disk resources using the disk command. lpan
LPAN administrators use the disk command to partition disks. The disk command uses the Linux sfdisk command to create partitions on remote storage devices. PAN Manager software requires a specific format for the information it uses to create disk 2-36
PM5.2_BF
DISK
partitions. The default partition in /opt/panmgr/etc illustrates the information required. Other examples of partition files are located in the directory /opt/panmgr/examples. For more information about disk partitioning see the OPTIONS or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a PAN Manager SCSI ID of a device for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-A, --all-disks
Displays all PAN and non-PAN discovered disks.
PM5.2_BF
2-37
PAN Manager Command Reference -b, --list-persistent-reservations "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists pServer registrations and persistent reservation information for a specified disk --clear-suspend-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Indicates that you want to clear the specified SAN disk from suspend usage. -c, --clear-disk-reservations "(SCSI_ID)"
Clears any stale SCSI-2 reservations and SCSI-3 persistent reservations (whichever is enabled on the disk). If you move a disk from one pServer configuration to another pServer configuration, stale SCSI reservations can persist and cause undesired application behavior. The clear operation removes all stale registrations and reservations (SCSI-3 and SCSI-2), but does not disable or enable persistent reservations. This command fails if the disk is attached to a booted pServer. Use the -n option to force the command to complete even if the disk is mapped to a pServer and the pServer is booted. -C, --configured-disks
Lists all disks configured in the PAN and provides the ID, disk capacity, type (of SAN), serial number, configured I/O paths and the LPAN where each is configured. -f, --force
Causes the specified option to complete without a prompt from PAN Manager for the user to confirm the action. -F, --file-system-type fs_type
Specifies which filesystem type is associated with a Linux-based root image. You can only use this option in combination with the -R (root-partition) and -r (root-image) options. To see the default filesystem for a root image, use the pan -il command. To create a Windows-based pServer, you must use the -W (make-WinPE) option.
2-38
PM5.2_BF
DISK -g, --install-grub
Specifies that you want PAN Manager to configure Linux GRUB (GRand Unified Bootloader) functionality as it assigns a Linux-based root filesystem to specified disk device or partition on that disk device. You must use this option in combination with the -R (root-partition) option. -G, --gateway gateway_ipaddress
Sets the IP address for a networked, WinPE pServer gateway, if it exists, of the external network to which a PAN is connected. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) option accompanied with the -I (ipaddr) and -M (subnet) options. By default there is no gateway setting. -I, --ipaddr {address}
Sets the IP address for a networked, WinPE pServer. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) option accompanied with the -G (gateway) and -M (subnet-mask) options. If no networking options are provided, WinPE is configured to use DHCP. -l, --long
Adds partition and assignment information to the default information listing: SCSI ID, disk capacity (GB), Type (of SAN), serial number, and LPAN of allocation. This option adds disk partition table in a data format you can use as the basis for a new partition table file. You can edit and copy this data in any text editor. -L, --description {"text"}
Sets the description for the specified disk as it is displayed in the long listing. Note: Copy only the data rows, without the column headings. -M, --subnet-mask netmask_ipaddress
Sets the network mask for a networked, WinPE pServer. You can only use this option in combination with the -W (make-WinPE) PM5.2_BF
2-39
PAN Manager Command Reference
option accompanied with the -I (ipaddr) and -G (gateway) options. By default, there is no gateway setting. -n, --override-pr-restrictions
Forces the command to complete even if the disk is mapped to a pServer and the pServer is booted. Without adding this option to the -c (clear-disk-reservations) or -v (persistentreservations) options, PAN Manager returns an error indicating that the disk is currently in use. -p, --partition-disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a file that PAN Manager software uses to create partitions on the specified disk. Use the default partition table information example at the top of this man page to format a partition table file that meets your exact needs. You can store these files anywhere on a cBlade. Note: Use this option without an argument if you want PAN Manager software to create the default pBlade partition on the specified disk. Currently, there is no method to partition multiple disks using the disk command. -P, --partition-number partition_number
Specifies an optional partition number on a disk device for a root filesystem assignment. By default, partition number one is rooted. You specify a partition number when rooting a disk using this option with the -R (root-partition) option. Caution: A root filesystem of a pServer must be autoenabled on the partition number you specify when rooting a disk. Thus the disk containing the partition with a root filesystem of the pServer must be autoenabled and the partition must be attached using the pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" -A yes lpanname/pservername "(X.0)" command for the pServer to boot. -r, --root-image root_image_display_name
Specifies the root image that an LPAN or PAN administrator used to root a specified disk device. You can see the available list of root images and their default filesystems using the disk -l command. 2-40
PM5.2_BF
DISK
The default filesystem is the first filesystem in the list of filesystems displayed. You must use this option with the -R (root-partition) option. -R, --root-partition "(SCSI_ID)"
Assigns the specified disk with a Linux-based root filesystem. Invoking this option without arguments roots the disk with a default root image and filesystem for a given Linux operating system. To see the default root image and filesystem, use the disk -l command. Other options you can combine with this option include -r (root-image), -P (partition-number), and -g (install-grub). -S, --partition-size size_in_MB
Specifies the size of the WinPE partition, in megabytes. If not specified, the default is 2500MB; sufficient to install W2K3 and various temporary files. -U, --unconfigured-disks
Returns a list of disks that are not configured to an LPAN or to disaster recovery. -v, --persistent-reservations {“yes” | “no”} ["(SCSI_ID)"]
Specifying “yes” with this option means PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on a specified disk. If no “(SCSI_ID)” argument is used, PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on all disks that are not attached to booted pServers in the PAN. PAN and LPAN administrators should only enable SCSI-3 persistent reservations on disks used by applications that support SCSI-3 reservations, and disks used by pServers that have disk subpaths disabled. See PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for specific requirements. When PAN Manager enables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on disks, PAN Manager also disables SCSI-2 reservations on those disks.
PM5.2_BF
2-41
PAN Manager Command Reference
Specifying “no” means PAN Manager disables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on a specified disk. If no “(SCSI_ID)” argument is used, PAN Manager disables SCSI-3 persistent reservations on all disks that are not currently attached to booted pServers in the PAN. This enables SCSI-2 reservations on the disk(s). -W, --make-WinPE "(SCSI_ID)"
Assigns the specified disk with a WinPE-based root filesystem. To create a networked pServer, you must use this option in combination with the three options, -I (ipaddr), -G (gateway), and -M (subnet-mask). If you don’t provide networking options it creates a WinPE pServer configured to use DHCP. Note: If there is no WinPE image, the disk command will return an error. See the pServer integration note, Installing pServer Software for Microsoft Windows Server 2003, for complete installation and configuration details for creating pServers using a Microsoft WinPE image. -z, --dr-disk {"yes"|"no"}
Allocates the specified disk for Disaster Recovery.
EXAMPLES
Clear the SAN disk “(9.0.1.54)” from suspend usage. disk --clear-suspend-disk “(9.0.1.54)”
Partition disk “(9.0.0.32)” according to the file example1.part in the directory /opt/panmgr/examples: disk -p /opt/panmgr/examples/example1.part “(9.0.0.32)”
Display the details of partition and assignment information for disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -l "(9.0.0.32)"
2-42
PM5.2_BF
DISK
Create a root filesystem with the default root image for the PAN security domain on disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -R "(9.0.0.32)"
Create a root filesystem with the RHEL42_32bit_rootimage root image associated with the PAN security domain default filesystem on disk “(9.0.0.32)”: disk -R -r RHEL42_32bit_rootimage "(9.0.0.32)"
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME LPAN PAN PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-43
PAN Manager Command Reference
ETH
NAME
eth - lists or modifies the configuration for a physical Ethernet card
on a cBlade.
SYNOPSIS
eth [-l][ethn@platformname/{cn}] eth -I ip_address -S subnet_mask {-H|-M mac_address}[-G gateway][-V vlan_id] ethn@platformname/{cn} eth -m {"yes"|"no"} [ethn@platformname/cn] eth -R ping_ip_address [-C missed_ping_count_threshold -T missed_ping_time_threshold] ethn@platformname/{cn} eth -c ethn@platformname/{cn}
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The ability to configure uplink and VLAN setting using the PAN Manager eth command was deprecated in Release 5.1 and will be removed in a future release. The following eth command options should be removed from any scripts: eth -U uplink -P portnumber ethn@platformname/cn eth -a {-V VLAN_ID [-N VLAN_name]} ethn@platformname/cn eth -r {-V VLAN_ID|-N VLAN_name} ethn@platformname/cn eth -d ethn@platformname/cn
DESCRIPTION
The eth command allows administrators to do the following: •
Modify configurations of any physical Network Interface Cards (NICs) on a platform’s sBlade or cBlade. After the configuration is created or modified using the eth command, PAN administrators create virtual switches (vSwitches) using the sw command.
•
2-44
Configure the PAN Manager Intelligent Network Failover feature.
PM5.2_BF
ETH
This functionality allows administrators to configure rEths to report Ethernet device failures based on ping results (ping failover detection mode, or just “ping mode”). Default behavior is to detect such failures solely by the link status of the Ethernet device, called “link status mode”). After configuring ping failover detection mode with the eth command, you use the reth command to turn the feature on and off (that is, to select “link status mode” or “ping mode”). PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: ethn@platformname/cn
Specifies a cblade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cblade number. For example eth1 on cblade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name. The PAN Manager NIC naming conventions vary depending upon the type of cblade in your platform: Use the eth -l command to list the details for your particular platform configuration.
OPTIONS
-c, --clear
Clears all ping failure detection mode settings. Allowed only when the Ethernet device’s rEth is set to link failover detection mode.
PM5.2_BF
2-45
PAN Manager Command Reference -C, --count-threshold integer
For ping failover detection mode, determines the number of missed pings that determine a failure. -G, --gateway ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the IP address of the network gateway. -H, --hardware-mac-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies that the Ethernet device will use its hardware MAC address, as opposed to a user-specified MAC address specified with the -M option. -I, --ip-address ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the source (platform) IP address. -l, --long
Lists information for each NIC on your platform’s cblades, including each NIC type and MAC address. Also returns an Ethernet device’s ping detection mode settings when ping detection mode has been configured. -M, --mac-address mac-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies that the Ethernet device will use a user-specified MAC address, rather than its hardware MAC address as specified with the -H option. -R, --remote-ip-address ip-address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the IP address of the remote device (the target of the ping). -S, --subnet-mask mask address
For ping failover detection mode, specifies the value with which to perform a bitwise AND operation on the IP address, to determine the subnetwork address.
2-46
PM5.2_BF
ETH -T, --time-threshold milliseconds
For ping failover detection mode, determines the number of milliseconds (ms) to wait for a ping echo before determining that the target device has failed. The default Ping Threshold value is 5000 ms; the minimum Ping Threshold value is 1000 ms (1 second). A threshold value below 1000 ms is not valid. Note that the cBlade kernel rounds down the time-threshold value. For example, if you specify a value of 1098 ms, PAN Manager rounds the value down to 1090 ms.
EXAMPLES
Clear all the uplink assignments on the NIC named eth3 on cBlade 1 of the production platform: eth -d eth3@production/c1
Set the network stack for eth2 for ping failure detection mode. The source IP address is 192.68.5.32; the subnet mask is 255.255.240.0; the gateway is 192.68.5.100; and the hardware MAC address is used: eth -I 192.68.5.32 -S 255.255.240.0 -G 192.68.5.100 -H eth2@PlatformOne/c2
Set a “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2. The ping target is 192.68.5.204; failure is determined by 5 unanswered pings; a ping is determined to have failed if no response is received after 1500 milliseconds: eth -R 192.68.5.204 -C 5 -T 1500 eth2@PlatformOne/c2
Clear the “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2. For this command to return successfully, you must first disable “ping mode” for any rEth using eth2: eth -c eth2@PlatformOne/c2
PM5.2_BF
2-47
PAN Manager Command Reference
List the “ping mode” failure detection configuration for eth2, along with other information. (“ping mode” settings are included in the output only if they have been configured for this device.) eth -l eth2@PlatformOne/c2
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME IP PSERVER RETH SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_sw).
2-48
PM5.2_BF
EVENT
EVENT
NAME
event - lists the details of an instance of a triggered event in a PAN.
SYNOPSIS
event [-N [print_number]] [[V |-v] severity] [[-E |-I | -i] event_ID_number] [-T |-t timestamp] [-M messagekeyword][-L number][-S {"O"|"I"|"R"}][-p lpanname[/pservername]|-b platformname/{pn |sn |cn |pimn} |-D "(SCSI_ID)"|-n ethn@platformname/{cn] event -U event_ID_number -S {"O"|"I"|"R"}
DESCRIPTION
The event command offers a filter for viewing an event or event listings in a PAN. The event command allows administrators to do the following: •
Display all events for a PAN sequentially by event ID by using the event command without an option or argument. Use the options and arguments to display more specific event information.
•
Filter PAN, blade, LPAN or pServer events listings within their security domain (PAN or LPAN).
•
Modify the status of an event.
See the OPTIONS section or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: PM5.2_BF
2-49
PAN Manager Command Reference
platformname/{pn | sn | cn | pimn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade or redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
lpanname[/pservername]
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as 'production/Web1'. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
2-50
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). PM5.2_BF
EVENT ethn@platformname/{cn}
Specifies a cBlade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example eth1 on cBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name.
OPTIONS
-b, --blade {platformname|platformname/blade_number}
Lists events within a security domain for all blades within the security domain or a specific blade. -D, --disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the events for the specified SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device. -E, --eventid event_ID_number
Specifies a single event listing by its event ID. Use this option if you are interested in the details of a single event and you know the event ID of the event. -i, --id-before event_ID_number
Lists events that occurred before the specified number. You can view all events before the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -I, --id-after event_ID_number
Lists events that occurred after the specified number. You can view all events after the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -L, --last-events number
Filters a list of events, displaying only the last specified number of events, such as the last ten events. You can combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter.
PM5.2_BF
2-51
PAN Manager Command Reference -M, --message-contain keyword(s)
Filters events using only a keyword or keywords that you know are part of the message printed for that type of event. For example, using "PlatformOne/p2" will return all events for this specific pBlade that contain this in the message, while using "core voltage" will return all events of this specific event type. Combining these strings, as in the example, "PlatformOne/p2 core voltage" returns only events on this specific pBlade with this specific event type. -n, --eth ethn@platformname/{cn}
Lists the events for the specified Eth device. -N, --num-events number_of_events_displayed
Pauses the display of events after a set number are printed. This option requires you to press the “Return” or “y” key to display the next set of events. To stop a set number of listings before it is complete, you can press the “q” key. This option displays ten events at a time, by default. This option can take a number argument to set a number of events to display at once; for example the command event –P 7 displays seven events and pauses until you hit the “return” or “y” key. Note: Without this option, every event that matches your criteria is displayed at once. In the case of many events, you may not see the entire list of events you have asked for. -p, --pserver {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Lists events within a LPAN security domain for either all pServers within the security domain or a specific pServer. -S, --status {O|I|R}
Specifies the status of an event or list of events. Use this option to filter a list of events or modify an specific event status by combining this option with the -U (update) option.
2-52
PM5.2_BF
EVENT -t, --time-before mm/dd/yy_hh:mm:ss
Lists events that occurred before a specified date and time. You can view all events before this time or combine this option with other options to create a more specific filter. You must follow the format: "mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss". -T, --time-after mm/dd/yy_hh:mm:ss
Lists events that occurred after a specified date and time. You can view all events after this time or combine this option with other options to create a more specific filter. For example, you must follow the format: "mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss". -U, --update-status event_ID_number
Modifies the status of an event. You must use this option with the -S (status) option. -v, --severity-less-or-equal-to severity_number
Lists events with a severity less than or equal to the specified number (a severity value closer to 6). You can view all events of less severity than the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter. -V, --severity-more-or-equal-to severity_number
Lists events with a severity greater than or equal to the specified number (a severity value closer to six). You can view all events of less severity than the specified number or combine this option with other option(s) to create a more specific filter.
EXAMPLES
View all events after event 2200, ten at a time, for the platform named PlatformOne: event -I 2200 -P PlatformOne
View events 2200 to 2500, 5 at a time, for the platform named PlatformOne: event -I 2199 -i 2501 -P 5 PlatformOne
PM5.2_BF
2-53
PAN Manager Command Reference
View the last 8 events of severity 3 or less (3 to 6), 5 at a time: event -L 8 -v 3 -P 5
View the last events of severity 2 or greater (1 and 2), for a pServer named rivers/nile: event -L 8 -V 2 -v4 rivers/nile
View all events of status “I” with severity 3 or greater (1 to 3), 12 at a time: event -S I -V 3 -P 12
Modify the status of a triggered event, 2545, to resolved ("R"): event -U 2545 -S R
List the events for disk 9.0.2.28: event -D "(9.0.2.28)"
Display a long listing of the events for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne. event -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME EVENTTYPE LPAN MON PAN
2-54
PM5.2_BF
EVENT
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-55
PAN Manager Command Reference
EVENTTYPE
NAME
eventtype
SYNOPSIS
eventtype [-l] [eventtypeID] [-p lpanname [/ pservername]| -b platformname[|pn| sn| cn| pimn] | -S "(SCSI_ID)" | -n ethn@platformname/{cn}]
- lists or modifies event types monitored in a PAN.
eventtype [[-a |-r] emailaddress [-e {"default"|"custom"}] [-q {"yes"|"no"}]{-P |-L} eventtypeID]
DESCRIPTION
The eventtype command lists or modifies actions for a specified event type monitored in a PAN. The eventtype command allows administrators to do the following: •
Use the eventtype command without an option to list or modify event actions only within your security domain by name and event type ID. The -l (list) option lists detailed information about each event type monitored within your security domain.
•
The eventtype command allows a security domain administrator to customize two event actions for a specific event type: •
Sending SNMP traps
•
Sending email notification
Using the eventtype command for an event type that is not within your security domain is not permitted and returns an error. Security domain administrators use the appropriate command to set the default event actions for their security domain (using the pan or lpan commands).
2-56
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/{pn | sn | cn | pimn}
Specifies a platform and a specific blade or redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
lpanname[/pservername]
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN would be referred to as production/Web1. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where: PM5.2_BF
2-57
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
ethn@platformname/{cn}
Specifies a cBlade NIC. PAN Manager naming conventions require that you use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example eth1 on cBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as eth1@production/c2. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform from the default MyBladeFrame name.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-email email_address
Adds the address of a person the security domain administrator wants PAN Manager to send e-mail notification to when a specified event monitor is triggered. Use this option to modify the list of e-mail addresses to include an e-mail address not included in the security domain default list and only for a specific event type. -b, --blade {platformname|platformname/blade_number}
Lists events within a security domain for all blades within the security domain or a specific blade. (The BladeFrame BF200 does not have an sBlade.) -e, --enable-action {"default"|"custom"}
Specifies whether a default security domain event action is activated for the specified event action or whether it has the customized setting activated. Customized settings are only permitted within a security domain and do not override event actions for other security domains.
2-58
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
After making the customized setting, the security domain administrator must use the eventtype -e “custom” command to activate the customized setting. To return the event actions back to the security domain default values, use the eventtype -e “default” command. This switch allows customized settings to be activated and inactivated repeatedly without having to reset the event actions for the event type. Using the eventtype command for an event type that is not within your security domain is not permitted and returns an error. Security domain administrators use the appropriate command to set the default event actions for their security domain (using the pan or lpan commands). See the EXAMPLES section or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -l, --long
Displays a list of specified event types, either for an entire domain or for one or a group of pServers or blades. Use -l option with the -p (pserver) or -b (blade) option to narrow down the list of event types specific to pServers or blades within your security domain. -L, --lpan-domain
Specifies the name of an LPAN security domain. Use this option with the -a (add-email), -r (remove-email), -e (enable-action) or -Q (send-snmptrap) options to specify the security domain of the event type ID the command action takes effect in. -n, --eth ethn@platformname/{cn}
Lists the event types for the specified Eth. -p, --pserver {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Lists the event type settings within a LPAN security domain for either all pServers within the security domain or a specific pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-59
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --pan-domain
Specifies the name of a PAN security domain. Use this option with the -a (add-email), -r (remove-email), -e (enable-action) or -Q (send-snmptrap) options to specify the security domain of the event type ID the command action takes effect in. -q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to send an SNMP trap if a specific event type is triggered. -r, --remove-email email_address
Removes the address of a person the security domain administrator no longer wants to receive e-mail notification. -S, --disk "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the event types for the specified SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device.
EXAMPLES
List all the event types by ID# and name for pBlade 2 on the platform named PlatformOne: eventtype -p PlatformOne/p2
List the actions for a specific event type on pBlade 12 on PlatformOne, Blade PlatformOne/p2 Status Change Event (ID#101763): eventtype -l 101763
An LPAN administrator adds [email protected] to the current list of LPAN e-mail recipients only for status changes on pBlade 12 on PlatformOne (Event typeID#101763): eventtype -a [email protected] -e custom -L 101763
List the event types for disk 9.0.2.28: eventtype -S "(9.0.2.28)"
2-60
PM5.2_BF
EVENTTYPE
Display a long listing of the event types for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne: eventtype -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME EVENT LPAN MON PAN SNMP SNMPMGR
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-61
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXERES
NAME
exeres
SYNOPSIS
exeres [-c] [-C command] [-B argument] [-S argument] [-E argument] [-L description] [-U username [-u {"yes"|"no"}]] lpanname/executable_resource
- creates or modifies an executable resource.
exeres -N newname lpanname/executable_resource exeres [-l] lpanname [/executable_resource] exeres -d lpanname/executable_resource
DESCRIPTION
An executable resource is a set of attributes and arguments that let users start, stop, or run a program or script (Linux init scripts, for example) on a pServer. The exeres command creates or modifies an executable resource and assigns it a name, a description, and a command (with or without start, stop, or execute arguments), and specifies a user which runs the command on the pServer. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: command
Specifies the command to be run by the executable resource.
2-62
PM5.2_BF
EXERES
username
Specifies a user name with an executable resource. You cannot change the username while the executable resource is running. If you don’t use -U to specify a user name, the executable resource will run as the user root and use the pServer software’s default user environment settings, as provided in the PAN agent. (For each executable resource that you configure on the pServer, be sure to override, in its script, any of these variables, as appropriate, to allow the application to run properly.) argument
Specifies an argument to be used by command while the executable resource is running. executable_resource
Specifies the name of the executable resource PAN Manager can associate with an application.
OPTIONS
-B, --start-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used when PAN Manager starts an executable resource. -c, --create
Creates a new executable resource. -C, --command command
Specifies a command to be run by the executable resource. -d, --delete
Deletes an existing executable resource. -E, --exe-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used while the executable resource is running. PM5.2_BF
2-63
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long
Lists information about the current assigned executable resources within an LPAN, including information on the name, description, user, command, arguments, start, stop, execute, and assignments, if available. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the executable resource. -N, --rename newname
Renames the specified executable resource within an LPAN. -S, --stop-arg argument
Specifies an argument to be used when PAN Manager stops an executable resource. -u, --source-user-env {"yes"|"no"}
Sources the user environment when used with the -U (user) option. -U, --user username
Associates a specific username with an executable resource. If you don’t use -U to specify a username, the executable resource will run as the user root and use the pServer software’s default user environment settings, as provided in the PAN agent. (For each executable resource that you configure on the pServer, be sure to override, in its script, any of these variables, as appropriate, to allow the application to run properly.)
EXAMPLES
The following command lists all available information about executable resources configured for the LPAN lpaname. exeres -l lpanname
RETURN VALUE 2-64
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1. PM5.2_BF
EXERES
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP LB
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
PM5.2_BF
2-65
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXTNET
NAME
- lists or modifies the external management network properties.
SYNOPSIS
extnet [-P platformmasteripaddr -1 cblade1ipaddr -2 cblade2ipaddr -M networkmaskipaddr -B broadcastipaddr -G gatewayipaddr [-f]] [platformname]
extnet
extnet [-g multicastipaddr -p multicastport] [platformname] extnet [-r [-f]] [platformname]
DESCRIPTION
The extnet command lists or modifies the properties a platform uses for external network communication. Using the extnet command without an argument lists the current IP address settings. PAN administrators use the extnet command to modify the IP address for the following: •
PAN Manager
•
cBlade 1
•
cBlade 2
•
External gateway
•
Network mask
•
Broadcast settings
Because PAN Manager multicast discovery occurs over the external management network, the extnet command allows the setting of the external multicast group and port.
2-66
PM5.2_BF
EXTNET
The external management floating global IP address is a PAN Manager setting which allows a floating global IP address per PAN Manager. This permits clients (such as Windows VGA desktop consoles) to connect to PAN Manager (GUI or CLI) directly. Any modification of the network portion of the IP address requires the simultaneous modification of the -1 (cblade1), -2 (cblade2), -B (broadcast) and, if applicable, the -G (gateway) options. See the EXAMPLES section for details. Because of the sensitive nature of these IP address settings, PAN Manager displays the proposed new settings with your prompt to continue. If a new setting is invalid, an error appears describing why. Caution: A system administrator initially sets the PAN Manager IP address to a valid IP address for the external network to which the platform is connected. The IP address for the PAN Manager on each cBlade should come from a network administrator and must not conflict with any other host address on the external network.
OPTIONS -1, --cBlade1-ipaddress cblade1ipaddress
Sets the IP address for cBlade 1. The default cBlade 1 IP address is 192.168.200.2. -2, --cBlade2-ipaddress cblade2ipaddress
Sets the IP address for cBlade 2. The default cBlade 2 IP address is 192.168.200.3. -B, --broadcast broadcastipaddress
Sets the network broadcast address for communication with an external network. By default the network broadcast address is 192.168.200.255.
PM5.2_BF
2-67
PAN Manager Command Reference -f, --force
Forces any extnet command execution without prompting. -G, --gateway gatewayipaddress
Sets the IP address for the gateway, if it exists, of the external network to which a platform is connected. By default there is no gateway setting. -M, --network-mask networkmaskipaddress
Sets the network mask for communication with an external network. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.0. -P, --frame-master platformmasteripaddress
Sets the primary IP address for a PAN Manager, which resides on the master cBlade and transfers to the remaining cBlade in the event of failover. Note: This setting requires a valid IP address argument for the network to which the platform is connected. -r, --remove-gateway
Removes the current gateway setting. Removing the external network gateway IP address setting prevents IP traffic from leaving the platform’s external network.
EXAMPLES
List the default extnet settings: extnet
Modify the external network to a simple class A setting and add a gateway setting: extnet -P 10.0.0.1 -1 10.0.0.2 -2 10.0.0.3 -B 10.0.0.255 -G 10.0.0.128
Remove the current gateway setting: extnet -r
2-68
PM5.2_BF
EXTNET
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
INTNET ROLE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_role).
PM5.2_BF
2-69
PAN Manager Command Reference
FOP
NAME
fop
SYNOPSIS
fop [-c] [-a pservername] [-O order] [-F {"yes"|"no"}] [-L description] [-S {"rr"|"ordered"}[-X {"yes"|"no"}]
- creates or modifies a failover policy within an LPAN.
lpanname/failoverpolicy fop -r pservername lpanname/failoverpolicy fop -N newname lpanname/failoverpolicy fop [-l] lpanname[/failoverpolicy] fop -d lpanname/failoverpolicy
DESCRIPTION
The fop command creates or modifies a failover policy within an LPAN to specify where a service moves to in the event of a failure. LPAN administrators use the fop command to set up failover policies for applications to include settings for: •
pServer — The pServer(s) that an application fails over to
•
Selection policy — Specifies whether a failover policy selects an available pServer based on a specified order (ordered) option or selects the first available pServer as the failover pServer (round robin)
•
Failback — Returns an application to its original pServer if it becomes available again
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed.
2-70
PM5.2_BF
FOP
Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/failoverpolicy
Specifies a failover policy you create using the fop command for high-availability applications. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you are required to specify the LPAN in which you run the application and the pServer(s) to which you want the application to fail over. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the failover policy name. For example, the failover policy for the Apache application on the pServer, Web1, in the production LPAN could be referred to as either production/Apachefailover or production/ ApacheWeb1_failover. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-pserver lpanname/pservername
Assigns a specified pServer to the list of pServers for a given failover policy. -c, --create lpanname/failoverpolicy
Creates a new failover policy within an LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/failoverpolicy
Removes a specified failover policy from an LPAN. -F, --failback {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the failover policy should automatically return application processing back to the primary pServer if it becomes available again. This is set as “yes” by default.
PM5.2_BF
2-71
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long lpanname
Lists information about the current failover policy within an LPAN, including the selection policy for pServers, the automatic failback setting and the service assignments. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified failover policy. -N, --rename newname
Renames the specified failover policy. -O, --order order
Specifies the order in which pServers are selected in the event that the service needs to move. This is an optional setting used with the -a (add-pserver) option that is specified according to the selection policy set using the -S (selection-policy) option. You can modify the order of a specified pServer by adding the pServer again with the new order number. -r, --remove-pserver lpanname/pservername
Takes the specified pServer off the list of pServers for a given failover policy. -S, --selection-policy {"rr"|"ordered"}
Specifies whether a failover policy is carried out by an "ordered" list (default) or round robin ("rr"). The ordered approach selects an available pServer based on the order specified with the -O (order) option, using the first available pServer it found on the list. A round-robin approach uses the next available pServer as the failover pServer. Ordered selection can have multiple pServers running on a single, preferred pServer, while round-robin selection spreads failed pServers over as wide a range of failover blades as possible. -X, --reboot-pserver {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to reboot the pServer whose application has failed. Configure this option when you create or modify a failover policy.
2-72
PM5.2_BF
FOP
EXAMPLES
Create a failover policy named Apache_failover for the LPAN named development. Configure it to contain the Web2 pServer: fop -c -a Web2 development/Apache_failover
Add a second pServer (Web3) to the failover policy named Apache_failover: fop -a Web3 development/Apache_failover
Modify the selection policy from the default (ordered) to Round Robin (rr): fop -S rr development/Apache_failover
Specify the pServer named Web3 as the first failover pServer: fop -a Web3 -O 1 development/Apache_failover
Note: This makes the original Web2 pServer the second failover pServer. You can also condense the last three commands to one command: fop -a Web3 -S ordered -O 1 development/Apache_failover
Add a third pServer (Web4) to this failover policy and modify the selection policy to round-robin: fop -a Web4 -S rr development/Apache_failover
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP DISK FS
PM5.2_BF
2-73
PAN Manager Command Reference HMON LB LPAN PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-74
PM5.2_BF
FS
FS
NAME
fs
SYNOPSIS
fs [-c] [-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-L description] [-M mount_point -P partition_number [-m {"yes"|"no"} -O "mount option" -A {"rw"|"ro"} -S {"yes"|"no"} [-s "scan_option"] -o order]] lpanname/filesystemname
- creates or modifies a SCSI disk resource within an LPAN.
fs -N newname lpanname/filesystemname fs [-a] -M mount_point -P partition_number [-m {"yes"|"no"} -O "mount option" -A {"rw"|"ro"} -S {"yes"|"no"}[-s "scan_option"] -o order] lpanname/
filesystemname fs -r -M mount_point lpanname/filesystemname fs [-l] lpanname[/filesystemname] fs -d lpanname/filesystemname
DESCRIPTION
The fs command creates or modifies a SCSI disk resource within an LPAN that can be assigned to an application. Use the fs command to assign the filesystem resource to an application to implement high availability and then move the application to failover pServers. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
PM5.2_BF
2-75
PAN Manager Command Reference
lpanname/filesystemname
Specifies the filesystem on a specified storage device that an application running under PAN Manager control uses for its file storage and manipulation. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN the application runs. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the filesystem name. For example, the filesystem name for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/ apach_fs. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-a, --add-mountpoint
Adds the specified mount point to the disk. -A, --access-mode {"rw"|"ro"}
Designates whether an LPAN’s access to the specified mount point is read-write or read-only.
2-76
PM5.2_BF
FS -c, --create lpanname/filesystemname
Creates the resource. -d, --delete lpanname/filesystemname
Deletes the resource. -D, --device "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a SCSI ID within single-quotes and parentheses (for example, -D “(3.0.2.0)”) to be attached to the pServer. -l, --long
Lists current filesystem resources, partitions, access modes, and mount points within an LPAN. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the disk resource. -m, --create-mountpoint {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to create a new mountpoint on the pServer if it does not exist. -M, --mountpoint directory_name
Specifies a directory on a pServer’s filesystem to use as an application’s filesystem mount point. -N, --rename {new_name}
Renames the specified filesystem resource. -o, --order {integer}
Specifies an order in which you want the partitions mounted. -O, --mount-option "option"
Specifies a mount command argument for the filesystem.
PM5.2_BF
2-77
PAN Manager Command Reference -P, --partition partition_number
Specifies the partition number to mount. This option requires an integer greater than zero and less than sixteen as an argument. -r, --remove-mountpoint
Specifies the mount point to remove. -s, --scan-option "scan_option"
Specifies a scan command argument for the filesystem. -S, --scan-partition {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether or not to scan the partition before mounting.
EXAMPLES
Create a filesystem logical resource named ftpfs from the mount point called /usr/local/ncftp in the LPAN named lpan_01: fs -c -D "(9.0.1.32)" -M /usr/local/ncftp -P 2 -m yes -O "-o async" -A rw lpan_01/ftpfs
RETURN VALUE
Success returns a zero. An error returns a 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP LB
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
2-78
PM5.2_BF
HMON
HMON
NAME
hmon
SYNOPSIS
hmon [-c] [-L description] [-M monitor_script] [[-S pservername |-s][-I |-D time {"S"|"M"|"H"}][-F |-G |-R number_of_times]] lpanname/monitorname
- creates, lists, or modifies a health monitor within an LPAN.
hmon [-d| -N newname] lpanname/monitorname hmon [-l] lpanname [/monitorname] hmon [-a] -S pservername | -s [-I |-D time {"S"|"M"|"H"}] [-F | -G | -R number_of_times] lpanname/monitorname hmon -r -S pservername | -s lpanname/monitorname hmon -E {"all"|"any"} {-f |-g |-x} lpanname/monitorname
DESCRIPTION
The hmon command creates, lists, or modifies an application health monitor within an LPAN. A health monitor detects a high-availability software failure by running a specific MON monitor script configured with the hmon command and assigned to any application using the app command. For more information about MON configuration, go to http://www.kernel.org/ software/mon. LPAN administrators must set up MON servers and failover policy resources before they can run load-balanced services or stand-alone applications configured for failover. Use the hmon command to configure the following settings for an application health monitor:
PM5.2_BF
•
MON monitor script — The script that the MON server runs to test the health of an application.
•
Interval — The time period (in seconds, minutes or hours) the MON Server script is invoked. Use only integers.
•
pServer — The pServer on which the MON server runs.
•
Escalation policy — The escalation of the PAN Manager's response when an application's health monitor detects failure. 2-79
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Thresholds — Specifies an action to take once a user-defined set of circumstances is reached.
•
Startup delay — Specifies the amount of time to wait before starting an application or service.
Configuring a Health Monitor's Policy LPAN administrators can vary PAN Manager’s response to an application failure by setting the following thresholds: •
Restart — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to restart the application.
•
Failover — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to restart the application on a failover pBlade (if configured), as determined by its failover policy.
•
Give up — Specifies how many failures the PAN Manager receives before it attempts to shut down the application.
Each time the health monitor escalates to the next level and the failure counter is reset:
2-80
•
After three consecutive failure notifications, the system attempts to restart the application on its present pServer. If the application is successfully restarted, the failure counter is reset.
•
If the application restarts but is still unresponsive, the system allows four consecutive failure notifications before attempting to failover the application to a designated failover pServer. If the failover is successful, the failure counter is reset.
•
If the application fails over but is still unresponsive, the system allows five consecutive failure notifications before giving up.
PM5.2_BF
HMON
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/monitorname
Specifies the health monitor configuration for an application running under PAN Manager control. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN in which the application runs. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the health monitor name. For example, the health monitor for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/apache_hmon. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-a, --add-server
Used with the -S option, adds the specified pServer to the LPAN health monitor. -c, --create lpanname/health_monitor
Creates a new health monitor service within an LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/health_monitor
Removes a health monitor service from an LPAN. -D, --startup-delay integer {"S"|"M"|"H"}
Sets the time period (in seconds, minutes or hours) to delay the start of the health monitor. Use this option for applications that take a relatively long time to boot, in order to avoid false failure notifications from the health monitor. You must specify the time period as an integer. PM5.2_BF
2-81
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --escalate {"all"|"any"}
Specifies the escalation policy to be used if the health monitor detects an application failure. Use the -x, -f, or -g option after specifying the escalation option. -f, --failover-policy
Specifies the failover policy to use with any or all events if the health monitor detects an application failure. -F, --failover-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before the application’s failover policy, if configured, is applied. If no failover policy is defined, no action is taken. Set this option to zero if no failover policy is configured. The default value is 5. -g, --giveup-policy
Specifies the action to take (in conjunction with the -E option) with any or all events if the local or remote monitor fails. -G, --giveup-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before the application gives up and no longer responds to the health monitor. Values must be a whole number. Specifying zero as the giveup_after value configures the monitor to ignore the giveup escalation. The default value is five. -I, --interval integer {"S"|"M"|"H"}
Sets the frequency (in seconds, minutes or hours) in which the specified health monitor script runs. You must specify time periods in integers. -l, --long
Lists the current settings for each health monitor within an LPAN, including the service assignments. -L, --description {"text"}
Adds descriptive information about the specified health monitor.
2-82
PM5.2_BF
HMON -M, --mon-script monitor_script_filename
Specifies the name of the monitor script for a specified health monitor. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring each script. -N, --rename {name}
Renames the specified health monitor. -r, --remove-server
Stops running the health monitor on the specified pServer. This option is only valid with the -S (server) option. -R, --restart-after number_of_times
Defines the number of consecutive failures PAN Manager allows before it attempts to restart the application. -s, --local-server
Specifies that the monitor script be run locally on the pServer where the application is running. -S, --server pservername
Specifies the pServer that runs the MON monitor script. -x, --restart-policy
Determines the any or all actions to take to restart the application based on the specified escalation policy.
EXAMPLES
PM5.2_BF
Create a health monitor named Apache_health with the following settings: •
LPAN name: development
•
Monitor name: Apache_health
•
Monitor script: http.monitor
•
interval: 5 (seconds)
2-83
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
pServer: apache_1
hmon -c -S apache_1 -M http.monitor -I 5 S development/ Apache_health
Allow the health monitor named Apache_health 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager attempts to restart Apache on its pServer, 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager attempts to restart Apache according to its failover policy, and 3 failure notifications before PAN Manager shuts down Apache: hmon -R 3 -F 3 -G 3 development/Apache_health
Reset the health monitor named Apache_health interval trigger to 45 minutes: hmon -I 45 M development/Apache_health
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP INTNET IP LB MON MONDEF
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_mon).
2-84
PM5.2_BF
INTNET
INTNET
NAME
- lists or modifies the internal management network properties.
SYNOPSIS
intnet [-N networkipaddr -M networkmaskipaddr -B broadcastipaddr [-f]] [platformname]
DESCRIPTION
The intnet command lists or modifies the properties for the internal management network of a platform. Use the intnet command to modify the following IP addresses for your platform’s internal management network configuration:
intnet
•
Network mask IP address
•
Broadcast IP address
By changing the IP address of the internal management network, the host address for each cBlade and pBlade is calculated according to slot number. Any modification of the internal management network causes a PAN Manager restart which can create temporary outages of the targeted platform. Caution: Before running the intnet command, you must shut down all pServers and hypervisors on a platform to ensure that PAN Agents restart properly. The intnet command does not update the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service daemon (ntpd). If you change the internal IP address of a cBlade you must edit the ntp.conf file to replace the old IP address with the new one.
PM5.2_BF
2-85
PAN Manager Command Reference
Note: If you modify the network mask to limit the number of host addresses on the internal management network, you must leave enough capacity for each cBlade and pBlade to have its own IP address. Using the intnet command without an argument lists the current network, network mask, and broadcast address settings.
OPTIONS
-B, --broadcast broadcastipaddr
Sets the network broadcast address for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network broadcast address is 192.168.255.255. -f, --force
Forces any modification without a prompt. -M, --network-mask networkmaskipaddr
Sets the network mask for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.0. -N, --network networkipaddr
Sets the network IP address for the internal management network of a platform. By default, the network IP address is set to 192.168.255.0.
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EXERES EXTNET
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_exeres). 2-86
PM5.2_BF
IP
IP
NAME
- Creates, lists, or modifies the network resources for an application or load-balancing service.
SYNOPSIS
ip -c [-I ipaddr] [-B broadcastipaddr] [-N netmaskipaddr]] [-E switchname [-M address |-m][R{"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"1Gb"|"2Gb"|"no"}]|-V vethname] [-N netmaskipaddr][-L description] lpanname/IPresource
ip
ip [-K newname][-r ipaddr] [-i] lpanname/IPresource ip [-l] lpanname [/IPresource] ip -d lpanname/IPresource
DESCRIPTION
The ip command creates, lists, or modifies the network resource(s) running under PAN Manager control within an LPAN. LPAN administrators use the ip command to specify related configuration variables for a network resource, including: •
IP address — The IP address for an application configured to use the IP resource.
•
Interface — The pServer’s interface, a vEth or virtual switch (vSwitch), the pServer uses to handle the IP traffic directed to the application.
•
Network mask — The network mask address of the IP resource.
•
Broadcast address — The broadcast address of the IP resource. Multiple broadcast IP addresses are supported.
By default if only an IP address is given when creating the IP resource, the network mask and broadcast address are created. If an IP address and network mask are given, the broadcast address is created. If all three are provided, PAN Manager verifies that the
PM5.2_BF
2-87
PAN Manager Command Reference
combination is valid. If the IP address is modified for the IP resource, PAN Manager notifies you if the network mask or broadcast address need to be modified in order to be valid. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/IPresource
Specifies the block of information an application running under PAN Manager control uses for its IP address resources. In order to maintain high availability within an LPAN, you must specify the LPAN the application runs in. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the IP Resource name. For example, the IP resource for an Apache application running on pServer (Web1) in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/Web1IP. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs.
OPTIONS
-B, --broadcast broadcastipaddr
Assigns a broadcast address to the specified IP resource. If the address is not specified, the server will assign a default broadcast and netmask address. -c, --create lpanname/IPresource
Creates an IP resource within a specified LPAN. -d, --delete lpanname/IPresource
Removes the specified IP resource from a specified LPAN.
2-88
PM5.2_BF
IP -E, --interface switchname
Assigns a vSwitch as an interface to an IP resource. -I, --ip-address ipaddress
Assigns IP addresses to an IP resource within a specified LPAN. -i, --clear-interface ipaddress
Clears the interface configured for the network resource. Acts on either a vSwitch configured with the -E option, or a vEth configured with the -V option. -K, --rename new_name
Renames the specified network resource. -l, --long
List information about the settings for each IP resource of a specified LPAN such as IP address, netmask, broadcast, and interface. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified network resource. -m, --auto-assign
If no MAC address is specified when configuring a vSwitch for an IP resource the server will automatically assign one. -M, --mac-address mac_address
Assigns the specified MAC address if a vSwitch is configured for an IP resource. -N, --netmask netmaskipaddr
Assigns a netmask address to the specified IP resource. Note: If you configure more than one IP resource with the same netmask and any applications using these IP resources go down, other applications with the same netmask may see a short, temporary loss of network connection. PM5.2_BF
2-89
PAN Manager Command Reference -r, --remove-ip ipaddress
Deletes the specified network resource. -R, --rate-limiting {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"1Gb"|"2Gb"|"no"}
Assigns a rate limit of 10Mb, 100Mb,or 1Gb,or 2Gb to the vSwitch, or use “no” to leave it unregulated. Rate limiting is not supported by the Windows operating system or any operating system running as a vBlade guest. -V, --veth vethname
Assigns a vEth as an interface to an IP resource. Use this option to assign an IP resource to a specific pServer vEth. If you use the -E (switchname) option to specify a switch, PAN Manager assigns the lowest numbered vEth available.
EXAMPLES
Create an IP resource named Apache_IP with the following settings: LPAN name: development vSwitch used: apache_switch IP address: 192.168.0.45 ip -c -I 192.168.0.45 -E apache_switch development/ Apache_IP
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP ETH HMON LB
2-90
PM5.2_BF
IP RETH SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_sw).
PM5.2_BF
2-91
PAN Manager Command Reference
LB
NAME
SYNOPSIS
- creates, lists, or modifies a load-balancing service within an LPAN. lb
lb [-d [x]|-b |-s [-z] [-f] |-m [pservername]] lpanname/
servicename lb [-l] [lpanname/servicename] lb [-c] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-L description] [-p primary_pservername] [-F failoverpolicy] [[-I IPresource [-o order]] [-H healthmonitor -j IPresource]] [-T -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port [-X {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}]] [-a membername -u IPresource [-W weight] [-w {"yes"|"no"}]] lpanname/servicename lb [-K newname] [[-I |-i IPResource [-o order]] [-H healthmon -j IPresource |-h healthmon]] [-F failoverpolicy |-e] [-q] lpanname/servicename lb [-T -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port [-X {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}]] [-t -S {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"} -P port] lpanname/
servicename lb [-a membername -u IPresource [-W weight] [-w {"yes"|"no"}] [-r membername] lpanname/servicename lb --add-monitor monitorname lpanname/servicename lb --remove-monitor monitorname lpanname/servicename lb -M monitorname -U eventname -Q {"failover"|"restart"|"none"} lpanname/servicename
DESCRIPTION
2-92
The lb command creates, lists, or modifies the member(s) of a load-balancing service within an LPAN. You create load-balancing services to ensure that multiple application instances can maintain a dynamic response to requests. By running more than one application instance as members, load-balancing services spread client requests across its members to avoid flooding an application with requests. In addition, LPAN administrators can add
PM5.2_BF
LB
application instances (previously configured but not running) to a service in times of heavy utilization before the application reaches an overloaded state. After creating a load-balancing service with the lb command, LPAN administrators add one or more members to it. A load-balancing service and its members are required to run within a single LPAN. Load-balancing services and their members are configured using LPAN resources, such as failover policies, filesystem resources, network resources, executable resources, and health monitors. Use the fop, fs, ip, and hmon commands to create these resources. See the appropriate man page or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. See the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information about configuring autostart for load-balancing services. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/servicename
Specifies a load-balancing service by name. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the service name. For example, the load-balancing service for an Apache application running in the production LPAN could be referred to as production/lbsapache, while a member of the service could be referred to as production/ apache_one.
PM5.2_BF
2-93
PAN Manager Command Reference
monitorname
Specifies a PAN Manager user-defined monitor. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors.
OPTIONS
--add-monitor monitorname
Associate a user-defined monitor with the specified application. LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager umon command to create user-defined monitors. -A, --autostart {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether a load-balancing service starts when its pServer boots. Configure load-balancing services and their members to autostart using the lb –A "yes" command for the service and the lb –A "yes" command for the service members. By default, this is set to "no". -a, --add-member membername
Adds a new member to a load-balancing service and assigns the member a name. -b, --start lpanname/servicename
Starts a specified load-balancing service, if configured. PAN administrators use the lb –b (start) and lb –s (stop) commands to start or stop a load-balancing service. Manually starting a load-balancing service starts all the members currently in the service that are configured to be started. To add a member to a service that is running, you must manually start the member with the lb –b command. Manually stopping a service stops all its members, any member can be manually stopped while a service is running. -c, --create lpanname/servicename
Creates a load-balancing service.
2-94
PM5.2_BF
LB -d, --delete lpanname/servicename
Deletes the specified load-balancing service from the specified LPAN. -e, --resetfailover
Removes the failover policy setting from the specified load-balancing service. -f, --force
Forces a load-balancing service to stop. Use this option with the -s (stop) option. -F, --setfailover failoverpolicy
Sets or modifies a failover policy for the specified service. -h, --remove-healthmonitor
Removes a health monitor from the specified service. -H, --add-healthmonitor health_monitor
Sets or modifies a health monitor for the specified service. -i, --removeipresource IPresource
Removes a service IP resource for the specified service. -I, --add-ipresource IPresource
Sets or modifies an IP resource running under PAN Manager control for a load-balancing service. PAN Manager software relays the service IP resource network traffic to application instances running on members of the load-balancing service according to the scheduling policy set using the -X (scheduling-policy) option. -j, --assign-hmon-ipresource hmon-associated IPresource
Starts the specified load-balancing member and associates it with an IP resource. -K,--rename new_name
Renames the specified load-balancing service. PM5.2_BF
2-95
PAN Manager Command Reference -l,--long
Lists configuration settings for the specified load-balancing service(s). -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information about the specified load-balancing service. -m, --move pservername
Forces a load-balancing service to move its computing resources to the specified pServer. If the option is used without the pservername argument, the load-balancing service moves to the pServer defined in its failover policy. -M, --monitor monitorname
Specifies an existing user-defined monitor that has already been added to the load-balancing service configuration. LPAN administrators add user-defined monitors to the load-balancing service with the --add-monitor option. Use this option with the -U (event), and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure a user-defined monitor event and specify actions for a specific user-defined monitor. -o, --order resource_start_order
Specifies an order in which you want the load-balancing service to start IP resources. -p, --primaryserver primarypservername
Specifies the primary pServer for a load-balancing service. -P, --port port_number
Specifies a port number that a load-balancing service listens on. -q, --remove-primaryserver
Removes the specified primary pServer from the load-balancing service.
2-96
PM5.2_BF
LB -Q, --set-event-action {"failover"|"restart"|"none"}
Specifies the action to take in the event that the load balancing event threshold is triggered. --remove-monitor monitorname
Removes a specified user-defined monitor from the load-balancing service. -r, --remove-member membername
Removes the specified member from a load-balancing service. -s, --stop lpanname/servicename
Stops a specified load-balancing service. PAN administrators use the lb –b (start) and lb –s (stop) commands to start or stop a load-balancing service. Manually starting a load-balancing service starts all the members currently in the service that are configured to be started. To add a member to a service that is running, you must manually start the member with the lb –b command. Manually stopping a service stops all its members, any member can be manually stopped while a service is running. -S, --service-type {"tcp"|"tcp-persist"|"udp"}
Specifies the type of service protocol, either tcp (default), tcp in persist mode (tcp-persist), or udp. -t, --remove-connection
Removes a connection configured for a load-balancing service. -T, --add-connection
Specifies the connection to be configured for the load balancer. The user can specify 0 or more connections. -u, --assign-mem-ipresource member-associated
IPresource
Specifies a load balancing member’s network resource to run under PAN Manager control. The network resource specified with the -j option should only have one IP address configured.
PM5.2_BF
2-97
PAN Manager Command Reference -U, --event {event_name}
Configures a user-defined monitor event. LPAN administrators use this option in conjunction with the -M (monitor) and -Q (set-event-action) options to configure an action for the specified event. -w, --start-with-service {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether or not a member is started when the load balancing service stops or starts. -W, --weight number
Specifies the processing capacity of this application relative to the entire load managed by the load balancer. See the Linux ipvsadm man page for more information on the schedulers. -x, --delete-member
Removes all members from the load balancing service. -X, --scheduling-policy {"rr"|"wrr"|"lc"|"wlc"}
Specifies an algorithm for distributing requests to the load-balancing service member pServers as specified by the Linux ipvsadm command. You must specify one of the following choices: •
rr — round-robin (default) — Distribute jobs equally among available members.
•
wrr — weighted-round robin — Assign relatively more jobs to members with higher weight.
•
lc — least-connection — Assign relatively more jobs to pServers with fewer scheduled jobs.
•
wlc — weighted-least-connected — Assign relatively more jobs to pServers with less scheduled jobs relative to their capacity.
See the Linux ipvsadm man page or the LVS website for more information on the schedulers.
2-98
PM5.2_BF
LB -z, --stop-member
Used with the -s option to stop all members when the load-balancer stops.
EXAMPLES
The following example outlines the steps to configure a load-balancing service for several Apache servers running in the LPAN called market1. The pServers running the service and the members and the failover policy named Apache_failover must already exist. Configure IP resources using two vSwitches, already configured: •
first member: apache1ip
•
second member: apache2ip
•
load-balancing service load: extload1
ip -c -E int_sw1 -I 172.29.15.3 market1/apache1ip ip -c -E int_sw1 -I 172.29.15.4 market1/apache2ip ip -c -E ext_sw -I 172.29.15.5 market1/extload1
Note: Create each IP resource with an alias. Each resource IP address must be valid for the network to which the platform connects. Create a load-balancing service with the following settings:
PM5.2_BF
•
Load-balancing service name: lbsapache
•
pServer: load1
•
port: 80
•
service type: tcp
•
scheduling policy: wrr
•
failover policy: Apache_failover
2-99
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
IP resource: extload1
lb -c -p load1 -P 80 -F Apache_failover -S tcp -X wrr -I extload1 market1/lbsapache
Add two members to this load-balancing service with the following settings: •
application name: app_apache
•
LPAN name: mylpan
•
health monitor: apache_hmon
•
first member name: apache_one
•
second member name: apache_two
•
first member pServer: apache_1
•
second member pServer: apache_2
•
first member IP resource: apache1ip
•
second member IP resource: apache2ip
•
each members' failover policy: Apache_failover
•
weighting criteria: apache_one handles twice the load of apache_two
lb -a app_apache -p apache_1 -F Apache_failover -I apache1ip -W 2 -H apache_hmon lbsapache/mylpan lb -a app_apache -p apache_2 -F Apache_failover -I apache2ip -H apache_hmon lbsapache/mylpan
Note: The filesystem must be configured on unit “(0.0)” of the disk resource of each pServer running each instance of Apache in the LPAN named market1. An initialization script for Apache (applications/Apache/etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd) must also exist on this disk of each application's pServer. Boot the load-balancing service, lbsapache, and start the service members, apache1 and apache2: lb -b market1/lbsapache 2-100
PM5.2_BF
LB
Move this load-balancing service from its current pServer to one listed in the Apache_failover policy: lb -m market1/lbsapache
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FOP FS HMON IP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_ip).
PM5.2_BF
2-101
PAN Manager Command Reference
LPAN
NAME
lpan
SYNOPSIS
lpan -b [-w [-q]] lpanname
- creates, lists, or modifies an LPAN configuration.
lpan -E [-aA |-rA emailaddress] [-V {1-6}] [-Q {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname lpan -H [-l] lpanname lpan -I "template_name" lpanname lpan -s [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname lpan [-x|-X] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname lpan [-aB |-rB] {platformname/pN} lpanname lpan [-aD |-rD] {switchname|"(SCSI_)"} lpanname lpan [-c |-d [-f]] lpanname lpan -G globalpoolname {[-F {"yes"|"no"}][-P {"yes"|"no"}]} lpanname lpan [-l] [lpanname] lpan [-n new_name] [-L "text"] lpanname lpan [--group-hypervisors|--ungroup-hypervisors]
lpanname lpan [-e | -u] DVDROMname lpanname
DESCRIPTION
2-102
The lpan command creates, lists, or modifies an LPAN configuration. LPAN administrators use the lpan command to: •
Create, modify, or remove an LPAN configuration.
•
List all the resources currently allocated to the LPAN(s) under their control.
•
Boot, reboot, or shut down a specific LPAN and its currently active pServers.
•
Configure default actions for LPAN security domain events. PM5.2_BF
LPAN
•
Boot, shut down, reboot, or release resources for all the pServers in an LPAN.
•
Authorize LPAN access for global pools.
An LPAN is a set of logically isolated computing resources that includes processors, network connections and storage allocated to an organization. PAN Manager software provides each organization the ability to exclusively manage its set of resources after the resources are allocated by a PAN administrator. These resources include the following: •
pBlade resources — Specify pBlades available to pServers within the LPAN, or authorize that pServers can access a global pool of pBlades. Note that each global pool must explicitly be given access to LPANs (for example, lpan -F yes -G globalPool2 foo), pServers must be configured with a specific local pool (for example, pServer -B localPool2 foo/ps1), and local pools must be linked with accessible global pools (for example, pool -G globalPool2 foo/localPool2).
•
SCSI disks from a SAN — Assign disk storage from a SAN available to pServers within the LPAN.
•
SCSI tape devices — Assign fiber channel tape devices to pServers within the LPAN.
•
vSwitches — Assign vSwitches that pServers can use to connect to internal and external networks.
•
DVD-ROM — Provide an LPAN with shared access to the DVD-ROM drive located on each cBlade. Use these to install DVD-ROM-based applications on pServers.
After an LPAN has its resources and these assignments, LPAN administrators use the pserver and disk commands to configure the resources in LPANS by creating the pServer(s), attaching each device to a specific name, and assigning a root filesystem to each pServer as necessary. LPAN administrators then use the lpan command to define an activation order for the pServers within their LPAN, boot their LPAN, and specify shutdown options for their LPAN.
PM5.2_BF
2-103
PAN Manager Command Reference
For more information about creating and modifying LPANs, see the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
"(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
2-104
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays).
PM5.2_BF
LPAN
•
54
is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
switchname
Specifies a virtual switch (vSwitch). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to specify the name of any vSwitches you created using the sw command.
OPTIONS
-aA, --add-email emailaddress
Adds a recipient to the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option to activate the setting. You set the severity criteria for e-mail notification for security domain events with the -V (severity) option. -aB, --addblade platformname/pn[-n]
Specifies a pBlade to be used as a processing resource for the pServer(s) of an LPAN. -aD, --adddevice {switchname| "(SCSI_ID)"| DVDROMname}
Specifies an optional device assignment to a specified LPAN for disks, tape devices, or switches. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -b, --boot lpanname
Boots an LPAN after it has been configured. By default, an LPAN boots into a multi-user configuration and applies the configuration to all pServers within the LPAN. If you wish to change the option for an individual pServer, you can reset that pServer’s boot option using the pserver -b command. Booting and rebooting an LPAN boots only the LPAN’s pServers that were booted when it was shut down; therefore, pServers already shut down when an LPAN is shut down and rebooted will remain shut down. The LPAN reboots normally and all LPAN resources function normally. The pServers that do not boot must be started manually using the pserver -b command.
PM5.2_BF
2-105
PAN Manager Command Reference
Note: If an LPAN fails to boot, it is possible that one of the pServers was not able to boot with a configuration that prevented the LPAN boot process. See the pserver man page and the -o (optional) option or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -c, --create lpanname
Creates a new LPAN, within a PAN, named as the LPAN administrator wishes. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -d, --delete lpanname
Removes a specified LPAN configuration. Use the -f (force) option to delete without prompting. All pServers in the LPAN must be shut down before this command succeeds. -e, --enabledevice DVDROMname
Allows a physical DVD-ROM on the cBlades to be accessed by each pServer within the specified LPAN. In order to allow an LPAN’s pServers access, PAN administrators must initially use this option to grant specific LPANs access to a physical DVD-ROM. LPAN administrators can then use this option to either enable all pServers within the LPAN DVD-ROM access or they can use the pserver -e DVDROMname pservername command to grant DVD-ROM access to specific pServers. The access status of physical DVD-ROMs(s) on a pServer are displayed under the Enabled column in the output of the pserver -l command. This command option is not necessary to enable a pServer to access its virtual CD-ROM (VCD). LPAN administrators use the PAN Manager pserver --insert-vcd image_name command option to insert and can immediately access the media image in the VCD via a console on the pServer. -E, --default-event-action
Activates event type actions for all events in the LPAN security domain. Use this option to set criteria and e-mail recipients for sending e-mail notification of events with the -aA (add-email) and -V (severity) options. 2-106
PM5.2_BF
LPAN
Use this option to activate or inactivate the sending of SNMP traps with the -Q (send-snmptrap) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -f, --force
Forces an LPAN operation without prompting. This option requires the -d (delete), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option. -F, --pool {"yes"|"no"}
Authorizes an LPAN to access a global pool of pBlades for failover (see the -G option). PAN administrators must use this option to allow the pServers in an LPAN to access a global pool of failover pBlades created using the pool command. Authorize access with a yes argument, and deauthorize access with a no argument. Use the -P option to give the pServers boot access to the blades in the global pool. -G, --global_pool {globalpoolname}
Specifies the global pool to which the LPAN should have failover or unlimited (boot) access. See the -F option for failover access, or the -P option for unlimited access. --group-hypervisors lpanname
Groups the hypervisors in a specified LPAN. This is required if you plan to perform migration operations on any vBlade pServers in that LPAN. If you don’t plan to perform these operations, grouping hypervisors is not recommended. PAN Manager does not support VBXS Hypervisor v2.0 or earlier in a group. Make sure that your LPAN does not contain any of these older hypervisors. (Support for migration on VBXS Hypervisor v1.1 does not require hypervisor grouping. VBXS Hypervisor v2.0 does not provide support for migration.) Before you can group or ungroup the hypervisors in an LPAN, all of the hypervisors in that LPAN must be shut down. -H, --high-availability
Lists all of the high availability resources in the LPAN and can be combined with the -l (long) option. PM5.2_BF
2-107
PAN Manager Command Reference -I, --extract-template “template_name”
Extracts a set of scripts and binaries that makes VMware GSX Server 3 resources available to the LPAN. You must enclose template_name within quotation marks. -l, --long
This option lists current LPANs within an administrator’s domain and includes a display of each LPAN’s description, pServers booted, and properties, as well as details about the pServers, pBlades, and devices within each LPAN. If you specify an LPAN argument following this option, it lists these details only for that LPAN. Note: Without the -l option, the lpan command lists the following status information for the LPANs within their security domain: pServer, status, agent, pBlade, hostname, up time. -L, --description "text"
Adds a descriptive label to an LPAN, for human reference. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional warning message to be printed before an LPAN is shut down. LPAN administrators can use this option to provide details to LPAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) or -X (reboot) option. -n, --rename new_name
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified LPAN. -P, --unlimited {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an LPAN has unlimited (boot) or restricted (failover only) access to the pBlades in a global pool (see the -G option). Specify unlimited with a yes argument and restricted with a no argument.
2-108
PM5.2_BF
LPAN -q, --quiet
Combined with the -w (wait) option, this option suppresses any information messages and the progress indicator during a boot or shutdown process. Use the -q and -w options only in combination with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -X (reboot) options. -Q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an SNMP trap is sent for any event within the LPAN security domain. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -rA, --remove-email emailaddress
Removes a recipient from the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. -rB, --removeblade platformname/pn
Specifies a pBlade to be removed from the processing resources of an LPAN. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -rD, --removedevice {switchname|"(SCSI_ID)"| DVDROMname}
Specifies a device to be removed from a specified LPAN. PAN administrators use this command in consultation with each LPAN administrator. -s, --shutdown lpanname
Halts the processing of an LPAN, including all of its pServers. The current LPAN configuration is saved for the next LPAN reboot. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M (message), or -w (wait) options to create a conditional shutdown.
PM5.2_BF
2-109
PAN Manager Command Reference -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before an LPAN shuts down. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) or -X (reboot) option. -u, --disabledevice DVDROMname
Removes DVD-ROM access from all the pServers within the specified LPAN. --ungroup-hypervisors lpanname Ungroups the hypervisors in a specified LPAN. This is appropriate if you no longer plan to perform migration operations on any vBlade pServers in that LPAN. -V, --severity severity_number
Sets the severity criteria for e-mail notification for LPAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. By default this value is 2. -w, --wait
Causes the lpan command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway and display a progress indicator. Use this option with either -b (boot) or -s (shutdown) options in cases where you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed. -x, --reboot lpanname
Reboots the specified LPAN. Use the -f (force) option to reboot without prompting. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M (message), or -w (wait) options if you want to create a conditional reboot. -X, --reboot-all
Reboots all pServers in an LPAN, including pServers that are shut down. Use the -f (force) option to reboot without prompting. LPAN administrators combine this option with the -T (time), -M
2-110
PM5.2_BF
LPAN (message),
or -w (wait) options if you want to create a conditional reboot.
EXAMPLES
Remove a disk device from the development LPAN: lpan -rD "(9.0.1.10)" development
Add a descriptive label to the development LPAN: lpan -L "Processing area for project" development
Add a blade to the development LPAN: lpan -aB PlatformOne/p3 development
Disable access to the DVD-ROM on cBlade 2 for all the pServers within the development LPAN: lpan -u "(2.0.2.0)"@PlatformOne/c2 development
Force the removal of the development LPAN without verification prompt: lpan -d -f development
List the pServers and hypervisors configured for the pBlades in an LPAN named doc: lpan doc
Enable the LPAN lpan1 to have failover access to the blades in global pool IA32: lpan -F yes -G IA32 lpan1
Enable the LPAN lpan1 to have boot access to the blades in global pool IA32: lpan -P yes -G IA32 lpan1
PM5.2_BF
2-111
PAN Manager Command Reference
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP BFRAME BLADE DISK EVENTTYPE FOP MON MONDEF PAN POOL PSERVER RETH SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-112
PM5.2_BF
MON
MON
NAME
- lists or modifies the statistical monitors for system processes on pBlades, LPANs, or a platform.
SYNOPSIS
mon [-l] [-B {platformname | platformname/pn} | -P {lpanname |lpanname/pservername}] |-M {monitor-name | monitor_ID} |-S "(SCSI_ID)" |-n ethn@platformname/{sn | cn}]
mon
mon -M {monitor-name | monitor_ID} -T trigger-number {[-H high-value] [-L low-value] [-D duration]}
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager mon command lists or modifies the statistical monitors and their trigger values for processes on each pServer or across an LPAN. There are two sets of processes that you can monitor using PAN Manager software — system resources and hardware resources. Only the following system resource triggers can be modified: •
CPU (utilization, load average)
•
Memory (current: physical and virtual)
•
Disk I/O (bytes read/written, errors)
•
Network (packets, errors)
•
Swap (available space)
•
Paging (available space)
•
Filesystem (available space)
LPAN administrator’s permission is required to use the mon command to optionally configure any monitor trigger for a specified LPAN or pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-113
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn or lpanname/pservername
Specifies a pBlade or a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the name of the platform or LPAN and the pBlade or pServer name. For example, the pServer Web1 in the production LPAN would be referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the bframe command to rename a platform and the lpan command to name LPANs, while LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers. Monitor Names and IDs
Each monitor has a unique name and ID and has settings that include its configurability as well as trigger number(s) and trigger values. To see the exact name and ID for the event monitors for a platform, LPAN, or pServer, use the mon -l command with the appropriate argument. Trigger Numbers and Values
Each monitor has one or more trigger numbers that contain trigger value settings. Trigger numbers specify a set of trigger values specific to each event monitor and can number one or greater. Trigger values are the statistical values that create an event and are specific to the trigger number for an event monitor. Before modifying trigger values from the default values, determine the trigger number and the trigger values for the specific monitor using the mon -l command with the appropriate argument. High and low
2-114
PM5.2_BF
MON
trigger values are dependent upon the resources monitored, while the duration value is used to calculate a timed average and must be greater than 120 seconds. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-B, --bladeframe-name {platformname|platformname/pn}
Specifies the name of a platform or pBlade. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display all the monitors and their settings for a platform or pBlade. -D, --duration number_of_seconds
Specifies a duration, in seconds, used to calculate a timed average for monitoring over which a trigger value is monitored. For example, some triggers work by monitoring a system value and triggering an event the moment the system values exceeds a threshold value; others trigger an event when the system value is averaged over a timed duration and the averaged value exceeds a threshold value. The duration is used in the latter case. This input value must be greater than 120.
PM5.2_BF
2-115
PAN Manager Command Reference -H, --high-value high-value_integer
Specifies an upper-limit threshold trigger over which the event monitor triggers an event. -l, --long
Lists setting information about all or specified event monitors. The display includes a monitor ID, its trigger types and trigger values and the event actions for a specified pServer or LPAN. Not specifying an argument lists this information for all the monitors within the current LPAN for LPAN administrators or within a platform for PAN administrators. -L, --low-value low-value_integer
Specifies a lower-limit threshold trigger under which the event monitor triggers an event. -M, --monitor-name {monitorname|monitor_ID}
Specifies an event monitor by its name or monitor ID. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display the settings for an event monitor by its name or monitor ID. -n, --eth {ethn@platformname/sn | cn}
Lists the monitors for the specified Eth. -P, --lpan-name {lpanname | lpanname/pservername}
Specifies the name of a LPAN or pServer. Use this option with the -l (long) option to display all the monitors and their settings for a particular LPAN or pServer. -S, --san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Lists the monitors for the specified SCSI path device (a SAN disk or tape device). -T, --trigger-number triggernumber
Specifies an exact monitor trigger to be modified. Trigger numbers and their values are displayed for each monitor with the mon -l [-B | -M | -P] command. In general, triggers are numbered 1 or
2-116
PM5.2_BF
MON
greater and some monitors have more than one trigger number. Use this option in combination with the -M (monitor-name) option to modify a specific monitor trigger value followed by the -H (high-value), -L (low-value), or -D (duration) values.
EXAMPLES
List the triggers for the monitors of the entire LPAN named Staging: mon -l -P Staging
List the triggers for the monitors of the pServer named Web1 in the Staging LPAN: mon -l -P Staging/Web1
Modify the monitor named “pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization” so that it triggers events if Swap Utilization exceeds 90% or returns below 60%: mon -M "pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization” -T 1 -H 90 -L 60 -D 300
You can reset this monitor’s triggers by specifying its monitor ID number — 1930 — instead of its name: mon -M 1930 -T 1 -H 90 -L 60 -D 300
With either command you get the following confirmation display with the new trigger values in parentheses: Trigger 1 Criteria: Sent when pServer rivers/nile Swap Utilization exceeds (90)% or then returns below (60)% for (300) seconds
List the monitors for disk 9.0.2.28: mon -S "(9.0.2.28)"
PM5.2_BF
2-117
PAN Manager Command Reference
Display a long listing of the monitors for eth1 on cBlade 1 on platform PlatformOne. mon -l -n eth1@PlatformOne/c1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT EVENTTYPE HMON INTNET LPAN MONDEF PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-118
PM5.2_BF
MONDEF
MONDEF
NAME
- lists or modifies the default trigger values for statistic monitors for the PAN security domain.
SYNOPSIS
mondef [-l] [monitor-name]
mondef
mondef [-H high-threshold] [-L low-threshold] [- D duration] -T trigger-type monitor-name
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager mondef command lists or modifies the default trigger values for statistic monitors for the PAN domain. Default trigger values are inherited from the most current configuration; therefore the default values for LPANs come from the default values of the PAN domain. PAN administrators can list or modify the PAN domain default values using the mondef command. LPAN administrators can list or modify the set of statistical monitor trigger values within their LPAN using the mon command. PAN administrators use the mondef -l command to see a list of the default trigger values for the PAN domain. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
PM5.2_BF
2-119
PAN Manager Command Reference
Monitor Names and Trigger Types
Each monitor and its trigger type refers to either a threshold event trigger or a return event trigger that is used as an argument to the mon command. To see the exact name of each trigger type name for each monitor, use the mon -l lpanname/pserver or mon -l lpanname commands. Trigger Values
The default values list thresholds as percentages of resources used and a duration used to calculate a timed average in seconds.
OPTIONS
-D, --duration number_of_seconds
Sets the default time limit, in seconds, for a monitor trigger. A trigger duration must be at least 120 seconds. -H, --high-threshold high-value_integer
Sets the default upper limit for a monitor trigger. -l, --list
Lists information about all the monitors for the PAN domain. This option provides information such as the type and trigger values of each monitor. -L, low-threshold low-value_integer
Sets the default lower limit for a monitor trigger. -T, --trigger-type triggernumber
Identifies which trigger of the monitor you are modifying.
EXAMPLES
List the trigger default values for the disk space monitors within the PAN domain: mondef -l system threshold.remainingdiskspace
2-120
PM5.2_BF
MONDEF
Modify default trigger values for CPU utilization and disk space monitors within the PAN domain. The high threshold event trigger for CPU utilization is set to 33, while the low threshold event trigger for disk space monitors is set to 10 and the duration for the low event trigger is extended to 300 seconds: mondef -H 33 -T system.threshold.high system.threshold.memoryutiliz mondef -L 10 -D 300 -T system.threshold.low system.threshold.remainingdiskspace
You do not need to reference the former trigger values since the new values overwrite the previous values.
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT HMON INTNET LPAN MON PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-121
PAN Manager Command Reference
NFS
NAME
- creates a network filesystem resource that PAN Manager mounts from a shared NFS server directory to a mount point on a pServer that the pServer’s services can access.
SYNOPSIS
nfs [-c] [-L description] [-A {"rw"|"ro"}] [-H {hostname |ipaddress}] [-F filesystemname] [-M mount_point] [-m "yes"|"no"] [-O "mount_command_options"] lpanname/
nfs
nfsname nfs -N newname lpanname/nfsname nfs [-l] lpanname [/nfsname] nfs -d lpanname/nfsname
DESCRIPTION
The PAN Manager nfs command creates a network filesystem (NFS) resource. LPAN administrators use the nfs command to specify an NFS server hostname or host IP address, a pServer mount point, and a filesystem name of the shared disk or directory. Administrators can specify the access permission (read-write or read-only) and Linux mount command options as well as rename, delete, or create a description for a specified NFS resource. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-122
PM5.2_BF
NFS
lpanname/nfsname
Specifies the name of an NFS resource in an LPAN. NFS Resources are unique to an LPAN. Use the nfs -l command to list the NFS resources within the LPAN.
OPTIONS
-A, --access-mode {"rw"|"ro"}
Specifies whether an NFS resource accesses the specified hostname’s filesystem with read-write (rw) or read-only (ro) privileges. -c, --create
Creates an NFS resource available to all pServers within an LPAN. -d, --delete
Removes an NFS resource from an LPAN. -F, --host-filesystem filesystemname
Specifies a valid hostname filesystem name for the shared disk or directory. -H, --host {hostname|ipaddress}
Specifies the hostname or IP address of an NFS server available on an LPAN administrator’s network. -L, --description "text"
Specifies a description for the NFS resource. -l, --long
Lists current NFS resources within an LPAN. -m, --create-mountpoint {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether to create a new mountpoint on the pServer if it does not exist.
PM5.2_BF
2-123
PAN Manager Command Reference -M, --set-mountpoint mount_point
Specifies a directory path on a pServer’s filesystem PAN Manager will use as the directory mount point for the specified NFS resource. -N, --rename new_name lpanname/nfsname
Renames the specified NFS resource. -O, --mount-option mount_command_options
Specifies additional Linux mount command arguments PAN Manager can use when an LPAN administrator is creating or modifying an NFS resource.
EXAMPLES
The following example creates a mountpoint with read and write access for the /home/mylogin directory on the LPAN LP_mylogin: nfs -c -A "rw" -H 192.23.20.2 -F /home/mylogin -M /mnt/temp -m "yes" LP_mylogin/nfs
List the parameters of the NFS resource of the LPAN LP_mylogin and verify that the mountpoint has been created successfully: nfs -l LP_mylogin
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
APP FS
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_app).
2-124
PM5.2_BF
PAN
PAN
NAME
pan
SYNOPSIS
pan [-l [-i [-R |-I |-J image_name]]][domainname]
- lists and modifies the PAN configuration.
pan [-b |-s [--force] |-x] [domainname] pan [-L description] [-o owner] [-w owner_location] [-W {"yes"|"no"}] [domainname] pan -a {-R -C image_location -F fs_type| -I [-C image_location]} [-T OS_type] [-P description] image_name pan {-R [-F fs_type] |-I}[-N new_image_name -T OS_type -P description] [--update-image image_location [--force]] image_name pan -a -J -C image_location [-T OS_type][-P description]
image_name pan -J [-N new_image_name][-T OS_type][-P description] [--update-image image_location [--force]] image_name pan -f fs_type root_image_name pan -r |-y {-R |-I | -J} image_name pan -z {-R |-I} pan [--set-default-hypervisor-image image_name | --clear-default-hypervisor-image] pan --set-hypervisor-password password pan -E [-aA |-rA emailaddress] [-V {1-6}][-Q {"yes"|"no"}] pan -X {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}[-j] [-M newarchivename][archivename] pan -Y {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}[-M newarchivename] [archivename] pan {-K [-l] |-S [-j]} [archivename] pan -K -H "(SCSI_ID)" pan -v panname pan [-m resourcemapfile [-h] [-t] | -c [--force] |-D [-H "(SCSI_ID)"] |-g [-G name_map] |-M newarchivename]
archivename PM5.2_BF
2-125
PAN Manager Command Reference pan -k [schedulename] pan -q schedulename pan -p schedulename -n "frequency:hour:min" [-H "(SCSI_ID)"] pan --modify-schedule schedulename [--rename-schedule newschedulename] [-n "frequency:hour:min"] [-H "(SCSI_ID)" | --set-default-location] pan --rename-schedule newschedulename schedulename pan [-e |-d | {-l -u}] pan --set-name newpanname pan [--export-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"} | --restore-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}] [--use-san sanEntryName] [--overwrite-images] [--no-boot-images] [--no-root-images] [--no-media-imagse] [--no-firmware-images] pan --erase-dr-disk "(SCSI_ID)" pan --image-archive-status
DESCRIPTION
2-126
The pan command lists the status of the platforms within a PAN security domain and lets a PAN administrator use the pan command to do the following: •
List configuration information for all platforms and Storage Area Network (SAN) resources within the PAN security domain.
•
Boot, reboot, or shut down all the LPANs within the PAN security domain.
•
Configure default actions for PAN security domain events.
•
Add (register), remove, or modify the root image(s) for disks and boot image(s) for pServers within the PAN security domain.
•
Add (register) or modify media images for use by ALL pServers within the PAN security domain.
•
Import. export, and merge a PAN configuration archive.
•
Implement disaster recovery (PAN archiving) plans or facilitate a periodic switching from one configuration to another.
PM5.2_BF
PAN
•
Enable or disable the PAN Manager Linux user account tool.
•
Enable or disable flow control for the PAN domain.
Without any arguments, the pan command lists configuration information for all the platforms within the PAN security domain. For more information on PAN Administrators should refer to the OPTIONS and PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for further details about archiving for disaster recovery. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: archivename
Specifies the name of a PAN archive. panname
Specifies the name of a PAN domain. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies the PAN Manager SCSI ID of a device for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID. 2-127
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
•
1
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays).
•
54
is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-a, --add image_name
Adds a display name for a disk root image, a boot image for pServers, or a media image within the PAN security domain. Creating a new display name does not overwrite other images or display names. This option allows any number of display names for a given image. Boot and root images are copied to both cBlades in the /tftpboot directory, while PAN Manager manages usage of all media images on both cBlades (copying large media files to a particular area which could use up all available cBlade hard disk space. PAN administrators should check these directories for available area to ensure no size restrictions exist before registering the image. PAN administrators must register a media image for use by all pServers before a pServer or hypervisor can access the image via a virtual CD-ROM (VCD). To do so, PAN administrators must mount (from one of the cBlades) or copy the media image (to one of the cBlades) then use the PAN Manager pan -a -J -C image_location imagename command. This command allows you to manage media images that are stored on the cBlades, and helps you avoid using excess cBlade disk space. PAN administrators must register any custom pServer image before multiple pServers can boot from it. PAN administrators should note that registering a media image with PAN Manager makes the image available to all pServers in the PAN, that is, all pServers in all LPANs. For more information on registering custom boot images, see the appropriate pServer Guide for the software release you want to install on the pServer.
2-128
PM5.2_BF
PAN -aA, --add-email emailaddress
Adds a recipient to the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option to activate the setting. You set the severity criteria for e-mail notification for security domain events with the -V (severity) option. -b, --boot
Boots the PAN domain and all LPANs within it. -C, --image-location image_location
Specifies the directory path on the cBlades containing the root, boot, and media images within the PAN security domain. Boot and root images are copied to both cBlades in the /tftpboot directory, while PAN Manager manages usage of all media images on both cBlades (copying large media files to a particular area which could use up all available cBlade hard disk space). -c, --swap archivename
Replaces the current PAN domain configuration with the PAN configuration archive. Swapping an imported PAN configuration archive automatically validates the archive file with the target platform physical resources before attempting the swap, even if you separately perform a validation with the -v (validate) option. A swap cannot occur until it is free of validation errors. --clear-default-hypervisor-image
Specifies that you don’t want any hypervisor ISO image set as the default. -D, --delete-pan-archive
Deletes a specific PAN archive file. -d, --disable-user-account
Disables PAN Manager control of Linux user accounts. This configuration enables third-party tools to manage Linux user accounts, and disables the account command.
PM5.2_BF
2-129
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --default-event-action
Activates event type actions for all events in the PAN security domain. Use this option to set criteria and e-mail recipients for sending e-mail notification of events with the -aA (add-email) and -V (severity) options. Use this option to activate or inactivate the sending of SNMP traps with the -Q (send-snmptrap) option. For more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -e, --enable-user-account
Enables PAN Manager software to create and remove Linux user accounts. This is the default configuration and enables the account command. --erase-dr-disk “(SCSI_ID)"
Removes all the disaster recovery image archives that are on the disaster recovery disk. --export-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Exports a set of images either to a SAN disk or to a designated location on the master cBlade (or network location accessible from the master cBlade). The PAN Administrator can specify a name for the set of exported images and indicates which type(s) of images the set contains: non-custom boot images, root disk images, media images (VCDs), and/or pBlade firmware images. You can export PAN configuration archives to a local disk on a cBlade or to a SAN volume as a means to back up the configuration outside the platform (in conjunction with SAN volume HW mirroring software such as EMC SRDF or MirrorView). PAN archiving can be configured to occur on a periodic schedule, which can ensure that recent backups are available. Archived PAN configurations can be used for different purposes, including the following:
2-130
PM5.2_BF
PAN -F, --file-system-type fs_type(s)
Specifies one or more filesystem type(s) associated with a root image. PAN administrators use this option with the -a (add), -R (root-image), and -C (image_location) options to associate the filesystem type(s) with a newly added root image. They use this option with the -R (root-image) options to modify the association between a root image and a filesystem type. PAN administrators use the -f (set-default-file-system) option to set a default filesystem for a specific root image. PAN Manager supports ext2 and ext3 (Red Hat) filesystem types. -f, --set-default-file-system fstype root_imagename
Specifies the default filesystem type for a root image. PAN administrators can set the default filesystem type for all the root images LPAN administrators use to create their pServers in the PAN security domain. Only PAN administrators have the ability to create, modify, or remove this setting. You can see the default installation setting using the pan -i command. See the disk man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager supports ext2 and ext3 (Red Hat) filesystem types. --force
Forces a PAN operation without a prompt. PAN administrators use this option with the -s (shutdown) option to gracefully shut down all operations in the PAN domain without a prompt. -g, --merge archivename
Replaces data in the specified PAN configuration archive with data from the basic configuration of the target platform for the settings listed in the DESCRIPTION section. You cannot merge the PAN configuration archive until it is imported to the target platform using the -Y (import) option. -H, --sandisk "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a SAN disk target that has a PAN configuration archive file. Use this option in combination with the -D (delete), -K (list-PAN-archive), or -p (add-schedule) options.
PM5.2_BF
2-131
PAN Manager Command Reference -h, --mergereths
Deletes all rEths and vSwitches using those rEths from a PAN configuration archive. Use this option only in combination with the -m (map) option. -I, --boot-image image_name
Specifies a boot image PAN administrators want to add, modify, or remove for pServers within the PAN security domain. Important: This file cannot be updated while the image is currently in use by any pServer. If it is configured by pServers, the --force option is required. -i, --list-images
Displays the registered root disk, boot, and media images for the PAN. By itself, this option displays only the display names for the root disk and boot images; with the -l (long) option, the display name, image location, OS type and description are also printed. This command can be used by PAN administrators, LPAN administrators, LPAN monitors, and LPAN operators. --image-archive-status
Displays the status of any image archive operation in progress. This will reflect if there is an export or restore running, or if none are running, the time that the last one finished. It will also give information about how it finished (successful, failed, etc). If it is still running, information about what part of the process it is in (such as creating the archive, writing the archive to SAN, restoring the media images, etc) will be desplayed. This information is only held in memory, so if there is a restart of the PAN Manager, or failover, the last run job information would be lost. -J, --media-image image_name
Specifies a media image that PAN administrators register with PAN Manager for all pServers within the PAN to use. After you mount (from one of the cBlades) or copy the media image (to one of
2-132
PM5.2_BF
PAN
the cBlades), PAN administrators use this option with the -a and -P (description) options to register the image with PAN Manager. (add), -C (image_location),
This command option allows you to manage media images that are stored on the cBlades, and helps you avoid using excess cBlade disk space. For more information about disk space on cBlades, contact Fujitsu Siemens Computers customer support or your authorized support vendor. PAN administrators should note that registering a media image with PAN Manager makes the image available to all pServers in the PAN, that is, all pServers in all LPANs. Important: A file cannot be updated if the image is currently inserted into the virtual CD (VCD) of a pServer that is not shutdown (booting, booted, suspended, shutting down, etc.). If the media file is inserted into the VCD of a pServer that is shutdown, you can modify the image using the --force option. -j, --include-logs
Specifies that the following log files under /opt/panmgr/logs are included when you save a PAN archive: •
console.log
•
tomcat.log
•
egenera_cli.log
•
tftp.log
Depending on the size of these log files, this action can add a significant amount of time to any subsequent archiving process for this particular PAN Archive file. -K, --list-PANarchives
Displays the names or the names and settings (using the -l (long) option) of the PAN configurations that have been saved to a PAN configuration archive on the cBlade of the current platform. Use this option in combination with the -H "(SCSI_ID)" option to
PM5.2_BF
2-133
PAN Manager Command Reference
specify a SAN disk containing one or more PAN configuration archive. A PAN configuration archive does NOT include the following settings or files, which you may need to recreate on the target platform for a disaster recovery plan: •
Linux user accounts and any files there
•
cron
files
-k, --list-schedule schedulename
Displays the settings for the specified archive schedule. -L, --label "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration for administrator reference. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -l, --long
Displays more detailed information about the current platforms within a PAN than using the pan command without an argument. -M, --rename-PANarchive “newarchivename” archivename
Allows a PAN administrator to rename the specified PAN configuration archive. -m, --map resource-map-file archivename
Replaces settings in a PAN configuration archive with settings in a resource map file, specified using the full file pathname. This map must exist on a local, master cBlade, and must conform to the format specified in the Resource Mapping section in the DESCRIPTION section of the pan command. --modify-schedule schedulename
Modifies a specific schedule configured in the PAN. Use this option with the --rename-schedule newschedulename or -n "frequency:hour:min" or --sandisk "(SCSI_ID)" options.
2-134
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Remember, descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -N, --image-name new_image_display_name
Renames the specified root, boot, or media image for the PAN security domain. -n, --schedule-time "frequency:hour:min"
Specifies an archiving schedule frequency and 24 hour time of day. Use this option combined with the -p (add-schedule) option to add the necessary details for the archive schedule. Specify a daily or weekly frequency using either the string "daily" or the day of the week the weekly archiving should be done. For example, the string "daily:14:30" specifies an archiving each day at 14:30, while the string "Tuesday:14:30" specifies an archiving each week on Tuesday at 14:30. You must spell the day of week correctly, in either uppercase or lowercase. --no-boot-images
Specifies not to include the boot-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-firmware-images
Specifies not to include the firmware-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-media-images
Specifies not to include the media-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. --no-root-images
Specifies not to include the root-image to be archived. Used only with the --export-images or --restore-images options. -o, --owner "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration naming of the person who determines the operating configuration
PM5.2_BF
2-135
PAN Manager Command Reference
of the PAN security domain. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. --overwrite-images
Specifies to overwrite any duplicate image already in archive. The overwrite operation should only be done at time that there is very little frame activity, so you do not end up writing over and removing files that are in use. Used with the --export-images or the --restore-images options. -P, --image-description "text"
Adds descriptive text to a root or boot image used in the PAN security domain configuration. Use this option with the -a (add) or the -R (root-image) or -B (boot-image) options. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -p, --add-schedule schedulename -n "frequency:hour:min"
Schedules the current PAN configuration to be saved as a PAN configuration archive file on the master cBlade (Default) or to a disk specified with the -H (sandisk). The name of the scheduled archive is automatically derived from the current PAN configuration. You can modify a current schedule by specifying the schedule and resetting the -n (schedule-time) option. You can rename the archive file later using the -M (rename-PANarchive) option. -Q, --send-snmptrap {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an SNMP trap is sent for any event within the PAN security domain. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP. -q, --remove-schedule schedulename
Removes a specific schedule configured in the PAN.
2-136
PM5.2_BF
PAN -R, --root-image root_image_display_name
Specifies a root image that PAN administrators want to add, modify, or remove from disks within the PAN security domain. Important: A file cannot be updated if it is currently being used to root a disk. Concurrent attempts to root a disk while you attempt to modify the image file will fail until the current rooting or modification is complete. PAN Manager returns an error message until the first operation is complete. -r, --remove image_display_name
Removes a root or boot image from pServers within the PAN security domain. Removing an image currently listed as a default root disk or boot image leaves the PAN security domain without a default root disk or boot image. -rA, --remove-email emailaddress
Removes a recipient from the list of addresses sent e-mail notification of PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. --rename-schedule "newschedulename" schedulename
Renames a specific schedule configured in the PAN. --restore-images {file | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Restores a set of archived images from either a SAN disk or a designated location on the master cBlade (or network location accessible from the master cBlade). This command can only be
executed by the PAN Administrator. -S, --save archivename
Saves the current PAN configuration into an archive file with the same name. You can later rename the archive file with the -M (rename-PANarchive) option. Saving a PAN configuration archive places the file on the current cBlade you are logged into or on the master cBlade if you are logged into PAN Manager.
PM5.2_BF
2-137
PAN Manager Command Reference -s, --shutdown
Shuts down the PAN domain and all LPANs within it. This command halts the processing for all the pBlades within the PAN domain. Caution: PAN administrators shut down all current LPANs within the PAN domain with this command and should warn LPAN administrators well in advance of using this command. --set-default-hypervisor-image image_name
Specifies the display name of a particular hypervisor ISO image (as registered in the PAN) to set as the default. To view a list of the registered hypervisor ISO images and their display names, use the PAN Manager command pan -i. --set-default-location
Set the default location of a specific archive file schedule configured in the PAN. --set-hypervisor-password password
Specifies that you want to change the current hypervisor root password. PAN Manager applies your password change to all hypervisors in the PAN, whether or not they are currently running. You need the hypervisor root password when logging on to a hypervisor console. The default password is egenera, but it is recommended that you change this to ensure security. --set-name newpanname
Specifies a new name for the PAN. If the chosen name is in use by other PANs on the same LAN subnet, PAN Manager generates a warning. -T, --os-type "text"
Adds descriptive text about the operating system a root or boot image is associated with in the PAN security domain configuration. Use this option with the -a (add) or the -R (root-image) or -B (boot-image) option. Descriptive text containing spaces must use 2-138
PM5.2_BF
PAN
quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. This option must be used to register WinPE images. -t, --map-disk-by-UID
Used with the -m option, maps disks according to their unique IDs. -u, --user-account
Toggles whether PAN Manager software is enabled to create Linux accounts (true) or if it is disabled so PAN administrators must rely on third party Linux account management tools (false). A false setting means that the PAN Manager account command is disabled. This option requires the -l (long) option. --use-san sanEntryname
Specifies that you want to the image archive to go to a SAN disk. The sanEntryname is the name of the image archive entry on the SAN disk. Used with the --export-images or the --restore-images options. --update-image image_location image_name
Specifies that you want to modify a root, boot, or media image registered with PAN Manager. PAN administrators can modify these images as long as the image is not in use by a pServer. Combine this option with the:
PM5.2_BF
•
option to modify a boot image (if the boot image is configured by pServers, you must use the --force option.
•
-R (root-image)
•
-J (media-image) option to modify a media image. The file cannot be updated if the image is currently inserted into the virtual CD (VCD) of a pServer that is not shutdown (booting, booted, suspended, shutting down, etc.). If the media file is inserted into the VCD of a pServer that is shutdown, you can modify the image using the --force option.
-I (boot-image)
option to modify a root image (the file cannot be updated if it is currently being used to root a disk).
2-139
PAN Manager Command Reference -V, --email-severity severity_number
Sets the severity criteria for e-mail notification for PAN security domain events. You must use this option with the -E (default-event-action) option. By default this value is 2. -v, --validate
Checks the current physical resources with those listed in the current (target) PAN configuration. This ensures that after you have modified a PAN configuration archive to work with the current (target) platform configuration, a swap (using the -c (swap) option) will work with the current physical resources. -W, --flow-control {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether flow control is enabled for broadcast network traffic between pServers. By default flow control for the PAN domain is not enabled. If flow control is enabled for a redundant ethernet configuration (rEth) with the reth -F "yes" command, flow control becomes automatically enabled for broadcast traffic between pServers. -w, --owner-location "text"
Adds descriptive text to a PAN security domain configuration specifying where the PAN administrator is physically located. Descriptive text containing spaces must use quotation marks to avoid parsing errors. -X, --export {dir | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Specifies a directory or SCSI path device on which to target the saving of a PAN configuration. By default, exporting a PAN configuration creates an archive file named after the PAN domain from which it was created. To specify a non-default name for the archive file, use the -M (rename-PANarchive). See the Archiving for Disaster Recovery (PAN archiving) section of the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.
2-140
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Caution: PAN administrators temporarily shut down all current LPANs within the PAN domain with this command and should warn LPAN administrators well in advance of using this command option. -x, --reboot
Reboots the PAN domain. PAN administrators use this command to reboot all the LPANs (and the current pServer configurations in each LPAN) within the PAN domain. -Y, --import {dir | "(SCSI_ID)"}
Specifies a directory or SCSI path device from which to import a PAN configuration archive. By default, importing a PAN configuration creates a local archive file in the /opt/panmgr/pars directory on both cBlades named after the PAN configuration archive file. To specify a different name for the archive file locally, use the -M (rename-PANarchive). See the Archiving for Disaster Recovery (PAN archiving) section of the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -y, --set-default-image image_display_name
Specifies the default root and boot images for a PAN security domain. PAN administrators can set the default root and boot images from a list of available images LPAN administrators use to root disks or create their pServers in the PAN security domain. Only PAN administrators have the ability to create, modify, or remove this setting. You can see the default installation setting using the pan -l command. LPAN administrators use the pserver -l command to see the default setting. See the disk or pserver man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. -z, --clear-default-image {-R |-I}
Clears any default boot or root disk image assignment for a PAN security domain.
PM5.2_BF
2-141
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
List the current platforms and their current state within the PAN domain: pan
Display whether the PAN Manager user account tool is enabled for the PAN domain: pan -u -l
Reboot all the LPANs in the PAN domain Development_Lab pan -x Development_Lab
List display names of PAN registered images (this includes boot, root, and media images such as hypervisor ISO images): pan -i
Display detailed information about these images: pan -i -l
Register a boot or root WinPE image: pan -a -I -C /tftpboot/winpe_x86_gs.tgz -T WINPE winpe_x86_gs
Rename the 32-bit RHEL 4.2 boot image (named RHEL420xxxxI_IA32 by default) to RHEL42_32bit_bootimage: pan -I -N "RHEL42_32bit_bootimage" RHEL420xxxxI_IA32
Set the newly renamed, 32-bit RHEL 4.2 boot image RHEL42_32bit_bootimage as the default boot image for all pServers in the PAN security domain: pan -y -I RHEL42_32bit_bootimage
2-142
PM5.2_BF
PAN
Set the name of the PAN to "PAN_002A": pan --set-name "PAN_002A"
Clear the PAN default hypervisor ISO image setting: pan --clear-default-hypervisor-image
Change the hypervisor root password in the PAN to t0pSecret: pan --set-hypervisor-password t0pSecret
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT BFRAME DISK EVENTTYPE LPAN PSERVER SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-143
PAN Manager Command Reference
PANMGR
NAME
panmgr
SYNOPSIS
panmgr [-v]
DESCRIPTION
The panmgr command lists information about the Control Blades (cBlades) and the current version and build number of PAN Manager running on each cBlade
- lists information about the current PAN Manager software.
Using the panmgr command without an argument displays the current role (master or slave) and up since (date and time) information for each cBlade.
OPTIONS
-v, --version
Limits the display to the current PAN Manager version and build number.
EXAMPLES
List the current version of PAN Manager software: panmgr -v
List the cBlades’ master/slave status: panmgr
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
2-144
PM5.2_BF
PIM
PIM
NAME
- lists or modifies hardware and configuration settings for a specified Redundant Power Input Module (PIM-R).
SYNOPSIS
pim [-p "A"|"B"|"none"] [-A amperage_event_trigger] [-a][-W wattage_event_trigger] [-w] platformname/pimn
pim
pim [-e "yes"|"no"] platformname/pimn pim [--select |--unselect] platformname/pimn pim [-l] platformname/pimn
DESCRIPTION
The pim command lists the status of specified PIM-R devices (includes current PIM-R data displays) and allows administrators to configure and modify PIM-R settings. Administrators use the pim command to: •
Display status and settings for one or all PIM-R devices
•
Select and unselect a PIM-R device (similar to select and unselect for a blade)
•
Enable and disable the PIM-R power line preference
•
Set a preferred power line (A, B, or none)
•
Set or clear a PAN Manager event trigger limit for current (in Amperage) and power (in Wattage)
PAN administrator and Operator roles have read/write permissions to configure PIM-R devices; PAN Monitor roles have read-only permissions to display current PIM-R settings. PAN Manager must be running on the cBlades to take advantage of the PAN Manager pim command. The pim command is disabled on systems that do not support the PIM-R option.
2-145
PAN Manager Command Reference
Choosing a Line Preference For Each PIM-R A PIM-R device connects a single power domain to two redundant power sources. BladeFrame BF400 S2 requires four PIM-R devices, which are connected through the BladePlane. If the primary power source fails, the PIM-R automatically switches to the secondary power source, thereby maintaining constant power to the PIM-R device’s power domain. You set a primary power line preference for one of the two power line inputs. You make this selection either physically using the PIM-R device’s Line Preference Select button or using the pim -p (preferred) command option. The default settings on a new PIM-R are that the Line Preference Select button is enabled and PAN Manager’s line preference setting is set to “none.” PAN Manager persists setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device. Setting a power line preference (A or B, which is labeled on each PIM-R device) through PAN Manager automatically disables the Line Preference Select button on the PIM-R device. To re-enable the Line Preference Select button through PAN Manager, you must use the pim -e "yes" command). This command sets the PAN Manager line preference setting to “none” and prevents conflicting preference settings between PAN Manager and the Line Preference Select button. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-146
PIM
platformname/pimN
Specifies a PIM-R, where 1 >= N <= 4. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and PIM-R number. For example, pim2 on the platform named Production would be referred to as Production/ pim2. PIM-R devices are numbered one to four from the bottom up, according to their slot location on the BladePlane. PAN administrators use the bframe command to name or rename a platform.
OPTIONS
-a, --clear-current-limit
Removes any current limit that was set using the -A (current-limit) option. -A, --current-limit {amperage_event_trigger}
(BladeFrame EX only) Specifies an amperage at which the PIM-R device triggers a PAN Manager event. Valid values (in Amps) are integers in the range of 0 to 51. Only use the pim -A or -W options to set PAN Manager event triggers. Do not use these options to configure PIM-R voltages. See the bframe command for details on configuring the voltage input to a PIM-R device. For more information about configuring voltage, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. -e, --enable-pref-button {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the power line preference button (labeled Line Preference Select) on a specified PIM-R is enabled. The default setting for a new PIM-R is that the Line Preference Select button is enabled. If the Line Preference Select button on a PIM-R is disabled, the button on the PIM-R does nothing when you press it. Configuring the PIM-R device’s power line preference using the -p (preferred) option automatically disables the Line Preference Select button. PAN Manager persists any setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device.
2-147
PAN Manager Command Reference -l, --long
Displays the current PIM-R device settings. -p, --preferred-power {"A"|"B"|"none"}
Specifies a preferred (if any) power line for the primary power source for a specified PIM-R and automatically disables the Line Preference Select button on that PIM-R device. If at any time the Line Preference Select button is re-enabled through PAN Manager (using the pim -e "yes" command), PAN Manager’s preferred power line setting is reset to “none.” The default setting on a new PIM-R is that the line preference is set to “none.” PAN Manager persists any setting modifications in the event that you replace a PIM-R device. --select platformname/pimN
Causes the indicator lights on a specified PIM-R device LED to blink blue. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends using this feature to help locate a specific PIM-R on the BladePlane. The blinking blue indication persists until reset with the --unselect option. --unselect platformname/pimN
Terminates the blinking blue indication on a specified PIM-R device. The indicator light on the PIM-R reverts to its normal meaning: steady amber for recognized, steady blue for active. -w, --clear-power-limit
Removes any power limit previously set with the -W (power-limit) option. -W, --power-limit {wattage_event_trigger}
Specifies a wattage at which the PIM-R device triggers a PAN Manager event. Valid values (in Watts) are integers in the range of 0 to 6375. Only use the pim -A or -W options to set PAN Manager event triggers. Do not use these options to configure PIM-R voltages. See the bframe command for details on configuring the voltage input to 2-148
PIM
a PIM-R device. For more information about configuring voltage, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide.
EXAMPLES
List the current settings of PIM-R device pim1 on platform PlatformOne: pim -l PlatformOne/pim1
For PIM-R device pim1 on platform PlatformOne, set the preferred power line to A (this setting disables the Line Preference Select button on the PIM-R device); and set PAN Manager to trigger an event if the PIM-R amperage reaches 30 amps or the wattage reaches 1500 watts: pim -p "A" -A 30 -W 1500 PlatformOne/pim1
Re-enable the Line Preference Select button on this device (this resets the PAN Manager’s line preference setting to “none”): pim -e "yes" PlatformOne/pim1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_bframe).
2-149
PAN Manager Command Reference
POOL
NAME
- creates, lists, or modifies a set of Processing Blades (pBlades) for a local or global pool.
SYNOPSIS
pool [-l] [globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname]
pool
pool [-c | -d] {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname} pool [-L "descriptiontext"] [-n newname] {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname} pool [-G globalpoolname | -g] lpanname/localpoolname pool [-a | -r] platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
DESCRIPTION
The pool command allows PAN administrators to create, list, or modify a global pool of pBlades, or LPAN administrators to create or remove a local pool of pBlades to be used by pServers. PAN Manager enforces a limit on the total number of global pools and local LPAN pools that can be created: 20 global pools, 20 pools per LPAN, and 200 pools total. Using the pool command, administrators perform the following pBlade pool settings: •
PAN Administrators can create, list or modify a global pool.
•
LPAN Administrators can create or remove a local pool.
•
Add pBlades to pools
•
Link a global pool to a local pool. Named global pools functionality allows PAN administrators to create multiple global pools. Administrators can create and authorize access to a global pool for each type of pBlades processor you have in a PAN. The LPAN administrator can then link an existing local pool to this 0global pool.
2-150
PM5.2_BF
POOL
•
Configure a pServer to obtain a failover pBlade from a pool. A pServer cannot have a pBlade assignment (primary or failover) designated by pBlade type. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends PAN or LPAN administrators create global or local pools made of similar types of pBlades by processor-type to ensure that a pServer obtains a pBlade from a pool that is appropriate for its requirements. For example, you would assign 32-bit and 64-bit blades to separate pools. Likewise, Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends assigning pBlades with large memory configurations and fast processor speeds to the same pool to ensure that pServers requiring these pBlade resources always obtain a primary or failover pBlade with a suitable configuration.
See the pserver command man page or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/pn
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows:
PM5.2_BF
•
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
2-151
PAN Manager Command Reference
globalpoolname
Specifies a global pool name. lpanname/localpoolname
Specifies a local pool name within an LPAN. More than one local pool can have the same name in the PAN domain as long as the locals pools are not in the same LPAN.
OPTIONS
-a, --addblade platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Assigns a specified pBlade to a specified global or local pool. Note: With Release 5.0 and higher, the following formats for global pools are removed: pool -a platformname/pn (no global pool name specified) and pool -a platformname/pn lpanname (no local pool name specified). You must specify the global pool name to which you are adding a pBlade. -c, --create {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Creates a specified global (PAN administrator only) or local pool (LPAN administrator only). PAN Manager enforces a limit on the total number of global pools and pools per LPAN that can be created: 20 global pools, 20 pools per LPAN, and 200 pools total. -d, --delete {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Deletes a local or global pool. -g, --clear-global lpanname/localpoolname
Clears the global pool link between the local pool lpanname/ localpoolname and any global pool. It is not necessary to specify the name of the global pool, because a local pool can link to only one global pool. -G, --set-global globalpoolname lpanname/localpoolname
Sets a global pool link between local pool lpanname/ localpoolname and global pool globalpoolname. PAN Manager 2-152
PM5.2_BF
POOL
allows the local pool to access only one global pool at a time. To allow a pServer to access more than one global pools of pBlades, LPAN administrators must create a local pool for each global pool that they want pServers to access. -l, --list [globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname]
Lists the current pBlades assigned to the specified global or local pool. With no argument, this option lists settings and status of all local and global pools. -L, --description "text" {globalpoolname | lpanname/
localpoolname}
Adds text to the description field for a global or local pool. Descriptions are limited to 1024 characters in length. -n, --rename newpoolname {globalpoolname | lpanname/ localpoolname}
Renames the specified local or global pool. -r, --removeblade platformname/pn {globalpoolname | lpanname/localpoolname}
Removes the specified pBlade from the specified global or local pool. You cannot remove a blade from a local pBlade pool if it is a pServer’s current pBlade, and you cannot remove a pBlade from a global blade pool if it is a pServer’s current pBlade, unless you are removing the pBlade from the global pool and adding it to the LPAN in which that same pServer resides.
EXAMPLES
Create a global pool named global_IA64s: pool -c global_IA64s
Create a local pool named local_IA64s in the LPAN DEPT7 and link it to global pool global_IA64s: pool -c -G global_IA64s DEPT7/local_IA64s
PM5.2_BF
2-153
PAN Manager Command Reference
Add pBlade 1 in platform DIV_PLATFORM to the global pool global_IA64s pool -a DIV_PLATFORM/p1 global_IA64s
Add pBlade 2 in platform DIV_PLATFORM to local pool local_IA64s in the LPAN DEPT7 (the pBlade must already be present in the LPAN in which the local pool resides): pool -a DIV_PLATFORM/p2 DEPT7/local_IA64s
Add text to the description field of global pool global_IA64s: pool -L "This pool contains IA64 blades for use by all division LPANs" global_IA64s
List only the names of blade pools (local and global) and their contents, to which you have access: pool
List all blade pools (local and global) and their contents, to which you have access: pool –l
Add vBlade p7-1 in platform zeus to the local pool named pool in the doc LPAN: pool -a zeus/p7-1 doc/pool
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
LPAN PAN
2-154
PM5.2_BF
POOL PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-155
PAN Manager Command Reference
PSERVER
NAME
SYNOPSIS
- creates, lists, or modifies a pServer configuration within an LPAN. pserver
pserver [-c [-I image_name [-K "boot_args"]]lpanname/
pservername pserver [-l] [lpanname | lpanname/pservername] pserver [-I image_name|-i] [-K "boot_args"]lpanname/
pservername pserver [-B|-F] {platformname/pn | localpoolname | "none"} lpanname/pservername pserver -d [-f] lpanname/pservername pserver [-L "labeltext"] [-n new_pservername] [-O activateorder] lpanname/pservername pserver -a switchname [-f][-P {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}] [-G "macaddress"] lpanname/pservername vethn pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" [-f] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername "(X.0)" pserver [-e |-u] DVDROMname lpanname/pservername pserver -m {"(X.0)"}[-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername pserver -m vethn [-D switchname][-P {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}][-G "macaddress"] lpanname/
pservername pserver -M platformname/pn[-n] lpanname/pservername pserver --pan-boot-image image_name lpanname/pservername pserver -r [-f] lpanname/pservername {vethn|"(X.0)"} pserver [-o] {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver -p {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver -h {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername pserver [--fe|--fd|--fc] {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
lpanname/pservername pserver [-S "(SCSI_ID)"|-R [platformname/pn[-n]]]
lpanname/pservername
2-156
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER pserver -b [-I image_name] [-K "boot_args"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname/pservername pserver -s [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]]
lpanname/pservername pserver -x [-I image_name] [-K "boot_args"] [-f] [-T "min" -M "textmessage"] [-w [-q]] lpanname/pservername pserver [--insert-vcd {image_name}|--eject-vcd]
lpanname/pservername pserver --set-keyboard-map keyboardmapname lpanname/
pservername
Synopsis Deprecations for Release 5.1
The syntax “sdn” for the pserver command is deprecated in Release 5.1. The following pserver command options should be removed from any scripts: pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" [-f] [-A {"yes"|"no"}] [-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername {sdn} pserver -m {sdn} [-D "(SCSI_ID)"] [-A {"yes"|"no"}][-o {"yes"|"no"}] lpanname/pservername pserver -r lpanname/pservername {sdn}
The syntax to enable and disable hyper-threading using the pserver command has changed in Release 5.1 The following pserver command option should be removed from any scripts: pserver -h {"yes"|"no"} lpanname/pservername
DESCRIPTION
PM5.2_BF
The pserver command creates, lists, or modifies a pServer within an LPAN configuration. LPAN administrators configure pServers by combining a Processing Blade (pBlade) with Storage Area Network (SAN)-accessible disk devices, fiber channel tape devices, and virtual switch (vSwitch) resources assigned to their LPAN. LPAN administrators use the pserver command to do the following: •
Create, modify, or remove a pServer configuration
•
Specify a boot image and a boot order for a pServer
•
Boot, shut down, suspend, resume, or reboot a pServer
2-157
PAN Manager Command Reference
Using the pserver command, LPAN administrators configure the following pServer settings: •
pBlade resources — Specify whether the pServer uses a particular pBlade or obtains one from a pool of pBlades.
•
SCSI disks from a SAN — Assign disk storage from a SAN to a pServer.
•
SCSI tape devices — Assign fiber channel tape devices to a pServer.
•
vSwitches — Connect a pServer to internal communications and external networks.
•
DVD-ROMs — Access a physical DVD-ROM in an LPAN with shared access to the DVD-ROM drive located on either cBlade.
•
Virtual CD-ROMs — Access a single virtual CD-ROM (VCD) attached to a pServer. In general, PAN Manager attaches one VCD device to a pServer and recognizes the device using unit number "(125.0)". For vBlades running a hypervisor, PAN Manager allocates up to 32 VCDs, one for each Guest OS running on the hypervisor.
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: lpanname/pservername
PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer named Web1, in the LPAN named
2-158
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER production is
referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs, and LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers. platformname/pn
Specifies a platform and a specific pBlade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and the blade name. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. pBlades are numbered as follows: •
From their slot locations 1 through 24 from the bottom up for BladeFrame BF400 S2
•
From their slot locations 1 through 6 from the left for BladeFrame BF200
switchname
Specifies a virtual switch (vSwitch). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to specify the name of any vSwitches created using the sw command. "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). 2-159
PAN Manager Command Reference
"(X.0)"
Specifies the unit name of a pServer’s media assignment. When specifying unit name, enclose the Unit name in parentheses and quotation marks. Caution: The unit name to which you assign a root filesystem for a pServer must be autoenabled for the pServer to boot. vethn
Specifies the map name of a pServer’s vSwitch assignments. You are allowed to map 31 vEths to a pBlade pServer and must use the naming convention: veth0, veth1, veth2...veth30. lpanname/localpoolname
Specifies a local pool within an LPAN. More than one local pool can have the same name in one system as long as the locals pools are not in the same LPAN.
OPTIONS
-a, --attachdevice {switchname | "(SCSI_ID)"} lpanname/ pservername {vethn |"(X.0)"}
Creates a pServer device assignment. Depending on the arguments that you specify, you use this option to attach vEths (-a switchname lpanname/pservername vethn) and disk or fiber-channel tape devices (-a "(SCSI_ID)" lpanname/pservername "(X.0)"). When you first configure pServers in an LPAN, combine this option along with the -A (autoenable) option to attach disks and the -G (mac address) option to attach vSwitches for a pServer. By default, disk attachments are autoenabled. After you create a device assignment using this option, you can modify it with the -m (modifydevice) -D (devicename) option combination.
2-160
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -A, --autoenable-device {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether a disk or fiber-channel tape device is accessible to a pServer when it boots. By default, attaching any SCSI path device name configures the disk to be autoenabled. Use this option to specify disk access as not autoenabled or to reset access to a specific disk as autoenabled. Only one pServer can be autoenabled to a SCSI disk or fiber-channel tape device ID at one time. In the case of high-availability failover, SCSI path devices used for a high-availability application must be allocated to each of the failover pServers that you would like to use for the application. In addition, the SCSI path device(s) must be allocated to each pServer as not autoenabled, because the enabling occurs upon pServer boot and failover. Thus for a high-availability application, you must use the command pserver -a "(SCSI_ID)" -A "no" lpanname/ pservername "(X.0)" to allocate the SCSI path device(s) that contain the high-availability application to the primary and failover pServers. -b, --boot lpanname/pservername
Boots the specified pServer configuration after it is created and defined within an LPAN. By default, a pServer boots with a multi-user configuration. Because conflicts can arise in sharing disk resources, LPAN administrators should contact the PAN administrator if they experience difficulty obtaining their configuration resources. -B, --set-primary-pblade {platformname/pn |localpoolname |"none"}
Specifies whether a pServer’s primary pBlade for booting is a specific blade, a blade from a local pool, or unspecified. To specify a pBlade, that pBlade must be assigned to the same LPAN in which the pServer is located, and the pBlade cannot be assigned to any pool or another pServer. Specifying localpoolname configures the use of a pool of pBlades. PAN and LPAN administrators use the pool command to set up
PM5.2_BF
2-161
PAN Manager Command Reference
global or local pools. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. Note: For a pServer to have access to pBlades in a global pool, PAN administrators first create the global pool using the pool command and then authorize an LPAN to access this pool using the lpan -P -G globalpoolname command. See the lpan command for argument details. Specifying “none” deletes the current pBlade allocation. Use this option to remove the current setting. If you want to change the assignment from a specific pBlade to a local pool, or from a local pool to a specific pBlade, you do not need to delete the original assignment; instead, your new setting overwrites your old assignment. -c, --create lpanname/pservername
Creates a new pServer within an LPAN. For a complete set of instructions to create a pServer, see the appropriate pServer Guide for the software release you want to install on the pServer. You can get this document from the appropriate installation DVD, or from your authorized support website or vendor. -d, --delete lpanname/pservername
Removes a specified pServer from an LPAN. -D, --devicename {"(SCSI_ID)"|switchname}
Specifies either the SCSI path device or the name of a switch. -e, --enabledevice DVDROMname
Allows cBlade DVD-ROM drive access for the specified pServer for a specified DVD-ROM if the pServer is in an access-enabled LPAN. By default, a newly created pServer derives its DVD-ROM access from the LPAN’s access state. --eject-vcd lpanname/pservername
Specifies that PAN Manager should release the current media image from the virtual CD-ROM (VCD) on a specified pServer. If
2-162
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
you force eject an image using the pserver --eject-vcd -f lpanname/pservername command option, you must log on to a console on this pServer and clear the mount point the VCD had on the pServer. Failing to clear the mount point from the pServer may return I/O errors on your next attempt to access an image inserted into the pServer’s VCD. -f, --force
Forces a pServer operation without a prompt. LPAN administrators use this option with the -a (adddevice) or -d (delete) options to remove the verification prompt or with the -s (shutdown) or -x (reboot) options to shut down or reboot a pServer when a node agent is unavailable. Forcing the --eject-vcd option ejects the media image even though it is mounted via the pServer. Forcing a VCD image ejection requires administrators to log on to a console on this pServer and clear the mount point the VCD had on the pServer. -F, --set-failover-pblade {platformname/pn | localpoolname |”none”}
Specifies whether a pServer uses a pool of pBlades or a specified pBlade as a backup if its primary pBlade becomes disabled. By default, there is no failover assignment. To specify a pBlade, that pBlade must be assigned to the same LPAN in which the pServer is located, and the pBlade cannot be assigned to any pool or another pServer. Specifying localpoolname enables the use of a pool of pBlades. PAN and LPAN administrators use the pool command to set up global or local pools. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. Note: If any pServer in an LPAN is to have failover access to a global pool, PAN administrators first create the global pool using the pool command and then authorize an LPAN to access this pool for failover pBlades using the lpan -F -G globalpoolname command (see the lpan command for argument details).
PM5.2_BF
2-163
PAN Manager Command Reference
Specifying “none” deletes the current pBlade allocation. Use this option to remove the current setting. If you want to change the assignment from a specific pBlade to a local pool, or from a local pool to a specific pBlade, you do not need to delete the original assignment; instead, your new setting overwrites your old assignment. --fc --firmware-clear
Clears all firmware settings. This option tells PAN Manager to use the default pBlade configuration during the next pServer boot. --fd --firmware-disable {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
Disables a specified firmware setting on a specified pServer. Disabling a setting through PAN Manager that is not supported on a pBlade will have no effect on the pBlade the next time the pBlade boots. --fe --firmware-enable {"ht"|"ni"|"ve"|"hp"}
Enables a specified firmware setting on a specified pServer. Enabling a setting through PAN Manager that is not supported on a pBlade will have no effect on the pBlade the next time the pBlade boots. -G, --mac-address mac_address
Specifies a MAC address for a virtual Ethernet connection (vEth). -i, --reset-default-image
Resets the pServer’s boot image back to the default image (if any) set by the PAN administrator for the PAN domain. LPAN administrators can use the lpan -l command to list the current default image. -I, --boot-image image_name
Specifies the boot image used to boot the specified pServer. You can use this option either when you create a pServer using the -c (create) command, or after you create it by specifying the pServer. If a PAN administrator creates a default boot image for the PAN security domain, LPAN administrators are not required to 2-164
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
provide an argument to this option and can use the pan -i command to list the default boot image. For a non-default boot image, LPAN administrators must specify one of the available images listed using the pan -i command. See the pan man page or PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information. --insert-vcd {image_name} lpanname/pservername
Specifies that PAN Manager inserts a specified media image into the virtual CD-ROM (VCD) on a pServer. This media image must be a registered image available for all pServers within the PAN domain. LPAN administrators can access the image by logging onto the pServer and mounting the image. The VCD is attached to the first SCSI device of the pServer. The VCD status for a pServer is displayed in the pserver -l command output under the DVD-ROM column as (VCD-ROM). -K, --boot-arguments valid Linux boot argument
Specifies a string to use as a boot argument for a pServer’s boot image. LPAN administrators use either a SAN disk or Network Attached Storage (NAS) for the root filesystem for each pServer. To use SAN disk resources for creating a pServer, LPAN administrators root the disk with their choice of filesystem. This disk must be autoenabled for the pServer to boot and can only be attached as a primary disk for one pServer.
Supported TFTP boot arguments include:
PM5.2_BF
•
noht
•
s
•
ip=
- Turn hyper-threading off.
- Boot the pServer into single user mode. - Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
2-165
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
ks=
- Install using a Red Hat Kickstart installation process, accessing the specified configuration file.
•
nfsroot=
•
root=
- Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
- Used for NFS-based root filesystems.
For an extensive list of valid arguments, go to www.tldp.org at the BootPrompt-HOWTO. For more information on creating an NFS-based root filesystem, see the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide. See the disk man page, PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide, and appropriate pServer Guide for more information. -l, --long
This option lists each pServer configured in an administrator’s LPAN domain and includes a display of description, properties, status information, pBlades, devices, kernel image arguments, hyper-threading status, and user-defined arguments for all pServers within the domain. Specifying a pServer argument following this option only lists these details for the specified pServer. Without the -l option, the pserver command lists the following status information for all the pServer configurations within the user’s security domain: pServer name, status, agent, pBlade, hostname, up time. LPAN administrators can use the pserver -l command to display hypervisor details because PAN Manager treats each hypervisor as a special type of pServer. The output on a hypervisor includes categories similar to the long listing for a regular pServer, but with hypervisor configuration information. -L, --description "text"
Adds descriptive information to a pServer configuration, for human reference.
2-166
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -m, --modifydevice {vethn|"(X.0)"} -D {switchname| "(SCSI_ID)"} lpanname/pservername
Modifies a pServer device assignment by specifying a switch or SCSI path device using the -D (devicename) option. You can also modify the current autoenabled state of the SCSI path device using the -A (autoenable) option and the optional state using the -o (optional) option. For vEths, you can modify the switch name or the MAC address for a vEth using the -G (devicemap-arg) option. You can combine this option with the -o option to designate any or all of disks of pServer as required. A pServer with required disks will not boot, reboot, or recover until all of its required disks are available. If you initiate a boot or reboot command to a pServer with required disks and one or more disks are unavailable, the pServer will enter or remain in one of the following expected states: •
On a boot command, the pServer will remain shut down.
•
On a reboot command from the PAN Manager, the pServer will stay booted.
•
On a reboot command from the pServer, the pServer will shut down.
-M, --migrate platformname/pn-n lpanname/pservername
Indicates that you want to migrate the target pServer from its current vBlade to the specified vBlade. Migration to or from a pBlade is not supported. Migration is not supported between AMD and Intel processors. -M, --message "text"
Specifies an optional shutdown message to be displayed on a pServer to warn users that the pServer is to be shut down. This message is displayed in both telnet and console windows open to a pBlade. LPAN administrators can use this option to provide details to LPAN operators and monitors of how long before a shutdown will occur. LPAN administrators can only use this option with the -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) options.
PM5.2_BF
2-167
PAN Manager Command Reference -n, --rename new_name
Allows an LPAN administrator to rename the specified pServer. -o, --optional {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether an LPAN can boot if the specified pServer does not boot. For example, if you set this to "no" for a specified pServer, you prevent the pServer’s LPAN from booting if this pServer does not boot. -O, --bootorder integer
Specifies the order in which a pServer obtains its resources, including its place in the boot order of pServers within an LPAN. -p, --map-disk-subpaths {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether the subpath mappings of a pServer’s disks are visible to the pServer. By default, a pServer only recognizes the PAN Manager path device SCSI ID for any disk attached to the pServer (not tape devices). If you specify -p “yes” you enable the pServer to see the subpath mappings for it’s disks, and the pServer displays the subpaths for each of its disks, next to the path device SCSI ID. -P, --rate-control {"10Mb"|"100Mb"|"no"}
Sets an upper limit rate, if any, in megabits per second, at which network traffic flows through a pServer interface. To use this option, create the interface with the -a (adddevice) option or modify the traffic rate limit with the -m (modifydevice) option. A pServer’s vEth interface(s) can be assigned to more than one vSwitch. Therefore, an LPAN administrator can map any vSwitch assigned to an LPAN to more than one vEth for each pServer in the LPAN. You need to have multiple vEths on a pServer connected to the same vSwitch in the case where your applications are limited in the rate that they transmit data. --pan-boot-image image_name
Specifies that you want PAN Manager to extract the boot image of a pServer, copy the image to the /images directory on the cBlades 2-168
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
and register the image as image_name in the PAN. This operation subsequently deploys this boot image for use by all other pServers in the PAN. After you use this option, you can see the image, image_name, displayed among all boot images registered in the PAN in the output of the pan -i command. -q, --quiet
Combined with the -w (wait) option, this option suppresses any information messages and the progress indicator during a boot or shutdown process. Use the -q and -w options only in combination with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option. -r, --detachdevice lpanname/pservername {vethn|"(X.0)"}
Removes a specified vEth, disk, or fiber-channel tape device currently attached to a pServer. -R, --resume [platformname/pn-n] lpanname/pservername
Specifies that you want to resume the target pServer (from the corresponding suspend disk) on the appropriate vBlade. For details and cautions on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. During this operation, PAN Manager marks the pServer’s status as Resuming. It then maps the corresponding suspend disk to the hypervisor and loads the pServer’s state from that disk to the chosen vBlade. When the operation is complete, the pServer’s status changes to Booted. The suspend disk is unmapped from the hypervisor and cleaned up. PAN Manager removes the suspend-related partitions from the disk and unmarks it as a suspend disk. However, PAN Manager does not scrub the disk’s contents. --set-keyboard-map keyboardmapname
Specifies the name of a keyboard map to use (currently en-us or de are supported) for the specified pServer.
PM5.2_BF
2-169
PAN Manager Command Reference -s, --shutdown lpanname/pservername
Halts the processing of a pServer, allowing the current pServer configuration to be resumed at a later time. LPAN administrators use this option with the -T (number_of_minutes), -M (message), -w (wait), or -x (reboot) options to create a conditional shutdown. Note: The most current configuration of a pServer is rebooted, which means the exact pBlade a pServer reboots on depends upon its configuration. If a pServer is configured to run on a pBlade from a local pool, or if a pServer failed over to a pblade pool, the pServer will reboot on the first available pBlade within that pool. -S, --suspend "(SCSI_ID)" lpanname/pservername
Indicates that you want to suspend the target pServer to the specified SAN disk. For details and cautions on using this option, see the Using vBlades guide. During this operation, PAN Manager marks the pServer’s status as Suspending and the specified SAN disk as a suspend disk for that pServer. PAN Manager then repartitions the disk, maps it to the hypervisor, and writes the suspend image (the pServer’s entire machine state, including all RAM contents). When the operation is complete, the pServer’s status changes to Suspended and the vBlade becomes available for allocation (according to your configuration). The suspend disk is unmapped from the hypervisor, but the disk’s data (the suspend image) is retained for a future resume. While a pServer is suspended, the only runtime operations it supports are resume or shutdown. I/O and network configuration changes (such as attaching or detaching disks and eths) are not supported for a suspended pServer. If you boot an LPAN that includes a suspended pServer, that pServer remains suspended.
2-170
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER -T, --time number_of_minutes
Specifies an interval of time (in minutes) before a pServer shuts down or reboots. LPAN administrators use this option after the -s (shutdown) option. -u, --disabledevice DVDROMname
Removes cBlade DVD-ROM drive access for the specified pServer for a specified DVD-ROM. Use the lpan -u lpanname command to disable access for all pServers within the LPAN. -w, --wait
Causes the pserver command to pause while a boot or shutdown process is underway and display a progress indicator. Use this option with the -b (boot), -s (shutdown), or -x (reboot) option in cases where you would like to suspend command-line operations until the boot or shutdown is completed. -x, --reboot lpanname/pservername
Specifies that a pServer reboots. You can force a reboot using the -f (force) option.
EXAMPLES
Specify a primary blade for a pServer in the development LPAN on the platform named PlatformOne (this pBlade cannot be assigned to a pool by a PAN administrator): pserver -B PlatformOne/p3 development/webdev1
Configure three pServers in the production LPAN using a local pool of pBlades named webpool for the primary pBlade for each: pserver -B "webpool" production/web1 pserver -B "webpool" production/web2 pserver -B "webpool" production/web3
Here there is no need to use the -F (failover) option, because in the case of pServer failover, the failed pServer gets an available pBlade from a local pool. If none is available, PAN Manager looks to see if the local pool is linked to a global pool. If it is linked and
PM5.2_BF
2-171
PAN Manager Command Reference
the LPAN has access to this linked global pool (the PAN administrator uses the lpan -F -G globalpoolname command), the failed pServer gets an available pBlade from the linked global pool. If none are available, the pServer fails. Utilize a local pool of pBlades named pool2 for pServer webdev1 in the development LPAN: pserver -F pool2 development/webdev1
Failover works the same for this pServer. The difference between pServer configurations web1 and webdev1 failover is seen when failover occurs and the original pBlade is repaired. With web1 failover, a repaired pBlade is returned to the pool after the PAN Manager recognizes it, making it immediately available to all the pServers in the LPAN. In the case of webdev1, the pBlade remains inaccessible until you shut it down and reboot webdev1. Configure the pServer production/web5, to boot using the image named RHEL42_32bit_bootimage: pserver -I RHEL42_32bit_bootimage production/web5
Attach a disk already configured with a root filesystem on it to the pServer web2 within the staging LPAN: pserver -a "(9.0.0.10)" staging/web2 "(0.0)"
Attach a second disk to the same pServer: pserver -a "(9.0.0.4)" staging/web2 "(1.0)"
Remove the unit name “(3.0)” from the pServer web3 in the LPAN production: pserver -r production/web3 "(3.0)"
2-172
PM5.2_BF
PSERVER
Create veth2 with switch2 without a verification prompt using a specific MAC assignment to a pServer within an LPAN: pserver -a switch2 -f -G "02:00:03:00:01:00" production/ web5 veth2
Remove veth2 from the pServer web5: pserver -r production/web5 veth2
Assign webdev1 the second position within the development LPAN to boot: pserver -O 2 development/webdev1
List the details for the hypervisor _hv-zeus-p7 in the doc LPAN: pserver -l doc/_hv-zeus-p7
Assign vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus as a primary blade for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: pserver -B zeus/p7-3 doc/docps1
Assign vBlade p5-2 on platform zeus as a failover blade for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: pserver -F zeus/p5-2 doc/docps1
Migrate the pServer named docps3 (in the doc LPAN) from its current vBlade to vBlade p5-1 (of platform zeus): # pserver -M zeus/p5-1 doc/docps3
Modify the keyboard map to de (standard German keyboard) for the pServer named docps1 in the doc LPAN: # pserver --set-keyboard-map de doc/docps1
PM5.2_BF
2-173
PAN Manager Command Reference
Suspend the pServer named docps2 in the doc LPAN and save its state to the SAN disk 9.0.1.54: # pserver -S "(9.0.1.54)" doc/docps2
Resume the suspended pServer named docps5 in the doc LPAN on vBlade p7-3 on platform zeus: pserver -R zeus/p7-3 doc/docps5
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME BLADE CONSOLE DISK ETH EVENTTYPE FOP LPAN MON PAN POOL SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
2-174
PM5.2_BF
RETH
RETH
NAME
reth
SYNOPSIS
reth [-l] [rethname]
- creates, lists, or modifies a redundant Ethernet configuration
reth -d rethname reth [-F {"yes"|"no"}][-p {"1"|"2"|"none"}] rethname reth -c rethname -1 ethn@platformname/c1 -2 ethn@platformname/c2 [-F "yes"|"no"][-p {"1"|"2"|"none"}] [-P] reth -c rethname -1 ethn@platformname/c1 -2 ethn@platformname/c2 [-F "yes"|"no"] [-P|-S] reth -f {"link"|"ping"} rethname
DESCRIPTION
The reth command creates, lists, or modifies a redundant Ethernet (rEth) configuration. A rEth is a pair of Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), with the same configuration and external connectivity. Network port locations vary depending upon your platform. On BladeFrame, the network ports (NIC cards) are on the Control Blades (cBlades). A rEth provides redundant load-balancing and failover capability for platform network connectivity. PAN administrators use the reth command to configure the following rEth settings: •
PM5.2_BF
cBlade NIC — Specify the cBlade NICs you are configuring as rEths. Each pair of cBlade NICs can only be used by one rEth on a platform at a time. To configure a rEth, you must use the same uplink settings for a given NIC type on each cBlade. For example, if you want two Gigabit rEths, your platform configuration requires four cBlade Gigabit NICs, two on each cBlade.
2-175
PAN Manager Command Reference
•
Load-Balancing Options — Choose one of the following options if you are configuring a rEth to provide a load-balanced service: •
Pair (default) — packets are transmitted on the same Ethernet interface that is receiving packets. For rEths configured in ‘Pair’ mode, you can specify one eth as the primary (active) interface and the other as the secondary (standby) interface. If a “paired” rEth’s primary (active) Ethernet interface cannot either transmit or receive packets for any reason, such as a cblade failure or a failed uplink, rEth failover occurs. Failover allows processing to continue on the secondary (standby) Ethernet interface. If the uplink is reestablished on the primary Ethernet interface that was down, the rEth configuration can automatically failback to the original configuration. When automatic rEth failback occurs, there can be an interruption of service if there is an interval between the time the external link is reestablished and the time that the external network is fully configured. To avoid this kind of interruption of service, you can disable automatic rEth failback using the reth -p none command.
•
Static — incoming and outgoing pBlade traffic is assigned to a cblade NIC based on the MAC address of the pBlade. As long as pBlade MAC addresses end with an even split of even and odd numbers, both cblades balance the traffic volume. This option is most useful when you know some pBlades within the platform will see a higher volume of network traffic profile. For static mode, traffic is assigned to a cblade MAC address based on a pBlade's veth MAC address. If a pBlade MAC address ends with an even number, the vEth uses cbladeA, while vEths with MAC addresses ending with an odd number use cbladeB. This load-balancing option can be undermined if pBlade MAC assignments are overweighted with odd or even numbers. In the event that administrators
2-176
PM5.2_BF
RETH
don't auto-assign these addresses, it is possible to send all static rEth traffic through one cblade which will effect performance. •
Flow Control — PAN administrators can configure PAN Manager network resources to ensure no network packets are dropped between a pServer and its destination on an external network. Enabling flow control for a rEth effects only broadcast traffic between pServers and unicast and broadcast traffic between pServers and an external network: •
To enable pServer to pServer flow control — PAN administrators use the pan -W "yes" command to enable flow control only for broadcast traffic flowing between pServers. Enabling this configuration does not effect unicast traffic between pServers.
•
To enable pServer to External Network flow control — PAN administrators use the reth -F "yes" rethname command to enable flow control for unicast and broadcast traffic flowing from pServers through the specified rEth to an external network. Enabling this configuration also enables flow control for broadcast traffic from pServer to pServer.
Enabling flow control does not effect existing Load-Balancing configurations. PAN Manager Intelligent Network Failover By default, PAN Manager uses “link status mode” to detect a network failover. PAN administrators have the option to configure rEths to report Ethernet device failures based on ping results (ping failover detection mode, or just "ping mode"). The “ping mode” option uses ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ECHO_REQUEST and ECHO_REPLY packets to determine the status of Ethernet devices, while “link status mode” checks for physical connectivity with the external Ethernet switch. To choose ping mode instead of link status mode, PAN administrators must configure several required parameters for each Ethernet device with the PAN Manager eth command and then use PM5.2_BF
2-177
PAN Manager Command Reference
the -f (failover-mode) option to enable “ping mode” on the rEth. (“Ping mode” status parameters set with the eth command are retained but ignored if you do not enable “ping mode” with the reth -f command.) Use one of the following commands to choose how you want PAN Manager to manage network failover on each rEth: •
reth -f ping — Enables PAN Manager to determine Ethernet device failure using “ping mode” for each Eth device in the rEth.
•
reth -f link — Enables PAN Manager to determine Ethernet device failure using “link status mode” for each Eth device in the rEth. This is the default behavior.
PAN Manager enforces that the Ethernet devices on a rEth both operate with the same failover detection mode. In other words, PAN Manager does not allow you to specify “ping mode” for one device and link status mode for the other device in a rEth configuration. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: ethn@platformname/cn
Specifies a cblade Network Interface Card (NIC). PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cblade number. For example eth1 on cblade 2 on the platform named production, would be referred to as eth1@production/c2.
2-178
PM5.2_BF
RETH
OPTIONS
-1, --interface1 ethn@platformname/c1
Specifies the first cblade or NIC of a rEth. -2, --interface2 ethn@platformname/c1
Specifies the second cblade NIC of a rEth. -c, --create rethname
Creates a redundant Ethernet configuration. Use this option along with the -1 (EthernetNIC1) and -2 (EthernetNIC2) options to specify the rEth’s redundant cblade NICs on. Each pair of cblade NICs can only be used by one rEth on a platform at a time. For example, two rEths on one platform require two separate, redundant cblade NICs. See PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for information about configuring the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for a rEth. Caution: To make other modifications to a rEth after it is created, delete it using the -d (delete) option and re-create it using the -c (create) option while making the appropriate modifications. Caution: After you create a rEth, you can only modify a -F (flow control) or -p (primary-eth) setting. To make other modifications to a rEth after it is created, delete it using the -d (delete) option and re-create it using the -c (create) option while making the appropriate modifications. -d, --delete rethname
Removes a specified rEth configuration from a platform. All vSwitch uplinks specifying a rEth must be cleared using the sw -r switchname command before a rEth can be deleted. -f, --failover-mode {"link"|"ping"}
Specify the mode PAN Manager uses to determine Ethernet device failure. By default, PAN Manager uses “link status mode” (failures are determined solely by the link status of the Ethernet device). Specifying “ping” enables “ping mode” (Ethernet device failures are determined by ping results). To enable “ping mode,”
PM5.2_BF
2-179
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager requires the Ethernet devices on a rEth both operate with the same “ping mode” settings. You disable “ping mode” by issuing the “link” option. -F, --flow-control {"yes"|"no"}
Specifies whether flow control is enabled for all network traffic flowing through the rEth. By default flow control for a rEth is not enabled. If flow control is enabled for a rEth with this option, flow control becomes automatically enabled for broadcast traffic between pServers. -l, --long
Lists information about the current rEth configuration(s) for a platform. -p, primary-eth {"1"|"2"|"none"}
Specifies which, if any, cblade NIC is used as the rEth’s primary interface. In addition, this option is used to disable and reinstate automatic rEth failback on an as-needed basis. This option is only used for rEths configured as "paired." In general, you can achieve more uniform distribution of network traffic between the NICs on both cblades using two paired rEths each specifying a primary NIC on a different cblade, as described in the example above. Specifying "none" for a rEth with a primary interface configuration disables automatic rEth failback. After automatic rEth failback is disabled, it can be reinstated using the eth -p n rethname command where n indicates the number of the Ethernet interface (1 or 2) that had been the primary (active) eth. If nothing is specified, the default is 1. -P, --pair
Sets the specified rEth’s Load-Balancing Option as “pair.” This option is the default. The failover policy associated with this configuration is to fail over all rEth send and receive responsibility to the other cblade. When the failed cblade returns, it resumes its original send and receive responsibilities. 2-180
PM5.2_BF
RETH -S, static
Sets the specified rEth’s load-balancing option as static. The failover policy associated with this configuration is to fail over all traffic to the remaining cblade. When the failed cblade returns, the original static assignment resumes.
EXAMPLES
Create a rEth from two gigabit cBlade NICs and a “paired” load-balancing option: reth -c GigaReth -1 eth1@PlatformOne/c1 -2 eth1@PlatformOne/c2 -P
Enable “ping mode” detection on rEth1: reth -f "ping" reth1
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
BFRAME BLADE ETH IP LPAN SW
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-181
PAN Manager Command Reference
ROLE
NAME
role
SYNOPSIS
role [-l][rolename]
- Lists the roles within the PAN or an LPAN security domain.
role [-l] [-P lpanname |-B platformname] role [-l] -U rolename
DESCRIPTION
The role command lists the roles within a specified LPAN. PAN administrators use the role command to list the exact name of roles they use as arguments for the user command when assigning roles to PAN Manager users. To see all the roles within the PAN domain, use the role command without options or arguments.
OPTIONS
-B, --bladeframe platformname
Lists the roles within a specific LPAN. -l, --long
Adds a description for each role within the PAN domain. Use this as a verbose alternative to using the role command without options or arguments. -P, --lpanname lpanname
Lists all roles associated with the specified LPAN. -U, --users rolename
Lists the PAN Manager users for a specified role.
2-182
PM5.2_BF
ROLE
EXAMPLES
Lists all the roles and a description of each role for the PAN domain: role -l
List the users with the role of system or PAN administrator: role -U PAN-Administrator
List the users with the Operator role for the development LPAN: role -U development-LPAN-Operator
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT UMON
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-183
PAN Manager Command Reference
SAN
NAME
- lists configuration information and controls operations on SCSI devices that are physically connected to a PAN.
SYNOPSIS
san [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"]
san
san -s san [-i |-m] san [-a |-d |-p] "(SCSI_ID)" san [-X |-P] [-f] san -n "(new_SCSI_ID)" {"(SCSI_ID)" | "UID"}
DESCRIPTION
The san command allows you to manage disk and tape devices in a Storage Area Network (SAN). After a SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device is physically connected and configured to a platform, PAN administrators use the san command to: •
Display information about these SCSI path devices.
•
Manually scan SCSI resources to discover newly added SCSI path devices.
•
Configure PAN Manager to manually or automatically import newly discovered SCSI path devices into a PAN.
•
Remove a specified SCSI path device or all SCSI path devices from a PAN. This is commonly referred to as disk purging.
•
Rename a SAN device (disk or tape) to have a specific SCSI ID (useful if you want the PAN Manager display names (SCSI IDs) for SAN devices to remain the same, despite changes to the PAN’s overall SAN configuration).
See the disk or tape command for operations that are limited to a disk- or tape-based SCSI device.
2-184
PM5.2_BF
SAN
The discovery process for SCSI path device resources takes place automatically during a cBlade boot. Fujitsu Siemens Computers recommends that you add SCSI device resources during off-hours, or other low traffic times, to minimize the I/O impact that the discovery process might have on the storage network. See the PAN Manager SAN Integration Guide for details. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: "(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
PM5.2_BF
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable). 2-185
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
-a, --add-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Allows you to manually add a specified path device SCSI ID to the PAN after PAN Manager discovers it. PAN administrators only use this option to manually import disks into the PAN after they disable auto-import mode using the -m (manual-pan-import) option. -A, --all-san-devices
Displays all PAN and non-PAN discovered path device SCSI IDs. -C, --configured-san-devices
Lists all path device SCSI IDs that are currently allocated to LPANs, assigned pServers, or reserved to archive DR resources. This listing displays each allocated device’s storage capacity, type of storage array, and storage array serial number. -d, --remove-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Removes a path device SCSI ID from the PAN. This command option fails if the path device SCSI ID is allocated to an LPAN, if PAN Manager is in auto-import mode, or if the disk is reserved to archive DR resources. PAN administrators can remove and purge a path device SCSI ID and UID from the cBlade kernel and PAN Manager by adding the -p (purge-san-device) option (san -dp "(SCSI_ID)"). You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. -f, --force
Forces a san command operation without a prompt. -i, --auto-pan-import
Enables PAN Manager auto-import mode and disables manual device-import mode. With the auto-import mode enabled, all devices discovered outside of the PAN are brought into the PAN when either a scan (using the -s (scan) option) or PAN Manager startup takes place. If auto-import is enabled, you cannot delete a path device. Auto-import mode is enabled by default. 2-186
PM5.2_BF
SAN -l, --long
Lists UID, I/O Path details, and partition information by path device SCSI ID in addition to the default information listing storage capacity, type of storage array, storage array serial number, and LPAN assignment. This option displays a partition table for each path device in a data format you can use as the basis for a new partition table file. To do so, copy this data into any text editor and edit appropriately. Important: Under some circumstances, the path device SCSI ID can have an unexpected form, or can change unexpectedly after a cBlade reboots. This can occur if: •
You change the SAN configuration (including adding or removing one or more disks)
•
You change the cBlade kernel’s SCSI settings
•
You change path groups on existing devices, then reboot (which may change the UIDs of existing devices)
These changes can impact a PAN Manager path device SCSI ID in one of two ways: •
The path device SCSI ID can change from 9.n.n.n to 9.n.128.n
•
The PAN Manager path device SCSI ID can change from 9.n.n.n to 10.n.n.n.
Although this condition is harmless, it may cause confusion. To help prevent the situation in which a single device is identified by multiple path device names, be sure to check to see that any disk or tape SCSI ID target you expose is visible on all paths as the same SCSI ID number when you initially configure the SAN disk or fiber-channel tape device. See the PAN Manager SAN Integration Guide for details. -m, --manual-pan-import
Enables manual device import mode and disables auto-import mode. In manual device-import mode, newly discovered path device SCSI IDs using the -s (scan) option remain outside a PAN PM5.2_BF
2-187
PAN Manager Command Reference
until a PAN administrator manually adds each path device using the -a (add-san-device) option. PAN administrators must enable this mode to allow purging of one or more path device SCSI IDs and UIDs from PAN Manager using the -p (purge-san-device) or -P (purge-all-san-devices) options. By default this option is disabled. -n "(new_SCSI_ID)" {"(SCSI_ID)" | "UID"}
Renames the current SCSI ID of a SAN device to a different SCSI ID. To identify which SAN device you are renaming, you can specify either its current SCSI ID or its unique identifier (UID). -p, --purge-san-device "(SCSI_ID)"
Removes a specified path device SCSI ID from PAN Manager memory. You can combine this option with the -d (remove-san-device) to purge a path device from PAN Manager memory or you can delete the specific path device(s) first and then use this option later. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes. To permanently remove any path device SCSI ID from PAN Manager memory, remove access to the devices in the SAN before you reboot the cBlades. -P, --purge-all-san-devices
Removes all path device SCSI IDs from PAN Manager memory. You can combine this option with the -X (remove-all-san-devices) to purge all path device SCSI IDs from PAN Manager memory or you can delete all path device SCSI IDs first and then use this option later. You should scan for new SCSI devices (using the san -s option) before initiating a SCSI device purge to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of any recent device subpath changes.
2-188
PM5.2_BF
SAN -s, --scan
Instructs PAN Manager to scan its resources for SCSI devices added after the cBlades have booted and PAN Manager is running. This option returns a list of changes found during the scan, along with warnings, if any. When the prompt returns, use the -l (long) option to see newly added disks. -U, --unconfigured-san-devices
Displays information only about SCSI devices in a PAN that are not currently assigned to an LPAN. -X, --remove-all-san-devices
Removes all path device SCSI IDs for devices that are not currently allocated to an LPAN or pServer. If the force option (-f) is not used, PAN Manager prompts the user for a confirmation. PAN administrators can purge all path device SCSI IDs and UIDs from the cBlade kernel and PAN Manager by adding the -P (purge-all-san-device) option (san -XP "(SCSI_ID)"). Before you purge all devices, you should manually scan (using the option) to ensure that PAN Manager is aware of all sub paths to the path device before the purge. -s
EXAMPLES
Search for newly added SAN storage devices: san -s
List detailed information about all path device SCSI IDs: san -l
List detailed information about path device (9.0.1.76): san -l "(9.0.1.76)"
List brief information about all unconfigured path device SCSI IDs: san -U
PM5.2_BF
2-189
PAN Manager Command Reference
Remove all disks that are not currently allocated for another use; do not prompt for confirmation: san -X -f
Remove path device (9.0.1.76) (it must not be currently allocated for another use): san -d "(9.0.1.76)"
Remove path device (9.0.1.76) (it must not be currently allocated for another use) and purge all references to its UID from PAN Manager memory : san -dp "(9.0.1.76)"
Rename the device 9.0.1.25 to 12.3.0.58: # san -n “(12.3.0.58)” “(9.0.1.25)”
Specify a new SCSI ID for a device whose UID is EMC-SYMMETRIX-WWN-6006048000038722003753594d3237 41: # san -n “(9.0.3.78)” “EMC-SYMMETRIX-WWN-6006048000038722003753594d323741”
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
DISK LPAN PSERVER
2-190
PM5.2_BF
SAN TAPE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
PM5.2_BF
2-191
PAN Manager Command Reference
SMTPSVR
NAME
smtpsvr
SYNOPSIS
smtpsvr [-l] [domainname]
- lists and modifies the PAN security domain’s configuration for the Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server at your site.
smtpsvr [-i ipaddress] [-p port] [-U username] [-P password] [-s send-address] [domainname]
DESCRIPTION
The smtpsvr command lists and modifies the configuration to allow a PAN to communicate with the Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server at your site. PAN administrators use the smtpsvr command to allow a PAN to send e-mail messages from their SMTP server as well as set up a sender address of the PAN Manager mail gateway. Though it is possible to have more than one PAN administrator enabled to configure a PAN’s SMTP server, PAN administrators can only configure one mail gateway for a platform. Only PAN administrators can use the smtpsvr command.
OPTIONS
-l, --list
Displays the current configuration for your SMTP server and the PAN Manager mail gateway. -i, --ipaddress ipaddress
Modifies the IP address to match your SMTP server. To clear the setting, PAN administrators must leaving an empty string for this argument. If this configuration is empty, PAN Manager cannot send any e-mail notifications. -p, --port port_number
Modifies the port number to match your SMTP server. 2-192
PM5.2_BF
SMTPSVR -P, --password "text"
Modifies the password associated with the account designated with the -U (user) option. -s, --send-address emailaddress
Modifies the sender of the PAN Manager mail gateway. There can only be one send-address for a platform and this e-mail address must match an existing account on your SMTP server. -U, --user username
Modifies the Linux account name of the PAN administrator(s) you designate as the sender. Only accounts with PAN administrator roles are valid.
EXAMPLES
Configure the PAN Manager to not send e-mails for the LPAN domain, PlatformOne/p3 development smtpsvr -i "" PlatformOne/p3 development
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
PAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_pan).
PM5.2_BF
2-193
PAN Manager Command Reference
SNMP
NAME
- lists or modifies the configuration for a PAN Manager Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent.
SYNOPSIS
snmp [-I ipaddress] [-P port] [-R readstring] [-S {"monitor"|"control"|"disable"}[-W writestring] [-T sysContact] [-N sysLocation]{-G |-L lpanname}
DESCRIPTION
The snmp command lists or modifies SNMP agent settings for a specified security domain — global (the PAN domain) or LPAN domain. PAN Manager SNMP agents support SNMP versions 1 and 2c. PAN Manager software provides an SNMP agent for each security domain. You are required to have PAN or LPAN administrator permission to use the snmp command, depending on the SNMP agent’s security domain.
snmp
For example, if there is one platform in a PAN and it has four LPANs, this system would have a total of five SNMP agents: •
One PAN domain agent
•
Four LPAN agents
SNMP agents are disabled by default in PAN Manager software. To enable SNMP, administrators use the snmp command to configure each agent. It is recommended that you use non-default values when enabling your community strings. All SNMP agents reside on the Master cBlade, each one with a unique combination of IP address and UDP port used to communicate with a set of SNMP managers. This pair must not be bound to a specific cBlade. See the PAN Manager extnet command or the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information about SNMP agents. Use the snmp command to set attributes of each agent including:
2-194
PM5.2_BF
SNMP
•
IP address — the IP address to which the agent binds.
•
UDP Port — the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port to which the agent binds.
•
Community Strings — the accepted authorization string required from an SNMP manager to send valid read or read/ write requests to an agent. It is recommended that you enter a non-default value for read-only and read/write community strings.
•
Monitor and Control — the level of authority an agent has. SNMP agent action is an escalating scale ranging from disable, to monitor only, to monitor and control. You enable a level using the -S option.
PAN Manager software administrators also need to authorize external SNMP managers, which may send requests to or receive traps from a specified SNMP agent. You use the snmpmgr command for these configuration options. Each SNMP agent can respond to more than one SNMP manager. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information on configuring events, triggers, and SNMP. PAN Manager Command Syntax For the snmp command, providing only a global (the PAN domain) LPAN argument displays a list of the SNMP agents configured for that area. This security domain name is also the command argument to specify an agent you want to modify.
OPTIONS
-G, --global-pan-domain
Specifies the agent you are configuring is a global (PAN) agent. -I, --ipaddress ipaddress
Specifies the IP address of the specified SNMP agent. -L, --lpan lpanname
Specifies that the agent you are configuring is an LPAN agent. PM5.2_BF
2-195
PAN Manager Command Reference -N, --location System_Location_String
Specifies the physical location of the platform running the managed node. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP traps and managers. -P, --port port_number
Specifies the UDP port number of the specified SNMP agent. This option takes a valid port number as an argument. While the default SNMP port is 161, you can choose a non-default setting, providing it is unused. -R, --read-community "text"
Specifies a read-only community string accepted by the SNMP agent. This option requires a string as an argument. A non-default setting for read-only community strings is recommended. -S, --agent-scope {"monitor"|"control"|"disable"}
Specifies the SNMP agent functions and provides a way to enable or disable the snmp monitor and control functions. -T, --contact System_Contact_String
Specifies the contact information for the System Contact. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP traps and managers. -W, --write-community "text"
Specifies a read-write community string accepted by the SNMP agent. This option requires a string as an argument. A non-default setting for read/write community strings is recommended.
EXAMPLES
Enable an SNMP agent for the staging LPAN, specifying port 161 on IP address 12.24.48.96 with a read community string cgable24, a read/write community string cgable45, and with monitor and control enabled: snmp -I 12.24.48.96 -P 161 -R cgable24 -W cgable45 -S control
2-196
PM5.2_BF
SNMP
Modify this agent to have a new read/write community string cgable28 snmp -W cgable28
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENTTYPE EXTNET SNMPMGR
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_snmpmgr).
PM5.2_BF
2-197
PAN Manager Command Reference
SNMPMGR
NAME
- lists or modifies the set of authorized Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) managers with which a PAN Manager SNMP agent interacts.
SYNOPSIS
snmpmgr -I ipaddress [-P port -C trapstring] [-M manageripmask |-m] [-V {1|2}]{-G |-L lpanname}
snmpmgr
snmpmgr -r ipaddress {-G |-L lpanname}
DESCRIPTION
The snmpmgr command lists or modifies the set of authorized SNMP managers with which each SNMP agent communicates. To list all the SNMP managers to which an agent responds, use the IP address as a command argument and identify the agent by its security domain (-G for global PAN domain or -L for LPAN domain). Using the snmpmgr command, you can specify the IP address of an SNMP manager with which an agent interacts or specify a UDP trap port, a trap community string and IP address of an SNMP manager to which you want an SNMP agent to send traps. PAN Manager software provides an SNMP agent for each security domain of the PAN structure - global (the PAN domain) or LPAN. You are required to have PAN or LPAN administrator permission to use the snmpmgr command, depending on the area of responsibility the SNMP agent is assigned. The snmpmgr command allows you to specify the following attributes:
2-198
•
IP addresses — the IP address(es) and the network mask(s) of the SNMP manager(s) with which an agent interacts.
•
UDP Trap Port — the UDP port assignment of the SNMP manager with which an agent interacts.
•
Trap community string — the community string sent in each trap to the specified SNMP manager.
PM5.2_BF
SNMPMGR
Administrators use the snmpmgr command to establish the set of SNMP managers, which may request and/or receive traps from a specified SNMP agent. Use the snmp command to set up the attributes for each SNMP agent. PAN Manager Command Syntax For the snmpmgr command, providing only a global (the PAN domain) or LPAN argument displays the configuration for the SNMP manager, which send requests to and receive traps from a specified SNMP agent for that area. This security domain name is also the command argument to specify an SNMP manager you want to modify.
OPTIONS
-C, --trap-community "text"
Specifies a community string an agent uses to send traps to an SNMP manager. -G, --global-pan-domain
Specifies the agent that responds to the global (PAN domain) manager you are configuring. -I, --ipaddress ipaddress
Specifies the IP address of an SNMP manager with which an agent interacts. Use this option alone to print out the specified SNMP manager setting or with the -p (port) and -c (trapcommunity) options to assign the port setting and trap community string for an SNMP manager with which a specified agent interacts. -L, --lpan lpanname
Specifies the agent that responds to the LPAN manager you are configuring. -M, --ip-mask manageripmask
Specifies the IP address for a network mask. By default, the network mask is set to 255.255.255.255. See the PAN Manager
PM5.2_BF
2-199
PAN Manager Command Reference
Administrator’s Guide for details in configuring SNMP managers and trap destinations. -m, --reset-mask
Resets the manager network mask to 255.255.255.255. -P, --port port_number
Specifies the UDP port number to which a specified SNMP agent sends traps. For the agent to send traps to this manager, the port number must be greater than zero. To prevent an agent from sending traps to this manager, assign the UDP port to zero. -r, --remove-ipaddress ipaddress
Removes an SNMP manager from the set of managers with which an SNMP agent interacts. -V, --version {1|2}
Specifies an administrator’s trap version choice between SNMPV1 or SNMPV2C. See the PAN Manager Administrator’s Guide for details of configuring SNMP trap version.
EXAMPLES
Create a staging LPAN SNMP manager with the IP address 12.24.48.95 the staging SNMP agent interacts with: snmpmgr -I 12.24.48.95 staging
Create the staging LPAN SNMP manager with the IP address 12.24.48.95 the staging SNMP agent sends traps to using the community string cgable to port 1090: snmpmgr -I 12.24.48.95 -P 1090 -C cgable staging
Remove the staging SNMP manager: snmpmgr -r 12.24.48.95 staging
RETURN VALUE 2-200
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1. PM5.2_BF
SNMPMGR
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENTTYPE SNMP
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_snmp).
PM5.2_BF
2-201
PAN Manager Command Reference
SW
NAME
sw - creates, modifies, or lists the configuration for a Virtual Switch
(vSwitch).
SYNOPSIS
sw -n newvswitchname oldvswitchname sw [-l] [vswitchname] sw [-c |-d|-r] vswitchname sw [-c] [-U -E {rethname|} [-V VLAN_ID | -N VLAN_name]]
vswitchname
DESCRIPTION
The sw command creates, modifies, or lists the configuration for a virtual switch (vSwitch). vSwitches establish connectivity between pServers and external networks or between pServers. PAN administrators use the sw command to create enough vSwitches to accommodate requests from the LPAN administrators for vEths to provide one of two types of connectivity: •
Internal Connectivity LPAN administrators can create vEths for pBlade-to-pBlade communication using any vSwitch they have permission to access. If two pServers connect to the same vSwitch, the two pServers can communicate.
•
External Connectivity PAN architecture only supports external network communication through Redundant Ethernet (rEth) configurations. PAN administrators can only create vSwitches for external connectivity using an uplink configured with the reth commands. PAN administrators create vSwitches for external connectivity with the sw command by specifying the rEth and optional VLAN ID configuration the vSwitch uses.
2-202
PM5.2_BF
SW
External traffic through an uplink can be non-VLAN tagged over any rEth or VLAN-tagged over the Gigabit rEths . Only uplinked vSwitches on a rEth can have a VLAN setting. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: vswitch_name
Specifies a switch name. You cannot name a vSwitch beginning with the three characters eth, since these characters are reserved for switch-related devices (names for LPANs, pServers, even users can begin with these characters, however). rethname
Specifies a rEth created with the reth command. VLAN_ID
Specifies a VLAN ID configured using the eth command.
OPTIONS
-c, --create vswitchname
Creates a vSwitch. You cannot create a vSwitch and an uplink in the same command. -d, --delete vswitchname
Removes the specified vSwitch configuration. This option can be combined with the -f (force) option.
PM5.2_BF
2-203
PAN Manager Command Reference -E, --reth-device {rethname}
Specifies a rEth for a vSwitch’s external network connectivity. Note: You are required to configure rEths using the reth commands before you can associate a vSwitch with it. You must clear this uplink using the -r (clear-uplink) option before you can delete this rEth with the reth command. -l, --long
Lists the current vSwitches within a platform and includes a listing for each vSwitch’s External connectivity and Uplink settings. -n, --rename newvswitchname oldvswitchname
Renames the specified existing vSwitch. -N, --vlan-name VLAN_name
Specifies an optional VLAN name assigned to a specified Ethernet card for the -U (set-uplink) option. -r, --clear-uplink vswitchname
Clears the current assignment of a specified vSwitch configuration. Clearing a vSwitch uplink makes it unusable as a conduit to an external network. You must use this option when you want to remove or modify a rEth configuration. -U, --set-uplink vswitchname
Associates a vSwitch with a specified rEth and its uplink information. Use the reth -l rethname command to list the available uplinks configured for your rEth. You cannot create a vSwitch and add an uplink at the same time. Caution: You must clear this uplink with the -r (clear-uplink) option before you can remove or modify this rEth at a later time with the reth command. -V, --vlan-id VLAN_ID
Specifies an optional VLAN ID assigned for a rEth. Use this option with the -U (set-uplink) option. To see the list of valid (if any) 2-204
PM5.2_BF
SW
VLAN IDs for a rEth, use the reth -l rethname command for the Gigabit cBlade NICs that make up your rEth. Note: You can only assign one VLAN ID to a vSwitch. For example, if you have five VLAN IDs configured for a rEth that LPAN administrators will use for external network connectivity, you must create five vSwitches.
EXAMPLES
Create a vSwitch, ext_sw: sw -c ext_sw
Add the GigaReth uplink configuration and VLAN id 17 already configured to the rEth of the vSwitch, ext_sw: sw -U -E GigaReth -V 17 ext_sw
Remove the VLAN Ids from the configuration for the vSwitch, GigaReth: sw -r GigaReth
Delete the vSwitch, ext_sw, without verification prompt: sw -d -f ext_sw
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ETH IP PSERVER
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_eth). PM5.2_BF
2-205
PAN Manager Command Reference
TAPE
NAME
tape
SYNOPSIS
tape [-l] [-A |-C |-U |"(SCSI_ID)"]
- lists tape devices physically connected to a PAN.
tape -L "text" "(SCSI_ID)"
DESCRIPTION
The tape command displays information about tape devices physically connected to a platform, and also allows you to set a text string that will be displayed in the “Description” field of subsequent detailed listings. Issuing the tape command with no options displays a brief listing of all tape devices. You can produce brief or detailed listings for a specific tape device as specified by its SCSI ID, or for all tape devices, or for just those that are configured or unconfigured for an LPAN. You can also specify a descriptive text string that will be displayed as part of the long information listing. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Addition naming convention considerations for this command include:
2-206
PM5.2_BF
TAPE
"(SCSI_ID)"
Specifies a device’s PAN Manager SCSI ID for a SAN storage array disk or a tape device rather than a subpath SCSI ID of the device. When specifying a path device SCSI ID, use the convention "(9.0.1.54)" where:
OPTIONS
•
The SCSI_ID is enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks.
•
9
•
0
•
1
•
54
is a cBlade-kernel-generated pseudo-device reference to a unique multipath ID. is the PATH_GROUP ID.
is the target ID of the storage array device attached to the cBlade (variable when there are multiple storage arrays). is the LUN residing on target 1 (always variable).
-A, --all-tapes
Displays I/O path information about all tape devices attached to the PAN. -C, --configured-tapes
Displays I/O path information about only configured tape devices attached to the PAN. -l, --long
Displays a detailed listing of the specified tape device(s). -L, --description "text"
Sets a text string that will be displayed in the Description field of long listings for a specified tape device. -U, --unconfigured-tapes
Displays I/O path information about only unconfigured tape devices attached to the PAN.
PM5.2_BF
2-207
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
Set the descriptive text string "StorageTek 9840B" for the tape device at “(9.0.0.170)”: tape -L "StorageTek 9840B" "(9.0.0.170)"
Produce a detailed listing of the tape device at “(9.0.0.170)”: tape -l "(9.0.0.170)"
Produce a brief listing of just those tape devices that are assigned to an LPAN: tape -C
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
LPAN PSERVER SAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-208
PM5.2_BF
UMON
UMON
NAME
umon - creates, modifies, or lists user-defined monitor resources for
an LPAN.
SYNOPSIS
umon [-c] -E exec [-L description] [-I interval][-D delay] [-U unit] [-a eventname -C {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="} -T value -S {1-6}]
lpanname/monitorname umon -m eventname [-N newname] [-C {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="}] [-T value][-S {1-6}]
lpanname/monitorname umon -n newname lpanname/monitorname umon -r eventname lpanname/monitorname umon -d lpanname/monitorname umon [-l] lpanname[/monitorname]
DESCRIPTION
The umon command provides the ability to create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors defined by the user to monitor the activity on an LPAN. The events tracked by these monitors can help monitor and subsequently control PAN Manager behavior. Output can be used to monitor applications and, if necessary, trigger application fail-over. User-defined monitor resources let a user create a set of health, status, or statistical monitors and use the monitor’s events to control PAN Manager behavior. administrators configure resources for a specific monitor by specifying the following attributes:
PM5.2_BF
•
Monitor name
•
Monitor description
•
Names of the health, status, or statistical events connected with this user-defined monitor
•
Value used for the comparison
2-209
PAN Manager Command Reference
OPTIONS
•
Time to delay the start of the user-defined monitor
•
Path to the executable script
•
Frequency with which the user-defined monitor runs
•
Event severity
-a, --add-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be added to the user-defined monitor. -C, --comparator-type {"<"|">"|"=="|"<="|">="|"!="}
Specifies a comparing symbol to enable a user to compare a target value with a return value from a user monitor. -c, --create
Creates a basic user monitor when an executable script path is specified using the -E (executable) option. -D, --startup-delay time_in_seconds
Specifies the number of seconds to wait after the start of the application or load balancer before starting the monitor. -d, --delete
Deletes the specified user-defined monitor. -E, --executable "text"
Specifies the path to the executable script when the user-defined monitor is first created. -I, --schedule-interval {time_in_seconds}
Defines the frequency that the specified monitor will run. The default and the minimum time interval is 10 seconds. -L, --description "text"
Specifies an optional description of the user-defined monitor when it is first created. 2-210
PM5.2_BF
UMON -l, --long
Lists information about current user-defined monitors. Without an additional argument, the list option displays the Name, Description, path to the executable, Schedule Interval, and Startup Delay for all user-defined monitors within a specified LPAN. -m, --modify-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be modified in an existing user-defined monitor. -N, --new-event-name event_name
Renames the specified event. -n, --rename {new_monitor_name}
Renames the specified existing user-defined monitor. -r, --remove-event event_name
Specifies the health, status, or statistical event to be removed from an existing user-defined monitor. -S, --event-severity {1-6}
Specifies the severity of the event as an integer between 1 and 6. -T, --target-value integer
Specifies an integer indicating the value that the returned monitor value will be compared against. -U, --set-unit unit
Assigns a unit measure for the monitor value, for example bytes/sec or percentage.
EXAMPLES
Create a standard VMware status application monitor vm_status: umon -c -E "/opt/panmgr/templates/vmware/status.sh" MyLPAN/vm_status
PM5.2_BF
2-211
PAN Manager Command Reference
Create a PAN Manager event vmstuck of severity 3 whenever your VMware status application monitor vm_status returns a value equal to 1: umon -a vmstuck -C "==" -T -1 -S 3 MyLPAN/vm_status
Create a PAN Manager event vmerror of severity 3 whenever your VMware status application monitor vm_status returns a value greater than 0: umon -a vmerror -C ">" -T 0 -S 3 MyLPAN/vm_status
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
EVENT LPAN
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-212
PM5.2_BF
USER
USER
NAME
- creates or modifies attributes, including role assignments, for each PAN Manager software user.
SYNOPSIS
user [-a |-m] [-N fullname][-T title][-E email][-D deptname] username
user
user -r [-f] username user [-l] [username] user [-l] [-O |-S |-B platformname |-P lpanname] user [-aR |-rR] rolename username
DESCRIPTION
The user command creates or modifies attributes, including role assignments, for each PAN Manager software user. PAN administrators can create PAN Manager users with the same username on the cBlades using either the account command or another Linux account management tool. PAN Manager users require a Linux user account created with the PAN Manager command, account, for cBlade access. You should create PAN Manager accounts for those administrators who will use PAN Manager to manage a PAN or an LPAN. PAN Manager users with only a PAN Manager user account cannot access the cBlades directly. Using the user -l command without an argument displays a list of current users. PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed.
PM5.2_BF
2-213
PAN Manager Command Reference
Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: username
Reference to the username PAN Manager uses to identify a PAN Manager user. lpanname|platformname
Specifies the LPAN or platform name to which you are adding users.
OPTIONS
-a, --add username
Adds a specified Linux account user as a PAN Manager user. -aR, --assign rolename username
Assigns a role to a user. You can get a complete list and description of current roles using the role -l command. -B, --framename platformname
Displays a list of users for a specified platform. Use this option in combination with the -l (list) option. -D, --deptname "text"
Specifies a user’s department. Department names cannot contain spaces. -E, --email emailaddress
Specifies the e-mail address for a user. -f, --force
Forces a user command operation without a prompt. -l, --long
Lists information about current users. Without an additional argument, the list option displays the roles, full name, title, e-mail, 2-214
PM5.2_BF
USER
and department name for all users, while providing a username displays this information for a specified user. You can use this option in combination with the -C (componentUsers), -S (sysadmins) and -O (roles) options to display a filtered list of users. -m, --modify username
Modifies the settings for a specified PAN Manager user. -N, --fullname fullname
Specifies the full name of a user, if needed. Full names cannot contain spaces. -O, --roles {lpanname|platformname}
Lists all the users by username, and the roles they have been assigned. Use this option in combination with the -l (long) option. -P, --lpanusers lpanname
Displays a list of users in a specified LPAN. Use this option in combination with the -l (list) option. -r, --remove username
Removes a specified PAN Manager user. -rR, --un-assign rolename username
Removes a role from a user. -S, --sysadmins {lpanname|platformname}
Lists all the users assigned the role of System administrators. Use this option in combination with the -l (long) option. -T, --title "text"
Specifies the title of a user, if needed. Titles cannot contain spaces.
PM5.2_BF
2-215
PAN Manager Command Reference
EXAMPLES
Add a full name and an e-mail address to the user cgable: user -m -N Clark_Gable -E [email protected] cgable
List the users with the LPAN administrator role in the LPAN development: user -l development-LPAN-Administrator
Give user cgable an LPAN administrator role in the development LPAN: user -aR development-LPAN-Administrator cgable
RETURN VALUE
On success, returns 0. On error, returns 1.
AUTHOR
Egenera, Inc.
SEE ALSO
ACCOUNT ROLE
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_role).
2-216
PM5.2_BF
VERSION
VERSION
NAME
version - Lists versions of software packages installed on a cBlade
or pServer.
SYNOPSIS
version [-c |-p |-e |-x |-g] [platformname/cn |-s lpanname/pservername] version -r {"egenkern"|"panmgr"}[platformname/cn|-s
lpanname/pservername]
DESCRIPTION
The version command lists versions of software packages (RPMs) installed on a platform. Specific information displayed includes: •
Software installation history, detailing release and build number, and build date for either a specified cBlade or a pServer.
•
The version(s) of Installation media, Linux kernel, Egenera kernels, PAN Manager software, and Egenera RPMs that have been installed on a specified cBlade or pServer.
•
A log of all Egenera RPM installations made to date.
PAN administrators use the version command to list the history, version number, and kernel type of software running on a specified cBlade or pServers. LPAN administrators use the version command to list the history, version number, and kernel type of software running on a specified pServer in their LPAN. All users can use the version command without arguments to display a list of all version information for the platform. The specified cBlade or pServer you are interested in must be currently booted for the information to be updated or displayed.
PM5.2_BF
2-217
PAN Manager Command Reference
PAN Manager Command Naming Conventions Names must begin with either an alphanumeric character or a period (.) and are limited to a maximum of 32 characters with this limited character set: [a-z][A-Z][0-9][.][-][_][$]. Duplicate names in the same name space are not allowed. Additional naming convention considerations for this command include: platformname/cN
Specifies a cBlade. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the platform name and cBlade number. For example, pBlade 2 on the platform named production would be referred to as production/p2. lpanname/pservername
Specifies a pServer. PAN Manager naming conventions require you to use a forward slash (/) between the LPAN name and the pServer name. For example, the pServer, Web1, to be designated as a MON server in the production LPAN, would be referred to as production/Web1. PAN administrators use the lpan command to name LPANs, and LPAN administrators use the pserver command to name pServers.
OPTIONS
-c, --cd-version
Displays the release and build number of the installation media for a cBlade or pServer as well as the date the installation was built. -e, --egen-kernel
Displays the release and build number of the production kernel and user packages for pServers as well as the date the kernel package was built.
2-218
PM5.2_BF
VERSION -g, --revision-log
Displays a list of the production RPMs installed on the cBlade. This options displays the output of the Linux cat command on the log of the package installation process. -p, --panmgr-version
Displays the release and build number of PAN Manager running on the specified cBlade or pServer, as well as the date the package was built. -r, --rpm {"egenkern"|"panmgr"}
Displays the RPMs used to install the specified component, the production Kernel or the PAN Manager software. -s, --pservername lpanname/pservername
Specifies the LPAN and pServer you want to display version information about. Without this option, you can only display version information about cBlade software. -x, --linux-kernel
Displays the kernel version of the operating system running on the cBlade. This output is taken from the output of the Linux command uname -r.
SEE ALSO
PM5.2_BF
To view the man page for a PAN Manager command, enter the following (in all lowercase letters) at the Linux prompt: man egenera_commandname (for example, man egenera_lpan).
2-219
Related Documents
Pan Manager Command Reference
June 2020 4
Command Reference
October 2019 23
Pan Manager Technical Overview
June 2020 2
Unix Command Reference
November 2019 9
Mechanical 4 Command Reference
May 2020 2